Chapter 2
Corel® WordPerfect® Product Commands
AbbreviationCreate
Purpose
Create an abbreviation.
Syntax
AbbreviationCreate (AbbreviationName: string; Template: enumeration; Text: string)
Parameters
AbbreviationName
string
Template
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
QuickWords!
SharedLibrary!
Text
string (optional)
See Also
AbbreviationDelete, AbbreviationExpand
AbbreviationDelete
Purpose
Delete an abbreviation.
Syntax
AbbreviationDelete (AbbreviationName: string; Template: enumeration)
Parameters
AbbreviationName
string
Template
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
QuickWords!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
AbbreviationCreate, AbbreviationExpand
AbbreviationDlg
Purpose
Display the Abbreviations dialog box.
Syntax
AbbreviationDlg ()
See Also
AbbreviationCreate, AbbreviationDelete, AbbreviationExpand, AbbreviationsShippingMacro
AbbreviationExpand
Purpose
Expand an abbreviation.
Syntax
AbbreviationExpand (AbbreviationName: string; Template: enumeration)
Parameters
AbbreviationName
string (optional)
Template
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
QuickWords!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
AbbreviationCreate, AbbreviationDelete, ExpandAllAbbrevShippingMacro
AbbreviationsShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro ABBREV.WCM to display the Abbreviations dialog box in a modeless state. ABBREV.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
AbbreviationsShippingMacro ()
AboutDlg
Purpose
Display the About Corel WordPerfect dialog box, which displays product and license information.
Syntax
AboutDlg ()
AddressBookDlg
Purpose
Display the Address Book dialog box. You can also pre-select certain options using the parameters. If OK is clicked to dismiss the dialog, the Address Book will remember the currently selected addresses.
Syntax
boolean := AddressBookDlg (SelectionType: enumeration; CurrentSelections: enumeration; AddressBook: string; DialogTitle: string; OKButtonText: string)
Parameters
SelectionType
enumeration (optional) Default = SingleSelection!
MultipleSelection!
SingleSelection!
CurrentSelections
enumeration (optional) Default = Ignore!
Ignore!
Reselect!
AddressBook
string (optional) The name of the address book to view.
DialogTitle
string (optional) Change the text of the title bar.
OKButtonText
string (optional) Change the text of the OK button. Default = OK.
See Also
?AddressBookSelection, AddressBookInsertAddr, AddressBookSelectionGetField, AddressBookSelectionFormatAddr
AddressBookFormatAdd
Purpose
Create a custom address format and add it to the list of address formats.
Syntax
AddressBookFormatAdd (Name: string; Format: string)
Parameters
Name
string The name of the new custom format.
Format
string The address format string. Data fields are designated by enclosing the field code number in square brackets ([ ]). Use the Codes button on the Macro Bar to insert hard return or tab codes. Although the codes look like bracketed text, they are codes in the text string. For example:
AddressBookFormatAdd (Name: “Test”; Format: “[12289][HRt][14889][HRt][14887], [14888] [14890]”)
Use AddressBookGetFieldCount, AddressBookGetFieldNumber, and AddressBookGetFieldName to get the names and code numbers of the address book fields.
See Also
AddressBookFormatDelete, AddressBookGetFieldCount, AddressBookGetFieldName, AddressBookGetFieldNumber
AddressBookFormatDelete
Purpose
Delete a custom address format from the list of address formats. System (predefined) address formats cannot be deleted from the address format list.
Syntax
AddressBookFormatDelete (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string The name of the custom format to delete.
See Also
AddressBookFormatAdd
AddressBookFormatGetCount
Purpose
Return the number of available address formats. Address formats can be referenced by index number to return information about the format. See AddressBookFormatGetName() and AddressBookFormatGetFormat(). Some address formats are provided with the program (predefined) and cannot be deleted. These formats are indexed one through the number of formats provided. User-defined address format indexes begin following the predefined formats and are indexed in order of creation.
For example, if there are five predefined address formats and four user-defined address formats, the predefined formats would have index numbers ranging from one to five, and the user-defined formats would have index numbers ranging from six to nine in the order which they were created. If a user-defined address format is deleted, the index number of each succeeding format is reduced by one.Therefore, the address format index numbers will always be sequential. Also, the index number of a user-defined address format may change if a previously created address format is deleted.
Syntax
numeric := AddressBookFormatGetCount ()
See Also
AddressBookFormatGetName, AddressBookFormatGetFormat
AddressBookFormatGetCurrent
Purpose
Return the format name or specification of the current address format.
Syntax
string := AddressBookFormatGetCurrent (Item: enumeration)
Parameters
Item
enumeration Specify the item to return.
Format!
Name!
See Also
AddressBookFormatAdd, AddressBookFormatGetFormat
AddressBookFormatGetFormat
Purpose
Return the specification of the address format specified in Index.
Syntax
string := AddressBookFormatGetFormat (Index: numeric)
Parameters
Index
numeric Use AddressBookFormatGetCount to determine the value of this parameter.
See Also
AddressBookFormatGetCurrent
AddressBookFormatGetName
Purpose
Return the name of the specified address format.
Syntax
string := AddressBookFormatGetName (Index: numeric)
Parameters
Index
numeric Use AddressBookFormatGetCount to determine the value of this parameter.
See Also
AddressBookFormatGetCurrent, AddressBookFormatGetCount
AddressBookGetCount
Purpose
Return the number of available address books.
Syntax
numeric := AddressBookGetCount ()
See Also
AddressBookFormatAdd, AddressBookGetFieldCount
AddressBookGetFieldCount
Purpose
Return the number of available fields in the specified address book.
Syntax
numeric := AddressBookGetFieldCount (AddressBook: string)
Parameters
AddressBook
string The name of the address book to get the field count from.
See Also
AddressBookFormatAdd, AddressBookGetName, AddressBookGetFieldNumber
AddressBookGetFieldName
Purpose
Return the name of a specific field in the specified address book.
Syntax
string := AddressBookGetFieldName (AddressBook: string; Index: numeric)
Parameters
AddressBook
string The name of the address book containing the desired field.
Index
numeric The index number of the desired field.
See Also
AddressBookFormatAdd, AddressBookGetName, AddressBookGetFieldCount
AddressBookGetFieldNumber
Purpose
Return the code number of a specific field in the address book specified. The field code number is not the same as the field index number. Field code numbers always remain the same even if other fields are deleted. The table below lists the default system (predefined) data fields and their code numbers. Custom Fields are numbered sequentially in the order they are created beginning at 32768.
|
Code # |
Field Name |
|
12289 |
Name |
|
12290 |
E-Mail Type |
|
12291 |
E-Mail Address |
|
12292 |
Comments |
|
14854 |
First Name |
|
14856 |
Business Phone Number |
|
14857 |
Home Phone Number |
|
14865 |
Last Name |
|
14870 |
Organization |
|
14871 |
Title |
|
14872 |
Department |
|
14873 |
Mailstop |
|
14874 |
Phone Number |
|
14876 |
Cellular Phone Number |
|
14883 |
Fax Number |
|
14886 |
Country |
|
14887 |
City |
|
14888 |
State |
|
14889 |
Address |
|
14890 |
ZIP Code |
|
24587 |
Greeting |
Syntax
numeric := AddressBookGetFieldNumber (AddressBook: string; Index: numeric)
Parameters
AddressBook
string The name of the address book containing the desired field.
Index
numeric The index number of the desired field.
See Also
AddressBookFormatAdd, AddressBookGetName, AddressBookGetFieldCount, AddressBookGetFieldName
AddressBookGetName
Purpose
Return the name of the specified address book.
Syntax
string := AddressBookGetName (Index: numeric)
Parameters
Index
numeric The index number of the desired address book.
See Also
AddressBookGetCount
AddressBookInsertAddr
Purpose
Display the Corel Address Book dialog box so you can insert an address.
Syntax
AddressBookInsertAddr ()
See Also
AddressBookDlg
AddressBookRecordAddField
Purpose
Define a field value in a new address book record. Repeat for each field value defined. Precede with AddressBookRecordCreate and follow with AddressBookRecordEnd.
Syntax
AddressBookRecordAddField (Field: any; Value: string)
Parameters
Field
any The field name or code number.
Value
string The field value.
See Also
AddressBookRecordEnd, AddressBookRecordCreate
AddressBookRecordCreate
Purpose
Create a record in the specified address book. Follow with AddressBookRecordAddField and AddressBookRecordEnd.
Syntax
AddressBookRecordCreate (AddressBook: string)
Parameters
AddressBook
string The name of the address book the new record will be added to.
See Also
AddressBookRecordEnd, AddressBookRecordAddField
AddressBookRecordEnd
Purpose
End the record creation process and save the new record. Precede with AddressBookRecordCreate and AddressBookRecordAddField.
Syntax
AddressBookRecordEnd (State: enumeration; RecordType: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration Save the new record to the specified address book or cancel without saving.
Cancel!
Save!
RecordType
enumeration (optional) Specify the type of the new record. Default: Person!
Organization!
Person!
See Also
AddressBookRecordCreate, AddressBookRecordAddField
AddressBookSelectionFormatAddr
Purpose
Return the address that was last selected in the address book and formats it using the specified address format.
Syntax
string := AddressBookSelectionFormatAddr (Format: string; Index: numeric)
Parameters
Format
string The format specification used to format the specified address. You can use AddressBookFormatGetFormat or AddressBookFormatGetCurrent to retrieve an address format specification.
Index
numeric (optional) The index number of the desired address record relative to the current selection. For example, if six address records were selected and you wanted the second record in the list, you would put 2 in this parameter. If this parameter is not included, the first record in the list will be formatted.
See Also
AddressBookDlg, PersonalInfoFormatAddr
AddressBookSelectionGetField
Purpose
Return the value of a field from the last address book record that was selected. Use the Index parameter if the last selection was a multiple record selection.
Syntax
string := AddressBookSelectionGetField (Field: any; Index: numeric)
Parameters
Field
any Specify the field to retrieve. If this parameter is a number, the command will try to locate the field with that code number. If this parameter is a string, the command will try to locate the field with that name.
Index
numeric (optional) Specify the record to retrieve the field information from. Use this parameter when the last address book selection was a multiple record selection. For example, to return information from the fifth record of a multiple record selection, set this parameter to 5. If the last selection was a multiple record selection and this parameter is left blank, the command will return information from the first record in the selection.
See Also
AddressBookDlg, PersonalInfoGetField
AddressMergeShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro ADRS2MRG.WCM to copy the address book into a merge data file. ADRS2MRG.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
AddressMergeShippingMacro ()
Advance
Purpose
Move the insertion point a specified distance from the top or left of the page, or from the insertion point.
Syntax
Advance (Where: enumeration; Amount: measurement)
Parameters
Where
enumeration
AdvanceDown!
AdvanceFromLeftEdge!
AdvanceFromTop!
AdvanceLeft!
AdvanceRight!
AdvanceUp!
Down!
Left!
Right!
ToLine!
ToPosition!
Up!
Amount
measurement
See Also
AdvanceDlg, BaselinePlacement, Binding, MarginAdjustLeft, MarginAdjustRight
AdvanceDlg
Purpose
Display the Advance dialog box.
Syntax
AdvanceDlg ()
See Also
Advance
AllFontsShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro ALLFONTS.WCM to create a list of available fonts for the current printer. ALLFONTS.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
AllFontsShippingMacro ()
Append
Purpose
Add a copy of the selected text or graphics to the end of the Clipboard contents. If the Clipboard is empty, the macro ends.
Syntax
Append ()
See Also
AppendToFile, ClipboardAppendTo, ClipboardSaveTo, DeleteAppend, EditCopy, EditCut
AppendToFile
Purpose
Add the selected text, or the current document if no text is selected, to the end of another file.
Syntax
AppendToFile (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string (optional) The file to append to.
See Also
Append, ClipboardAppendTo
ApplicationBarShow
Purpose
Display (On!) or hide (Off!) the Application Bar. If no parameter is specified, this command toggles the Application Bar display.
Syntax
ApplicationBarShow (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
AppMaximize
Purpose
Maximize the application window. If the window is already maximized, the macro ends.
Syntax
AppMaximize ()
See Also
AppMinimize, AppRestore, DocMaximize, DocMinimize
AppMinimize
Purpose
Minimize the application window to an icon. If the window is already minimized, the macro ends.
Syntax
AppMinimize ()
See Also
AppMaximize, AppRestore, DocMaximize, DocMinimize
AppMove
Purpose
Reposition an application window that has been reduced in size. If Corel WordPerfect is maximized, the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
AppMove ()
See Also
DocMove
AppRestore
Purpose
Restore the application window to its previous size. If Corel WordPerfect is already restored, the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
AppRestore ()
See Also
AppMaximize, AppMinimize, DocRestore
AppSize
Purpose
Resize the current application window. If the window is maximized, the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
AppSize ()
See Also
DocSize
AppTaskList
Purpose
Activate the Taskbar and display the Start menu.
Syntax
AppTaskList ()
AssociateDlg
Purpose
Display the Associate dialog box, which allows you to assign menus, toolbars, and keyboards to selected features.
Syntax
AssociateDlg ()
See Also
MergeFileAssociate, TemplateSetAssociation
AttributeAppearanceOff
Purpose
Turn off the specified attributes at the insertion point. One or more attribute parameters is required.
Syntax
AttributeAppearanceOff ({Attrib: enumeration; })
Parameters
Attrib
enumeration (optional)
Bold!
DoubleUnderline!
Every!
Italics!
Outline!
Redline!
Shadow!
SmallCaps!
Strikeout!
Underline!
See Also
AttributeAppearanceOn, AttributeAppearanceToggle, AttributeNormal, AttributeRelativeSize, AttributeRelativeSizeToggle, AttributeSizeRatios
AttributeAppearanceOn
Purpose
Turn on the specified attributes at the insertion point. One or more parameters is required.
Syntax
AttributeAppearanceOn ({Attrib: enumeration; })
Parameters
Attrib
enumeration (optional)
Bold!
DoubleUnderline!
Every!
Italics!
Outline!
Redline!
Shadow!
SmallCaps!
Strikeout!
Underline!
See Also
AttributeAppearanceOff, AttributeAppearanceToggle, AttributeNormal, AttributeRelativeSize, AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
AttributeAppearanceToggle
Purpose
Toggle attributes, usually of the selected text. One or more attribute parameters is required.
Syntax
AttributeAppearanceToggle ({Attrib: enumeration; })
Parameters
Attrib
enumeration (optional)
Bold!
DoubleUnderline!
Every!
Italics!
Outline!
Redline!
Shadow!
SmallCaps!
Strikeout!
Underline!
See Also
AttributeAppearanceOn, AttributeAppearanceOff, AttributeNormal, AttributeRelativeSize, AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
AttributeNormal
Purpose
Turn off the current font attributes except color. To record, first add an Attribute Normal button to a toolbar in Settings.
Syntax
AttributeNormal ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceOn, AttributeAppearanceOff, AttributeRelativeSize, AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
AttributePosition
Purpose
Specify subscript or superscript font attributes.
Syntax
AttributePosition (Position: enumeration)
Parameters
Position
enumeration
NormalPosition!
Subscript!
Superscript!
See Also
AttributeNormal, AttributePositionToggle, AttributeSizeRatios, FontSubscriptToggle, FontSuperscriptToggle
AttributePositionToggle
Purpose
Toggle subscript, normal, and superscript font attributes.
Syntax
AttributePositionToggle (Position: enumeration)
Parameters
Position
enumeration
NormalPosition!
Subscript!
Superscript!
See Also
AttributeNormal, AttributePosition, FontSubscriptToggle, FontSuperscriptToggle
AttributeRelativeSize
Purpose
Specify a relative font size for selected or subsequent text.
Syntax
AttributeRelativeSize (Size: enumeration)
Parameters
Size
enumeration
ExtraLarge!
Fine!
Large!
NormalSize!
Small!
VeryLarge!
See Also
AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
Purpose
Toggle relative font sizes.
Syntax
AttributeRelativeSizeToggle (Size: enumeration)
Parameters
Size
enumeration
ExtraLarge!
Fine!
Large!
NormalSize!
Small!
VeryLarge!
See Also
AttributeRelativeSize
AttributeSizeRatios
Purpose
Specify relative font size ratios.
Syntax
AttributeSizeRatios (Attrib: enumeration; Percentage: numeric)
Parameters
Attrib
enumeration
ExtraLarge!
Fine!
Large!
Small!
SuperSubscript!
VeryLarge!
Percentage
numeric
See Also
AttributeRelativeSize, AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
AutoCodePlacement
Purpose
Turn automatic code placement on or off. Default: Some codes are automatically placed at the beginning of a page or paragraph. When off, all codes are inserted at the insertion point. Not recordable.
Syntax
AutoCodePlacement (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
AutoWordSelect
Purpose
Turn Automatically Select Words on or off. Changes the current Corel WordPerfect session only.
Syntax
AutoWordSelect (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?AutoWordSelect
BackTab
Purpose
Insert a [Hd Back Tab] code at the insertion point. This code will move the current line of text left one tab from the insertion point.
Syntax
BackTab ()
See Also
Tab, TabInsert
Backup
Purpose
Turn Timed Document Backup on or off and return the current state.
Syntax
boolean := Backup (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
BackupMinutes, BackupOriginalDoc
BackupMinutes
Purpose
Specify the number of minutes between timed backups.
Syntax
BackupMinutes (Minutes: numeric)
Parameters
Minutes
numeric
See Also
Backup, BackupOriginalDoc, PrefSave
BackupOriginalDoc
Purpose
Turn Original Document Backup on or off.
Syntax
BackupOriginalDoc (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
Backup, BackupMinutes, PrefSave
BarcodeDlg
Purpose
Display the POSTNET Barcode dialog box.
Syntax
BarcodeDlg ()
See Also
BarcodePOSTNET
BarcodePOSTNET
Purpose
Specify a ZIP Code or merge field containing a ZIP Code.
Syntax
BarcodePOSTNET (Zip: string; State: enumeration)
Parameters
Zip
string A five, nine, or eleven-digit ZIP Code. If the ZIP Code is in a merge field, the parameter can be a string that specifies the field.
State
enumeration (optional) Enable a merge field to provide a ZIP Code. Required only when a merge field is specified in the ZIP parameter.
MergeFieldAllowed!
See Also
BarcodeDlg
BaselinePlacement
Purpose
Turn the Baseline placement for typesetting option on or off.
Syntax
BaselinePlacement (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?BaselineMode
Binding
Purpose
Specify a binding offset for a specified paper edge. Use this command to specify two-sided document settings. This command inserts a [Binding Width] code at the beginning of the current page.
Syntax
Binding (Edge: enumeration; Offset: measurement)
Parameters
Edge
enumeration
BottomEdge!
LeftEdge!
RightEdge!
TopEdge!
Offset
measurement
See Also
?Binding, BindingOptionsDlg, DoubleSidedPrint, PrintTwoSidedDocCodesDlg, PrintUseTwoSidedDocCodes
BindingOptionsDlg
Purpose
Display the Print dialog box with the Two-Sided Printing tab active.
Syntax
BindingOptionsDlg ()
See Also
Binding, PrintDlg
BlockProtect
Purpose
Turn Block Protect on or off.
Syntax
BlockProtect (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?BlockProtect, ConditionalEndOfPage, KeepTextTogetherDlg, WidowOrphan, BlockProtectToggle
BlockProtectToggle
Purpose
Toggle Block Protect on or off. The objects or text that are being block protected must be selected.
Syntax
BlockProtectToggle ()
See Also
?BlockProtect, BlockProtect
BoldKey
Purpose
Toggle Bold on or off at the insertion point.
Syntax
BoldKey ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceToggle
BookmarkBlock
Purpose
Find and select a specified bookmark. If the type of the specified bookmark is not selected, the insertion point is moved to the bookmark and select mode is activated, but nothing is selected.
Syntax
BookmarkBlock (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string (optional)
See Also
BookmarkCreate, BookmarkDelete, BookmarkDlg, BookmarkFind, BookmarkMove, BookmarkRename
BookmarkCreate
Purpose
Create a bookmark.
Syntax
BookmarkCreate (Name: string; Selected: enumeration)
Parameters
Name
string
Selected
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BookmarkList, BookmarkBlock, BookmarkDelete, BookmarkDlg, BookmarkFind, BookmarkMove, BookmarkRename
BookmarkDelete
Purpose
Delete a specified bookmark.
Syntax
BookmarkDelete (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string (optional)
See Also
BookmarkBlock, BookmarkCreate, BookmarkDlg, BookmarkFind, BookmarkMove, BookmarkRename
BookmarkDlg
Purpose
Display the Bookmark dialog box.
Syntax
BookmarkDlg ()
See Also
BookmarkBlock, BookmarkCreate, BookmarkDelete, BookmarkFind, BookmarkMove, BookmarkRename
BookmarkFind
Purpose
Find a specified bookmark.
Syntax
BookmarkFind (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string (optional)
See Also
BookmarkBlock, BookmarkCreate, BookmarkDelete, BookmarkDlg, BookmarkMove, BookmarkRename
BookmarkMove
Purpose
Move a bookmark to the insertion point.
Syntax
BookmarkMove (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string (optional)
See Also
BookmarkBlock, BookmarkCreate, BookmarkDelete, BookmarkDlg, BookmarkFind, BookmarkRename
BookmarkRename
Purpose
Rename a bookmark.
Syntax
BookmarkRename (OldName: string; NewName: string)
Parameters
OldName
string
NewName
string
See Also
BookmarkBlock, BookmarkCreate, BookmarkDelete, BookmarkDlg, BookmarkFind, BookmarkMove
BorderBottomLine
Purpose
Specify the style of a bottom border line. Precede with BorderStyleCreate or BorderStyleEdit, and end with BorderStyleEnd.
Syntax
BorderBottomLine (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any Use a string for user-defined style names.
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
See Also
?BorderBottomLine, BorderLeftLine, BorderRightLine, BorderSeparatorLine, BorderTopLine, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderColor
Purpose
Specify the color of a graphics box, paragraph, page, or column border. Empty parameters use current program settings. Precede with BorderStyleCreate or BorderStyleEdit and BorderUseBorderColor, and end with BorderStyleEnd. The values of a selected color are displayed in the Define Color Printing Palette dialog box.
Syntax
BorderColor (ColorName: string; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; Shade: numeric)
Parameters
ColorName
string (optional) This parameter has been left in for backward compatability with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect. To specify a color in Corel WordPerfect 8, use the Red, Green, and Blue parameters.
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Shade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
See Also
?BorderColorBlue, ?BorderColorGreen, ?BorderColorRed, ?BorderColorShading, BorderStyleCreate, BorderStyleEdit, BorderStyleEnd, BorderUseBorderColor, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderCornerRadius
Purpose
Specify the curve of border corners.
Syntax
BorderCornerRadius (Radius: measurement)
Parameters
Radius
measurement Higher measurements produce more rounded corners.
See Also
?BorderCornerRadius, BorderStyleCreate, BorderStyleEdit, BorderStyleEnd, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderDropShadow
Purpose
Specify the location, size, and color of a border shadow. The values of a selected color are displayed in the Define Color Printing Palette dialog box.
Syntax
BorderDropShadow (Location: enumeration; Size: measurement; ColorName: string; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; Shade: numeric)
Parameters
Location
enumeration (optional)
LowerLeft!
LowerRight!
NoShadow!
UpperLeft!
UpperRight!
Size
measurement (optional) Default: .125"
ColorName
string (optional) This parameter has been left in for backward compatability with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect. To specify a color in Corel WordPerfect 8, use the Red, Green, and Blue parameters.
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Shade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
See Also
BorderStyleCreate, BorderStyleEdit, BorderStyleEnd
BorderInsideSpacing
Purpose
Specify the inside border spacing. Not available for page borders. Precede with BorderStyleCreate or BorderStyleEdit and follow with BorderStyleEnd.
Syntax
BorderInsideSpacing (Bottom: measurement; Left: measurement; Right: measurement; Top: measurement)
Parameters
Bottom
measurement (optional)
Left
measurement (optional)
Right
measurement (optional)
Top
measurement (optional)
See Also
?BorderInsideSpacingTop, ?BorderInsideSpacingBottom, BorderOutsideSpacing, BorderStyleCreate, BorderStyleEdit, BorderStyleEnd, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderLeftLine
Purpose
Specify the left line style of a border.
Syntax
BorderLeftLine (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any Use a string for user-defined styles.
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
See Also
?BorderLeftLine, BorderBottomLine, BorderRightLine, BorderSeparatorLine, BorderTopLine, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderOutsideSpacing
Purpose
Specify the outside border spacing.
Syntax
BorderOutsideSpacing (Left: measurement; Right: measurement; Top: measurement; Bottom: measurement)
Parameters
Left
measurement
Right
measurement
Top
measurement
Bottom
measurement
See Also
BorderInsideSpacing, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderRightLine
Purpose
Specify a right line border style.
Syntax
BorderRightLine (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any Use a string for user-defined styles.
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
See Also
?BorderRightLine, BorderBottomLine, BorderLeftLine, BorderSeparatorLine, BorderTopLine, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderSeparatorLine
Purpose
Specify a separator line style in a paragraph or column border. Precede with BorderStyleCreate or BorderStyleEdit and end with BorderStyleEnd.
Syntax
BorderSeparatorLine (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any Use a string for user-defined styles.
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
See Also
?BorderSeparatorLine, BorderBottomLine, BorderLeftLine, BorderRightLine, BorderTopLine, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderSetSpacing
Purpose
Turn Auto spacing on or off in the current border style. Precede with BorderStyleCreate or BorderStyleEdit and follow with BorderStyleEnd.
Syntax
BorderSetSpacing (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration Yes! = Set border spacing on
No! = Auto border spacing on
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BorderSetSpacing, BorderInsideSpacing, BorderOutsideSpacing, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderStyleCopy
Purpose
Copy a border style.
Syntax
BorderStyleCopy (Style: any; FromLibrary: enumeration; ToLibrary: enumeration; DestName: string)
Parameters
Style
any Enclose user-defined styles in quotation marks.
|
ButtonBorder! |
HeavySingleBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderAll! |
NoBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderBetween! |
SingleBorder! |
|
DashedBorder! |
SpacingOnly! |
|
DottedBorder! |
ThickBorder! |
|
DoubleBorder! |
ThickThinBorder! |
|
ExtraThickBorder! |
ThickTopBottomBorder! |
|
HeavyDoubleBorder! |
ThinThickBorder! |
FromLibrary
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDocument!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
ToLibrary
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDocument!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
DestName
string (optional) The new name for a style.
See Also
BorderStyleRetrieve, BorderStyleSave
BorderStyleCreate
Purpose
Create a new border style.
Syntax
BorderStyleCreate (Style: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
string
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
BorderStyleDelete, BorderStyleEdit, BorderStyleEnd, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderStyleDelete
Purpose
Delete a border style.
Syntax
BorderStyleDelete (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any Enclose user-defined styles in quotation marks.
|
ButtonBorder! |
HeavySingleBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderAll! |
NoBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderBetween! |
SingleBorder! |
|
DashedBorder! |
SpacingOnly! |
|
DottedBorder! |
ThickBorder! |
|
DoubleBorder! |
ThickThinBorder! |
|
ExtraThickBorder! |
ThickTopBottomBorder! |
|
HeavyDoubleBorder! |
ThinThickBorder! |
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
BorderStyleCopy, BorderStyleRetrieve, BorderStyleSave, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderStyleEdit
Purpose
Specify a border style to edit.
Syntax
BorderStyleEdit (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any Enclose user-defined styles in quotation marks.
|
ButtonBorder! |
HeavySingleBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderAll! |
NoBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderBetween! |
SingleBorder! |
|
DashedBorder! |
SpacingOnly! |
|
DottedBorder! |
ThickBorder! |
|
DoubleBorder! |
ThickThinBorder! |
|
ExtraThickBorder! |
ThickTopBottomBorder! |
|
HeavyDoubleBorder! |
ThinThickBorder! |
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
?Border, BorderStyleCreate, BorderStyleEnd, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderStyleEnd
Purpose
Exit border style create or edit mode with or without saving changes. Precede this command with BorderStyleCreate or BorderStyleEdit.
Syntax
BorderStyleEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
See Also
BorderStyleCreate, BorderStyleEnd, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderStyleName
Purpose
Rename a user-defined border style. Precede with BorderStyleEdit.
Syntax
BorderStyleName (Style: string)
Parameters
Style
string
See Also
BorderStyleCreate, BorderStyleEdit
BorderStyleRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve all border graphics styles from the specified document or template and add to the specified style list.
Syntax
BorderStyleRetrieve (Filename: string; FromLibrary: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string The path and filename of a document or template containing the styles to retrieve.
FromLibrary
enumeration The destination for the retrieved styles. Use CurrentDoc! to add the styles to the current document style list. Use PersonalLibrary! to add the styles to the default template style list. Use SharedLibrary! to add the styles to the additional objects template style list. If an additional objects template is not specified in Files Settings and SharedLibrary! is used here, the command does nothing.
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
BorderStyleSave, StyleCopy
BorderStyleSave
Purpose
Save border styles to a specified library.
Syntax
BorderStyleSave (Filename: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string The full path required.
Library
enumeration
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
BorderStyleCopy, BorderStyleRetrieve
BorderTopLine
Purpose
Specify the top line style of a border. Precede with BorderStyleCreate or BorderStyleEdit and end with BorderStyleEnd.
Syntax
BorderTopLine (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any Enclose user-defined styles in quotation marks.
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
See Also
?BorderTopLine, BorderBottomLine, BorderLeftLine, BorderRightLine, BorderSeparatorLine, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BorderUseBorderColor
Purpose
Specify whether the current border uses the line style color or the border color. Precede with BorderStyleCreate or BorderStyleEdit, follow with BorderColor, and end with BorderStyleEnd.
Syntax
BorderUseBorderColor (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration No! = Use line style color
Yes! = Use border color
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BorderUseBorderColor, BorderColor, BorderStyleCreate, BorderStyleEdit, BorderStyleEnd, TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
BoxAttachTo
Purpose
Anchor a graphics box to a page, paragraph, or character. Precede with BoxCreate or BoxEdit and end with BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxAttachTo (Anchor: enumeration)
Parameters
Anchor
enumeration
Character!
Page!
Paragraph!
See Also
?BoxAttachTo, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxHorizontalPosition, BoxVerticalPosition
BoxBackwardOne
Purpose
Move the selected object(s) back one layer. Precede with BoxCreate or BoxEdit.
Syntax
BoxBackwardOne ()
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxForwardOne
BoxBorder
Purpose
Specify a box border style. Precede with BoxCreate or BoxEdit and end with BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxBorder (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any
|
ButtonBorder! |
HeavySingleBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderAll! |
NoBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderBetween! |
SingleBorder! |
|
DashedBorder! |
SpacingOnly! |
|
DottedBorder! |
ThickBorder! |
|
DoubleBorder! |
ThickThinBorder! |
|
ExtraThickBorder! |
ThickTopBottomBorder! |
|
HeavyDoubleBorder! |
ThinThickBorder! |
See Also
BoxBorderDlg, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxBorderDlg
Purpose
Display the Box Border/Fill Styles dialog box.
Syntax
BoxBorderDlg ()
See Also
BoxBorder
BoxCaptionEdit
Purpose
Begin the caption editing commands. Follow with commands such as Type that furnish caption text.
Syntax
BoxCaptionEdit ()
See Also
BoxCaptionEditEnd
BoxCaptionEditEnd
Purpose
End the caption editing commands. Precede with BoxCaptionEdit and commands such as Type that modify caption text.
Syntax
BoxCaptionEditEnd ()
See Also
BoxCaptionEdit, SubstructureExit
BoxCaptionFormatting
Purpose
Specify the caption width.
Syntax
BoxCaptionFormatting (SizeAuto: any)
Parameters
SizeAuto
any To base the width on the current unit of measure, use a measurement expression. To base the width on a percent of the box width, use a number. To set the width automatically, use AutoWidth!.
See Also
?BoxCaptionFormatting, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxCaptionInitialStyle
Purpose
Specify an initial caption style.
Syntax
BoxCaptionInitialStyle (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
See Also
?BoxCaptionDefaultInitialStyle, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxCaptionNumberStyle
Purpose
Specify a caption numbering style. Precede with BoxCreate or BoxEdit and end with BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxCaptionNumberStyle (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
See Also
?BoxCaptionDefaultNumberStyle, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxCaptionPosition
Purpose
Specify the caption position.
Syntax
BoxCaptionPosition (Side: enumeration; Border: enumeration; Alignment: enumeration; AlignmentOffset: any)
Parameters
Side
enumeration The caption side.
Bottom!
Left!
Right!
Top!
Border
enumeration The caption relative to the border.
InsideBorder!
OnBorder!
OutsideBorder!
Alignment
enumeration (optional) The caption position.
Bottom!
Center!
Left!
Right!
Top!
AlignmentOffset
any (optional)
See Also
?BoxCaptionPositionAlignment, ?BoxCaptionPositionBorder, ?BoxCaptionPositionOffset
BoxCaptionRotation
Purpose
Rotate the captions. Precede with a command such as BoxCreate and BoxUpdateDisplay, and end with BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxCaptionRotation (Rotation: enumeration)
Parameters
Rotation
enumeration
Degrees180!
Degrees270!
Degrees90!
None!
See Also
?BoxCaptionRotation, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxUpdateDisplay
BoxChangeLineHeight
Purpose
Specify whether line height changes when a box is attached to a character. Default: Yes!
Syntax
BoxChangeLineHeight (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BoxChangeLineHeight, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxChangeStyle
Purpose
Specify a box style.
Syntax
BoxChangeStyle (BoxType: any)
Parameters
BoxType
any Enclose user-defined styles in quotation marks.
ButtonBox!
EquationBox!
FigureBox!Macro List Text = InlineEquationBox!
NoBox!
TableBox!
TextBox!
UserBox!
WatermarkImageBox!
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxStyleCreate, BoxStyleName
BoxContentEdit
Purpose
Create and edit graphics box contents. Follow with commands that furnish box contents.
Syntax
BoxContentEdit ()
See Also
BoxContentPosition, BoxContentType
BoxContentPosition
Purpose
Position box contents.
Syntax
BoxContentPosition (Horizontal: enumeration; Vertical: enumeration)
Parameters
Horizontal
enumeration
Center!
Left!
Right!
Vertical
enumeration
Bottom!
Center!
Top!
See Also
?BoxContentHorizontalPosition, ?BoxContentVerticalPosition, BoxContentEdit, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxContentPreserveAspectRatio
Purpose
Preserve the image width/height ratio when the box changes.
Syntax
BoxContentPreserveAspectRatio (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BoxContentPreserveAspectRatio, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxContentType
Purpose
Specify the graphics box content type.
Syntax
BoxContentType (Content: enumeration)
Parameters
Content
enumeration
|
Empty! |
Macro! |
|
Equation! |
Presentation! |
|
External! |
Text! |
|
Image! |
Video! |
|
LinkedText! |
See Also
?BoxContentType, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxCounter
Purpose
Assign a new counter to the current box or box style.
Syntax
BoxCounter (CounterName: any)
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
See Also
?BoxCounter, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEditByCounter, BoxEnd
BoxCreate
Purpose
Create a graphics box. Follow with box editing commands and BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxCreate (BoxType: any)
Parameters
BoxType
any
|
ButtonBox! |
TableBox! |
|
EquationBox! |
TextBox! |
|
FigureBox! |
UserBox! |
|
InLineEquationBox! |
WatermarkImageBox! |
|
NoBox! |
See Also
BoxDelete, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxDelete
Purpose
Delete a graphics box.
Syntax
BoxDelete (BoxType: enumeration; BoxNumber: numeric)
Parameters
BoxType
enumeration
|
ButtonBox! |
TableBox! |
|
EquationBox! |
TextBox! |
|
FigureBox! |
UserBox! |
|
InlineEquationBox! |
WatermarkImageBox! |
|
NoBox! |
BoxNumber
numeric
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxEdit
Purpose
Specify the number of a graphics box to edit.
Syntax
BoxEdit (BoxNumber: numeric)
Parameters
BoxNumber
numeric
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxDelete, BoxEditByCounter, BoxEditNext, BoxEditPrevious, BoxEnd
BoxEditByCounter
Purpose
Specify the counter name and number of a graphics box to edit.
Syntax
BoxEditByCounter (CounterName: any; {CounterLevelNumber: numeric; })
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
CounterLevelNumber
numeric (optional) Repeat for each counter level.
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxDelete, BoxEdit, BoxEditNext, BoxEditPrevious, BoxEnd
BoxEditNext
Purpose
Begin the editing commands for the next box or a specified box type. Follow with box editing commands and BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxEditNext (BoxType: enumeration)
Parameters
BoxType
enumeration (optional) Default: box after the insertion point, regardless of type.
|
ButtonBox! |
TableBox! |
|
EquationBox! |
TextBox! |
|
FigureBox! |
UserBox! |
|
InlineEquationBox! |
WatermarkImageBox! |
|
NoBox! |
See Also
BoxEdit, BoxEditByCounter, BoxEditPrevious
BoxEditPrevious
Purpose
Begin the editing commands for the previous box or a specified box type.
Syntax
BoxEditPrevious (BoxType: enumeration)
Parameters
BoxType
enumeration (optional) Default: box immediately before the insertion point, regardless of type.
|
ButtonBox! |
TableBox! |
|
EquationBox! |
TextBox! |
|
FigureBox! |
UserBox! |
|
InlineEquationBox! |
WatermarkImageBox! |
|
NoBox! |
See Also
BoxEdit, BoxEditByCounter, BoxEditNext
BoxEnd
Purpose
Save the editing changes to a graphics box and display or hide the Graphics Box feature bar.
Syntax
BoxEnd (State: enumeration; BoxOptionsBar: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Cancel!
Save!
BoxOptionsBar
enumeration (optional) Display or hide the Graphics feature bar.
DontHide!
Hide!
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxDelete, BoxEdit
BoxEquationColor
Purpose
Specify a box equation color and shading value. Precede with BoxCreate or BoxEdit and end with BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxEquationColor (ColorName: string; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; Shade: numeric)
Parameters
ColorName
string (optional) This parameter has been left in for backward compatability with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect. To specify a color in Corel WordPerfect 8, use the Red, Green, and Blue parameters.
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Shade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
See Also
?BoxEquationColorBlue, ?BoxEquationColorGreen, ?BoxEquationColorRed, ?BoxEquationColorShading, BoxContentEdit, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxEquationDefaultFont
Purpose
Specify a default font and size.
Syntax
BoxEquationDefaultFont (FontSize: any)
Parameters
FontSize
any
DefaultSize!
See Also
?BoxEquationFont, ?BoxEquationFontSize, BoxEquationFont
BoxEquationFilename
Purpose
Specify the name of an equation file and designate the box contents as an equation. To retrieve an equation file use FileOpen.
Syntax
BoxEquationFilename (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxEquationFont
Purpose
Specify an equation font. Use with BoxEquationFontSize.
Syntax
BoxEquationFont (FontName: string; FontSize: measurement; Family: enumeration; Attributes: enumeration; Weight: enumeration; Width: enumeration; Source: enumeration; Type: enumeration; CharacterSet: enumeration)
Parameters
FontName
string
FontSize
measurement (optional)
Family
enumeration (optional)
|
FamilyAestheticOrnamented! |
FamilyITCZapfDingbats! |
|
FamilyAlbertus! |
FamilyLetterGothic! |
|
FamilyBodoni! |
FamilyMadrone! |
|
FamilyBroadway! |
FamilyMicrostyle! |
|
FamilyBrush! |
FamilyOldEnglish! |
|
FamilyCenturySchoolbook! |
FamilyOptima! |
|
FamilyComputer! |
FamilyParkAvenue! |
|
FamilyCourier! |
FamilyPonderosa! |
|
FamilyHelvetica! |
FamilyPTBarnum! |
|
FamilyHobo! |
FamilyRevue! |
|
FamilyITCBenquiat! |
FamilySignetRoundhand! |
|
FamilyITCGaramond! |
FamilyTekton! |
|
FamilyITCLubalinGraph! |
FamilyTimesRoman! |
|
FamilyITCRonda! |
FamilyUncial! |
Attributes
enumeration (optional)
|
FontMatchItalic! |
FontMatchShadow! |
|
FontMatchNormal! |
FontMatchSmallCaps! |
|
FontMatchOutline! |
Weight
enumeration (optional)
|
WeightBlack! |
WeightMaximum! |
|
WeightBold! |
WeightMedium! |
|
WeightBook! |
WeightRegular! |
|
WeightDemiBold! |
WeightRoman! |
|
WeightDemiLight! |
WeightSemiBold! |
|
WeightExtraBlack! |
WeightSemiLight! |
|
WeightExtraBold! |
WeightThin! |
|
WeightExtraHeavy! |
WeightUltraBlack! |
|
WeightExtraLight! |
WeightUltraHeavy! |
|
WeightExtraThin! |
WeightUltraLight! |
|
WeightHeavy! |
WeightUltraThin! |
|
WeightLight! |
WeightUnknown! |
Width
enumeration (optional)
|
WidthCompressed! |
WidthSemiCondensed! |
|
WidthCondensed! |
WidthSemiExpanded! |
|
WidthDoubleWide! |
WidthTripleWide! |
|
WidthExpanded! |
WidthUltraCompressed! |
|
WidthExtraCondensed! |
WidthUltraCondensed! |
|
WidthExtraExpanded! |
WidthUltraExpanded! |
|
WidthNormal! |
WidthUnknown! |
Source
enumeration (optional)
DRSFile!
PRSFile!
Type
enumeration (optional)
Intellifont!
Speedo!
TrueType!
Type1!
CharacterSet
enumeration (optional)
|
FontMatchArabic! |
FontMatchJapaneseKana! |
|
FontMatchArabicScript! |
FontMatchMath! |
|
FontMatchASCII! |
FontMatchMathExtension! |
|
FontMatchBoxDrawing! |
FontMatchMultinational1! |
|
FontMatchCyrillic! |
FontMatchMultinational2! |
|
FontMatchGreek! |
FontMatchTypographicSymbols! |
|
FontMatchHebrew! |
FontMatchUserDefined! |
|
FontMatchIconicSymbols! |
See Also
?BoxEquationFont, ?BoxEquationFontSize, BoxEquationDefaultFont, BoxEquationFontSize
BoxEquationFontSize
Purpose
Specify an equation font size.
Syntax
BoxEquationFontSize (Size: measurement)
Parameters
Size
measurement
See Also
?BoxEquationFont, ?BoxEquationFontSize, BoxEquationFont
BoxEquationRedisplay
Purpose
Enlarge or reduce an equation display.
Syntax
BoxEquationRedisplay (Zoom: numeric)
Parameters
Zoom
numeric (optional)
See Also
BoxContentEdit, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxEquationSaveAsGraphic
Purpose
Save an equation box as a graphics file.
Syntax
BoxEquationSaveAsGraphic (Filename: string; Format: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
Format
enumeration (optional) Default: current graphics format.
Presentations_20!
WordPerfectGraphic_10!
WordPerfectGraphic_20!
See Also
BoxEquationFilename
BoxFill
Purpose
Select a box fill style.
Syntax
BoxFill (FillStyleName: any)
Parameters
FillStyleName
any
|
Fill10! |
Fill60! |
|
Fill100! |
Fill70! |
|
Fill20! |
Fill80! |
|
Fill30! |
Fill90! |
|
Fill40! |
FillButton! |
|
Fill5! |
NoFill! |
|
Fill50! |
See Also
BoxContentEdit, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxForwardOne
Purpose
Move the selected object(s) forward one layer.
Syntax
BoxForwardOne ()
See Also
BoxBackwardOne
BoxHeight
Purpose
Specify the box height according to the height of box contents or a fixed measurement.
Syntax
BoxHeight (Height: any)
Parameters
Height
any Specify AutoHeight! or a fixed height.
AutoHeight!
See Also
?BoxHeight, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxWidth
BoxHorizontalAlignment
Purpose
Specify the alignment of a box attached to a page or paragraph.
Syntax
BoxHorizontalAlignment (Alignment: enumeration; Position: enumeration; Offset: measurement; LeftColumn: numeric; RightColumn: numeric)
Parameters
Alignment
enumeration
AlignColumns!
AlignMargins!
Position
enumeration The horizontal position after alignment to margins or columns.
Center!
FullAlign!
Left!
Right!
Offset
measurement (optional) The image position relative to the alignment point. Left is a negative number, right is positive.
LeftColumn
numeric (optional) Use when a box aligns to columns.
RightColumn
numeric (optional) Use when a box aligns to columns.
See Also
?BoxHorizontalAlignment, ?BoxHorizontalAlignTo, ?BoxHorizontalOffset, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxHorizontalPosition
BoxHorizontalPosition
Purpose
Specify the horizontal position of a box relative to the left edge of the page.
Syntax
BoxHorizontalPosition (Position: measurement)
Parameters
Position
measurement
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxHorizontalAlignment
BoxImageBlackWhiteThreshold
Purpose
Specify the point at which colors and/or grays in the current image convert to black and white.
Syntax
BoxImageBlackWhiteThreshold (Threshold: numeric)
Parameters
Threshold
numeric Value: 1-255. Values below the threshold convert to black, those above convert to white. Default: 127.
See Also
?BoxImageBlackWhiteThreshold, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxImageMonochrome
BoxImageBrightness
Purpose
Adjust the brightness (saturation) of a color or black and white image.
Syntax
BoxImageBrightness (Amount: numeric)
Parameters
Amount
numeric Value: -1.0 to 1.0. Black: -1.0. White: 1.0.
See Also
?BoxImageBrightness, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxImageContrast
BoxImageContrast
Purpose
Specify the contrast between light and dark areas of an image.
Syntax
BoxImageContrast (Contrast: numeric)
Parameters
Contrast
numeric Value: -1.0 to 1.0. Slight: -1.0. Strong: 1.0.
See Also
?BoxImageContrast, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxImageDitherMethod
Purpose
Specify a dither method and source.
Syntax
BoxImageDitherMethod (Method: enumeration; Source: enumeration)
Parameters
Method
enumeration
Default!
ErrorDiffusionDither!
Halftoning!
OrderedDither!
Source
enumeration
Default!
External!
Printer!
WordPerfect!
BoxImageFill
Purpose
Specify an image fill type. Images can have normal fill, no fill, or white fill.
Syntax
BoxImageFill (ImageFillType: enumeration)
Parameters
ImageFillType
enumeration
Normal!
Transparent!
White!
See Also
?BoxImageFill
BoxImageFlipX
Purpose
Flip an image box on its X (horizontal) axis, turning the image upside down.
Syntax
BoxImageFlipX (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BoxImageFlipX, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxImageFlipY
BoxImageFlipY
Purpose
Reverse an image box on its Y (vertical) axis, turning the image from side to side.
Syntax
BoxImageFlipY (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BoxImageFlipY, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxImageFlipX
BoxImageHalfToneOptions
Purpose
Specify the default or user-defined halftone values for the current printer.
Syntax
BoxImageHalfToneOptions (HalfTone: enumeration; LPI: numeric; Plane0: numeric; Plane1: numeric; Plane2: numeric; Plane3: numeric)
Parameters
HalfTone
enumeration
DefaultValues!
SetValues!
LPI
numeric (optional) The number of lines per inch for user-defined values.
Plane0
numeric (optional) The first halftone angle for user-defined values.
Plane1
numeric (optional) The second halftone angle for user-defined values.
Plane2
numeric (optional) The third halftone angle for user-defined values.
Plane3
numeric (optional) The fourth halftone angle for user-defined values.
BoxImageInvertColors
Purpose
Convert the image colors to their complements.
Syntax
BoxImageInvertColors (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BoxImageInvertColors, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxImageMonochrome
Purpose
Convert a color image to black and white, and specify the threshold for blackness.
Syntax
BoxImageMonochrome (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BoxImageMonochrome, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxImageBlackWhiteThreshold, BoxImageFill
BoxImageMove
Purpose
Move an image within a box.
Syntax
BoxImageMove (XPosition: numeric; YPosition: numeric)
Parameters
XPosition
numeric The horizontal position. Value: -5.0 to 5.0. Default: 0 (centered).
YPosition
numeric The vertical position. Value: -5.0 to 5.0. Default: 0 (centered).
See Also
?BoxImageTranslationY, ?BoxImageTranslationX, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxImageRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve an image.
Syntax
BoxImageRetrieve (Action: enumeration; Filename: string; FileFormat: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
LeaveExternal!
MakeInternal!
UseInternal!
Filename
string
FileFormat
enumeration (optional)
|
AdobePhotoShop! |
Macintosh_PICT! |
|
AutoCAD_DXF! |
MacPaint! |
|
BIFFCharts! |
Micrografx! |
|
Bitmap! |
MicrografxPicturePublisher4! |
|
CALSBitmap! |
PCPaintbrushX! |
|
CGM! |
Presentations_20! |
|
CompuserveGIF! |
ScitexCT! |
|
CompuserveGIF24! |
TaggedImageFileFormat! |
|
CorelPhotoPaint! |
TarGA! |
|
CorelVentura! |
WindowsMetaFile! |
|
CorelWavelen! |
WordPerfectGraphic_10! |
|
EncapsulatedPostScript! |
WordPerfectGraphic_20! |
|
EnhancedWindowsMetaFile! |
WPChartingData_10! |
|
FAX_TIFF! |
WPChartingData_10E! |
|
GEMIMG! |
WPChartingData_20! |
|
HewlettPackardGraphicPlotter! |
WPChartingStyle_10! |
|
JPEG! |
WPChartingStyle_10E! |
|
KodakPhotoCD! |
WPChartingStyle_20! |
|
LotusPIC! |
WPWorksPaint_20! |
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxImageRotate
Purpose
Rotate an image within a box.
Syntax
BoxImageRotate (Rotation: numeric)
Parameters
Rotation
numeric Value: 0.0 to 359.0.
See Also
?BoxImageRotation, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxImageSave
Purpose
Save an image, and optionally rename it and specify a graphics format.
Syntax
BoxImageSave (Filename: string; Format: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
Format
enumeration
Presentations_20!
WordPerfectGraphic_10!
WordPerfectGraphic_20!
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxImageScaling
Purpose
Scale an image within a box.
Syntax
BoxImageScaling (XScale: numeric; YScale: numeric)
Parameters
XScale
numeric The image width. Value: 0.01 to 9.99. Default: 1.0.
YScale
numeric The image height. Value: 0.01 to 9.99. Default: 1.0.
See Also
?BoxImageScalingX, ?BoxImageScalingY, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxImageShowBackground
Purpose
Display the background colors or gradient saved with an image.
Syntax
BoxImageShowBackground (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BoxImagePageBackground, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxInitialStyleDlg
Purpose
Display the Text Box Initial Style dialog box. Specify a box before this command.
Syntax
BoxInitialStyleDlg ()
BoxOLEEditObject
Purpose
Edit the graphics box contents with the OLE server.
Syntax
BoxOLEEditObject ()
BoxOverlap
Purpose
Allow a box to overlap other boxes. Precede with BoxCreate or BoxEdit and follow with BoxEnd. This command takes effect only for boxes that are attached to a page or a paragraph.
Syntax
BoxOverlap (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BoxOverlap, BoxHorizontalAlignment, BoxHorizontalPosition, BoxVerticalAlignment, BoxVerticalPosition
BoxPosDlg
Purpose
Display the Box Position dialog box.
Syntax
BoxPosDlg ()
BoxResetBorder
Purpose
Reset the border values for the current box to the values of the corresponding box style. For example, border changes made to a specific figure box reset to the default border values assigned to the Figure Box style. Precede with BoxCreate or BoxEdit and end with BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxResetBorder ()
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxResetCaption
Purpose
Reset the caption values for the current box to the caption values of the corresponding box style. For example, caption changes made to a specific text box are reset to the default caption values assigned to the Text Box style. Precede with BoxEdit and end with BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxResetCaption ()
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxResetContent
Purpose
Reset the content values for the current box to the content values of the corresponding box style. For example, content changes made to a specific user box are reset to the values assigned to the User Box style. Precede with BoxEdit and end with BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxResetContent ()
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxResetContentRender
Purpose
Reset the content render values for the current box to the values of the corresponding box style. For example, content render changes made to a specific equation box are reset to the default content render values assigned to the Equation Box style.
Syntax
BoxResetContentRender ()
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxResetCounter
Purpose
Reset the counter values for the current box to the values of the corresponding box style. For example, counter changes made to an equation box are reset to the default counter values of the Equation Box style.
Syntax
BoxResetCounter ()
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxResetFill
Purpose
Reset the fill values for the current box to the values of the corresponding box style. For example, fill style changes made to a figure box are reset to the fill values of the Figure Box style.
Syntax
BoxResetFill ()
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxResetPosition
Purpose
Reset the position values for the current box to the position values for the corresponding box style. For example, position changes made to a figure box are reset to default position values of the Figure Box style.
Syntax
BoxResetPosition ()
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxResetTextFlow
Purpose
Reset the text wrapping values for the current box to the values of the corresponding box style. For example, text wrapping changes made to a user box are reset to the text flow values of the User Box style.
Syntax
BoxResetTextFlow ()
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxSaveLookAsStyle
Purpose
Save the settings for the current box as a style. This command must be preceded by BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEditByCounter, BoxEditNext, or BoxEditPrevious, and followed by BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxSaveLookAsStyle (Style: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
string
Library
enumeration
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
BoxStyleCreate
BoxStaysOnPage
Purpose
Specify whether a graphics box is allowed to move with the surrounding text. Although you may use BoxStaysOnPage to set this option for boxes that are attached to a paragraph or character, it takes effect only for boxes that are attached to a page. This command must be preceded by BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEditByCounter, BoxEditNext, or BoxEditPrevious, and followed by BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxStaysOnPage (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?BoxStaysOnPage
BoxStyleCopy
Purpose
Copy a box style from one library to another and/or rename the style.
Syntax
BoxStyleCopy (Style: any; FromLibrary: enumeration; ToLibrary: enumeration; DestName: string)
Parameters
Style
any
ButtonBox!
EquationBox!
FigureBox!
InlineEquationBox!
NoBox!
TableBox!
TextBox!
UserBox!
WatermarkImageBox!
FromLibrary
enumeration
CurrentDocument!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
ToLibrary
enumeration
CurrentDocument!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
DestName
string (optional) The new name of the style.
See Also
BoxStyleCreate, BoxStyleDelete, BoxStyleEdit, BoxStyleRetrieve
BoxStyleCreate
Purpose
Create a box style and specify the library where it resides.
Syntax
BoxStyleCreate (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
BoxStyleDelete, BoxStyleEdit, BoxStyleRetrieve, GraphicBoxStyleDlg
BoxStyleDelete
Purpose
Delete a user-defined box style.
Syntax
BoxStyleDelete (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any
ButtonBox!
EquationBox!
FigureBox!
InlineEquationBox!
NoBox!
TableBox!
TextBox!
UserBox!
WatermarkImageBox!
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
BoxStyleCreate, BoxStyleEdit, BoxStyleRetrieve, GraphicBoxStyleDlg
BoxStyleEdit
Purpose
Begin box style editing.
Syntax
BoxStyleEdit (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any Enclose user-defined styles in quotation marks.
ButtonBox!
EquationBox!
FigureBox!
InlineEquationBox!
NoBox!
TableBox!
TextBox!
UserBox!
WatermarkImageBox!
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
BoxStyleCreate, BoxStyleDelete, BoxStyleEdit, BoxStyleEnd, BoxStyleRetrieve
BoxStyleEnd
Purpose
Exit the graphics style create or edit mode with or without saving changes. Precede this command with BoxStyleCreate or BoxStyleEdit.
Syntax
BoxStyleEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
See Also
BoxStyleCreate, BoxStyleEdit
BoxStyleName
Purpose
Specify a box style name. Precede with BoxStyleCreate.
Syntax
BoxStyleName (StyleName: string)
Parameters
StyleName
string
See Also
BoxStyleCreate
BoxStyleRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve all box graphics styles from the specified document or template and add to the specified style list.
Syntax
BoxStyleRetrieve (Filename: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string The path and filename of a document or template containing the styles to retrieve.
Library
enumeration Destination for the retrieved styles. Use CurrentDoc! to add the styles to the current document style list. Use PersonalLibrary! to add the styles to the default template style list. Use SharedLibrary! to add the styles to the additional objects template style list. If an additional objects template is not specified in Files Settings, and SharedLibrary! is used here, the command does nothing.
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary! Not used.
See Also
BoxStyleCopy, BoxStyleSave
BoxStyleSave
Purpose
Save all styles in the current document or a specified style library to another style library, replacing all styles already in it.
Syntax
BoxStyleSave (Filename: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string The style library to save to.
Library
enumeration The current style location.
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
BoxStyleCopy, BoxStyleRetrieve
BoxTextAngle
Purpose
Rotate the text in a text box.
Syntax
BoxTextAngle (Angle: enumeration)
Parameters
Angle
enumeration
Degrees180!
Degrees270!
Degrees90!
None!
See Also
?BoxTextAngle, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxTextDefaultStyle
Purpose
Specify the default text box style.
Syntax
BoxTextDefaultStyle (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
See Also
?BoxTextDefaultStyle, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxTextEdit
Purpose
Begin the text box editing commands. Follow with commands that modify box contents such as Type and end with BoxTextEditEnd.
Syntax
BoxTextEdit ()
See Also
BoxContentEdit, BoxTextEditEnd
BoxTextEditEnd
Purpose
End the text box editing commands. Precede with BoxTextEdit and commands such as Type which modify box text.
Syntax
BoxTextEditEnd ()
See Also
BoxTextEdit, SubstructureExit
BoxTextFilename
Purpose
Specify a file to insert into a text box.
Syntax
BoxTextFilename (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
BoxTextFlow
Purpose
Specify the side(s) of a box to wrap text around.
Syntax
BoxTextFlow (Wrap: enumeration)
Parameters
Wrap
enumeration
BothSides!
Columnar!
LargestSide!
LeftSide!
NeitherSide!
NoWrapping!
RightSide!
See Also
?BoxWrapping, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd
BoxTextFlowContour
Purpose
Contour the text outside a box to the shape of an image inside the box.
Syntax
BoxTextFlowContour ()
See Also
BoxTextFlow, BoxTextFlowSquare
BoxTextFlowSquare
Purpose
Contour the text outside a box evenly around all sides of the box. Precede with BoxTextFlowContour.
Syntax
BoxTextFlowSquare ()
See Also
BoxTextFlow, BoxTextFlowContour
BoxToBack
Purpose
Move the selected object(s) to the back.
Syntax
BoxToBack ()
BoxToFront
Purpose
Move the selected object(s) to the front.
Syntax
BoxToFront ()
BoxUpdateDisplay
Purpose
Update the appearance of a box after editing changes. This command must be preceded by BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEditByCounter, BoxEditNext, or BoxEditPrevious, and followed by BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxUpdateDisplay ()
BoxVerticalAlignment
Purpose
Align a box with the page or character it is attached to. This command is not valid with paragraph-attached boxes. Precede with BoxCreate or BoxEdit and follow with BoxEnd.
Syntax
BoxVerticalAlignment (Alignment: enumeration; Offset: any)
Parameters
Alignment
enumeration
Baseline!
BaseOffset!
Bottom!
Center!
FullAlign!
Top!
Offset
any (optional)
See Also
?BoxVerticalAlignment, ?BoxVerticalOffset, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxVerticalPosition
BoxVerticalPosition
Purpose
Specify the vertical position of a box attached to a page or paragraph. For example, the distance from the top of the page (or top margin) to the top of the box. Not valid for boxes attached to characters.
Syntax
BoxVerticalPosition (Alignment: any)
Parameters
Alignment
any
See Also
BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxVerticalAlignment, TextBoxCreate
BoxWidth
Purpose
Base the box width on the width of box contents or specify a fixed measurement.
Syntax
BoxWidth (Width: any)
Parameters
Width
any Use a number to specify a fixed width.
AutoWidth!
See Also
?BoxWidth, BoxCreate, BoxEdit, BoxEnd, BoxHeight
BoxWrapDlg
Purpose
Display the Wrap Text dialog box.
Syntax
BoxWrapDlg ()
BulletDlg
Purpose
Display the Bullets & Numbers dialog box.
Syntax
BulletDlg ()
BulletSetCounter
Purpose
Specify a bullet style name and counter value.
Syntax
BulletSetCounter (CounterName: string; Value: numeric)
Parameters
CounterName
string
Value
numeric
ButtonBarAddItem
Purpose
Add items such as macros, buttons, and separators to a toolbar. use any combination of parameters to identify an item.
Syntax
ButtonBarAddItem (ButtonBarName: string; Template: enumeration; ItemName: string; Offset: numeric; Type: enumeration; MacroName: string; ItemText: string; Prompt: string; HelpFile: string; HelpId: string; Script: string)
Parameters
ButtonBarName
string The toolbar to edit.
Template
enumeration (optional) The toolbar location.
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
ItemName
string For predefined items, use a macro command name.
Offset
numeric (optional) The position of an added item. First position: 0. Default: last.
Type
enumeration
Feature!
Launch!
Macro!
Script!
Separator!
MacroName
string (optional)
ItemText
string (optional) The text to display on a user-defined item.
Prompt
string (optional) The text to display for the new item on the status bar.
HelpFile
string (optional) The Help file to use if Help is the added item. Not used in the current version of the application.
HelpId
string (optional) The ID number of the Help file specified in the HelpFile parameter. Not used in the current version of the application.
Script
string (optional)
ButtonBarCreateDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Toolbar dialog box.
Syntax
ButtonBarCreateDlg ()
ButtonBarDeleteItem
Purpose
Remove an item from a toolbar. Default: Last item on the current toolbar. Use any combination of parameters to identify an item.
Syntax
ButtonBarDeleteItem (ButtonBarName: string; Template: enumeration; ItemName: string; Offset: numeric)
Parameters
ButtonBarName
string The toolbar name.
Template
enumeration (optional) The toolbar location.
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
ItemName
string (optional) For predefined items, use a macro command name.
Offset
numeric (optional) The position of the item to remove. First position: 0.
ButtonBarEditDlg
Purpose
Display the Toolbar Editor dialog box.
Syntax
ButtonBarEditDlg ()
ButtonBarOptionsDlg
Purpose
Display the Toolbar Options dialog box.
Syntax
ButtonBarOptionsDlg ()
ButtonBarScrollbarToggle
Purpose
Turn the toolbar scroll bar on or off.
Syntax
ButtonBarScrollbarToggle (State: enumeration; ButtonBarName: string; LoadedFromDefaultTemplate: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional) Default = On!
Off!
On!
ButtonBarName
string
LoadedFromDefaultTemplate
enumeration
No!
Yes!
ButtonBarSelect
Purpose
Select a toolbar.
Syntax
ButtonBarSelect (ButtonBarName: string; LoadedFromDefaultTemplate: enumeration)
Parameters
ButtonBarName
string
LoadedFromDefaultTemplate
enumeration
No!
Yes!
ButtonBarSetFont
Purpose
Specify a toolbar font face and size.
Syntax
ButtonBarSetFont (Font: string; Size: numeric)
Parameters
Font
string
Size
numeric
See Also
ButtonBarSetLocation, ButtonBarSetRows, ButtonBarSetStyle
ButtonBarSetLocation
Purpose
Specify a toolbar position.
Syntax
ButtonBarSetLocation (Location: enumeration; ButtonBarName: string; LoadedFromDefaultTemplate: enumeration)
Parameters
Location
enumeration
Bottom!
Left!
Palette!
Right!
Top!
ButtonBarName
string
LoadedFromDefaultTemplate
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
ButtonBarSetFont, ButtonBarSetRows, ButtonBarSetStyle
ButtonBarSetRows
Purpose
Specify the number of rows on a toolbar.
Syntax
ButtonBarSetRows (Rows: numeric; ButtonBarName: string; LoadedFromDefaultTemplate: enumeration)
Parameters
Rows
numeric
ButtonBarName
string
LoadedFromDefaultTemplate
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
ButtonBarSetFont, ButtonBarSetLocation, ButtonBarSetStyle
ButtonBarSetStyle
Purpose
Specify a toolbar style.
Syntax
ButtonBarSetStyle (Style: enumeration; ButtonBarName: string; LoadedFromDefaultTemplate: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
enumeration
Picture!
PictureAndText!
Text!
ButtonBarName
string
LoadedFromDefaultTemplate
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
ButtonBarSetFont, ButtonBarSetLocation, ButtonBarSetRows
ButtonBarShow
Purpose
Display or hide the toolbar. Recordable substitute: ButtonBarShowToggle.
Syntax
ButtonBarShow (State: enumeration; ButtonBarName: string; LoadedFromDefaultTemplate: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
ButtonBarName
string
LoadedFromDefaultTemplate
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?ButtonBarActive, ViewToolbarsDlg
ButtonBarShowToggle
Purpose
Display or hide the toolbar.
Syntax
ButtonBarShowToggle ()
See Also
ButtonBarShow
CapBeginSentence
Purpose
Automatically capitalize the first letter of each sentence as it is typed.
Syntax
CapBeginSentence (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
CaseToggle
Purpose
Change the selected text to uppercase or lowercase.
Syntax
CaseToggle ()
Center
Purpose
Insert a [Hd Center on Marg] code at the insertion point, centering the current line of text from the insertion point to the next justification code or [HRt] code.
Syntax
Center ()
See Also
CenterCurrentPage, CenterPages
CenterCurrentPage
Purpose
Center the current page vertically.
Syntax
CenterCurrentPage (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?CenterCurrentPage, CenterPages
CenterPageDlg
Purpose
Display the Center Page(s) dialog box.
Syntax
CenterPageDlg ()
CenterPages
Purpose
Center the current and subsequent pages vertically.
Syntax
CenterPages (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?CenterPages, Center, CenterCurrentPage
ChangeWatermarkGraphicShade
Purpose
Change the shading of a watermark image.
Syntax
ChangeWatermarkGraphicShade (Amount: numeric)
Parameters
Amount
numeric
See Also
ChangeWatermarkTextShade
ChangeWatermarkTextShade
Purpose
Change the shading of watermark text.
Syntax
ChangeWatermarkTextShade (Amount: numeric)
Parameters
Amount
numeric
See Also
ChangeWatermarkGraphicShade
ChapterNumber
Purpose
Specify a chapter number.
Syntax
ChapterNumber (Chapter: numeric)
Parameters
Chapter
numeric
See Also
?ChapterNumber, ChapterNumberDecrement, ChapterNumberDisplay, ChapterNumberIncrement, ChapterNumberMethod
ChapterNumberDecrement
Purpose
Decrease the chapter number by one.
Syntax
ChapterNumberDecrement ()
See Also
ChapterNumber, ChapterNumberDisplay, ChapterNumberIncrement, ChapterNumberMethod
ChapterNumberDisplay
Purpose
Insert the chapter number at the insertion point.
Syntax
ChapterNumberDisplay ()
See Also
ChapterNumber, ChapterNumberDecrement, ChapterNumberIncrement, ChapterNumberMethod
ChapterNumberIncrement
Purpose
Increase the chapter number by one.
Syntax
ChapterNumberIncrement ()
See Also
ChapterNumber, ChapterNumberDecrement, ChapterNumberDisplay, ChapterNumberMethod
ChapterNumberMethod
Purpose
Specify a chapter numbering method.
Syntax
ChapterNumberMethod (Method: enumeration)
Parameters
Method
enumeration
LowerLetters!
LowerRoman!
Numbers!
UpperLetters!
UpperRoman!
See Also
?ChapterNumberMethod, ChapterNumber, ChapterNumberDecrement, ChapterNumberDisplay, ChapterNumberIncrement
Char
Purpose
Prompt the user for a keystroke, then assign the ASCII numeric equivalent of the keystroke to the variable specified in the Character parameter. Only one keystroke is accepted. If more than one character is entered, only the first is accepted. Not recordable.
Syntax
Char (Character: variable; Prompt: string)
Parameters
Character
variable
Prompt
string (optional)
See Also
ZZZ Don't Delete This Record!!!
CharMappingDlg
Purpose
Display the Document Character Map dialog box.
Syntax
CharMappingDlg ()
CheckBoxShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro CHECKBOX.WCM to create check boxes in a document that can be changed by clicking on them. CHECKBOX.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
CheckBoxShippingMacro ()
CleanUpSpaces
Purpose
Turn Cut and Paste Cleanup on or off.
Syntax
CleanUpSpaces (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?CleanUpSpaces
ClearDoc
Purpose
Close the current document without saving and leave the current window open.
Syntax
ClearDoc ()
ClearUndoLevels
Purpose
Delete all Undos associated with the current document.
Syntax
ClearUndoLevels ()
ClipboardAppendTo
Purpose
Append the currently selected text to the contents of the Clipboard.
Syntax
ClipboardAppendTo ()
See Also
Append, ClipboardRetrieve, ClipboardSaveTo
ClipboardRetrieve
Purpose
Insert the Clipboard contents at the insertion point.
Syntax
ClipboardRetrieve ()
See Also
Append, ClipboardAppendTo, ClipboardSaveTo
ClipboardSaveTo
Purpose
Save the selected text or graphics to the Clipboard, replacing existing Clipboard contents. If text or graphics are not selected before this command, macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
ClipboardSaveTo ()
See Also
Append, ClipboardAppendTo, ClipboardRetrieve
ClipboardShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro CLIPBRD.WCM to open the Clipboard Viewer. CLIPBRD.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
ClipboardShippingMacro ()
Close
Purpose
Close the current window or text editor.
Syntax
Close (Save: enumeration)
Parameters
Save
enumeration (optional) Default: prompt user to save.
No!
Yes!
See Also
CloseNoSave
CloseAllShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro CLOSEALL.WCM to display the Close All Documents dialog box, which presents a list of all open documents with modified documents marked for saving. CLOSEALL.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
CloseAllShippingMacro ()
CloseNoSave
Purpose
Close the current document without saving it.
Syntax
CloseNoSave (Verify: enumeration)
Parameters
Verify
enumeration (optional) Prompt the user to verify close without saving. Default: no prompt.
No!
Yes!
See Also
Close
CodePage
Purpose
Specify code page settings.
Syntax
CodePage (Dos: numeric; Windows: numeric; InputFile: numeric; OutputFile: numeric)
Parameters
Dos
numeric (optional) The DOS code page setting.
|
333 Europa |
863 Canada/French |
|
437 US IBM Default |
865 Norway |
|
710 Arabic |
866 Cyrillic |
|
850 PC Multilingual |
895 Czech-Kamenicky |
|
852 Eastern Europe |
897 Hungarian |
|
853 Turkish |
8510 Alternate Greek |
|
860 Portugal |
8600 Alternate Portugal |
|
861 Icelandic |
8601 Alternate Portugal |
|
862 Hebrew |
8660 Alternate Cyrillic |
Windows
numeric (optional) The Windows code page setting.
|
1004 Windows US |
ISO 8859-1 Latin #1 |
|
1250 Windows Latin-2 |
ISO 8859-2 Latin #2 |
|
1251 Windows Cyrillic |
ISO 8859-6 Latin/Arabic |
|
1252 Windows US Standard |
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek |
|
1253 Windows Greek |
ISO 8859-8 Latin/Hebrew |
|
1254 Windows Turkish |
InputFile
numeric (optional) Any code number listed for the DOS or Windows parameter.
OutputFile
numeric (optional) Any code number listed for the DOS or Windows parameter.
CodePageDlg
Purpose
Display the Code Page settings dialog box.
Syntax
CodePageDlg ()
ColorAdd
Purpose
Add a color to a palette.
Syntax
ColorAdd (PaletteName: string; PositionIndex: numeric; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; ColorName: string)
Parameters
PaletteName
string
PositionIndex
numeric The color position on the palette.
Red
numeric Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric Value: 0-255.
ColorName
string This parameter has been left in for backward compatability with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect. To specify a color in Corel WordPerfect 8, use the Red, Green, and Blue parameters.
See Also
ColorDelete, ColorModify
ColorDelete
Purpose
Remove a color from a color palette.
Syntax
ColorDelete (PaletteName: string; ColorName: string)
Parameters
PaletteName
string
ColorName
string This parameter has been left in for backward compatability with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect. To specify a color in Corel WordPerfect 8, use the Red, Green, and Blue parameters.
See Also
ColorAdd, ColorModify
ColorModify
Purpose
Modify and rename a color.
Syntax
ColorModify (PaletteName: string; OldColorName: string; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; NewColorName: string)
Parameters
PaletteName
string
OldColorName
string
Red
numeric Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric Value: 0-255.
NewColorName
string
See Also
ColorAdd, ColorDelete
ColorPaletteCreate
Purpose
Name a new palette. Use with other commands such as ColorAdd.
Syntax
ColorPaletteCreate (PaletteName: string)
Parameters
PaletteName
string
See Also
ColorPaletteDelete, ColorPaletteRename, ColorPaletteSelect
ColorPaletteDelete
Purpose
Delete a palette.
Syntax
ColorPaletteDelete (PaletteName: string)
Parameters
PaletteName
string
See Also
ColorPaletteCreate, ColorPaletteRename, ColorPaletteSelect
ColorPaletteDlg
Purpose
Display the Define Color Printing Palette dialog box.
Syntax
ColorPaletteDlg ()
ColorPaletteRename
Purpose
Rename a palette.
Syntax
ColorPaletteRename (OldPaletteName: string; NewPaletteName: string)
Parameters
OldPaletteName
string
NewPaletteName
string
See Also
ColorPaletteCreate, ColorPaletteDelete, ColorPaletteSelect
ColorPaletteSelect
Purpose
Select a color palette.
Syntax
ColorPaletteSelect (PaletteName: string)
Parameters
PaletteName
string
See Also
ColorPaletteCreate, ColorPaletteDelete, ColorPaletteRename
ColumnBorderDlg
Purpose
Display the Column Border/Fill dialog box.
Syntax
ColumnBorderDlg ()
ColumnDefineDlg
Purpose
Display the Columns dialog box.
Syntax
ColumnDefineDlg ()
See Also
ColumnsDefinition
ColumnsDefinition
Purpose
Define columns.
Syntax
ColumnsDefinition (ColumnsType: enumeration; VerticalSpacing: numeric; {Spacing: measurement; SpacingDef: enumeration; })
Parameters
ColumnsType
enumeration
Newspaper!
NewspaperBalanced!
Parallel!
ParallelBlockProtect!
VerticalSpacing
numeric The spacing between sections of text in parallel columns.
Spacing
measurement (optional) Alternate between specifying column width and the desired space between the columns. Always paired with the SpacingDef parameter. Enclose Spacing and SpacingDef parameters in braces ({}) separated by semicolons. For multiple columns, alternate Spacing and SpacingDef parameters.
SpacingDef
enumeration (optional) The definition of column width and spacing between columns.
Fixed!
NotFixed!
See Also
ColumnsOff
ColumnsOff
Purpose
Turn off Columns.
Syntax
ColumnsOff ()
See Also
ColumnsDefinition
ColumnsOn
Purpose
Turn on Columns.
Syntax
ColumnsOn ()
See Also
ColumnsDefinition, ColumnsOff
CommentConvert
Purpose
Convert a comment to text.
Syntax
CommentConvert ()
See Also
CommentEdit
CommentCreate
Purpose
Open a new comment window in order to create a new comment.
Syntax
CommentCreate ()
See Also
CommentConvert, CommentEdit, CommentInformation
CommentEdit
Purpose
Open the comment editing screen in order to edit a comment.
Syntax
CommentEdit ()
See Also
CommentConvert
CommentInformation
Purpose
Display the Comment Information dialog box.
Syntax
CommentInformation ()
CommentInsertTime
Purpose
Insert the current time into a comment.
Syntax
CommentInsertTime ()
See Also
CommentCreate, CommentEdit, CommentInsertUserInitials, CommentInsertUserName
CommentInsertUserInitials
Purpose
Insert the user initials specified in Environment Settings into a comment.
Syntax
CommentInsertUserInitials ()
See Also
CommentCreate, CommentEdit, CommentInsertTime, CommentInsertUserName
CommentInsertUserName
Purpose
Insert the user name specified in the Environment Settings dialog box into a comment.
Syntax
CommentInsertUserName ()
See Also
CommentCreate, CommentEdit, CommentInsertTime, CommentInsertUserInitials
CommentNext
Purpose
Go to the next comment.
Syntax
CommentNext ()
CommentPrevious
Purpose
Go to the previous comment.
Syntax
CommentPrevious ()
CommentsDisplaySetup
Purpose
Turn comment display on or off in the current document for the current session. This command does not change display settings for comments.
Syntax
CommentsDisplaySetup (OnOff: enumeration)
Parameters
OnOff
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
See Also
PrefDisplaySet
ConditionalEndOfPage
Purpose
Keep a specified number of lines together at a page break. If a page break falls between the lines, the lines move to the next page.
Syntax
ConditionalEndOfPage (LinesTogether: numeric)
Parameters
LinesTogether
numeric
See Also
BlockProtect, KeepTextTogetherDlg, WidowOrphan
ConvertCaseInitialCaps
Purpose
Convert the selected text to lowercase and capitalize the first letter of each word.
Syntax
ConvertCaseInitialCaps ()
See Also
ConvertCaseLowercase, ConvertCaseUppercase
ConvertCaseLowercase
Purpose
Convert the selected text to lowercase, except the first word of each sentence and “I” and its forms, such as “I'm” and “I've.”
Syntax
ConvertCaseLowercase ()
See Also
ConvertCaseInitialCaps, ConvertCaseUppercase
ConvertCaseUppercase
Purpose
Convert the selected text to uppercase.
Syntax
ConvertCaseUppercase ()
See Also
ConvertCaseInitialCaps, ConvertCaseLowercase
Copy
Purpose
Copy the selected text. Use Paste to retrieve the copied text. Recordable substitute: EditCopy.
Syntax
Copy ()
See Also
EditCopy
CopyAndPaste
Purpose
Copy the selected text to the Clipboard. Use EditPaste or MoveModeEnd to paste the copied text into the current document. Included for DOS compatibility. Recordable substitutes: EditCopy and EditPaste.
Syntax
CopyAndPaste ()
CorelVersionArchiveCurrentDlg
Purpose
Save a version of the current document.
Syntax
CorelVersionArchiveCurrentDlg ()
CorelVersionRetrieveCurrentDlg
Purpose
Retrieve any saved version of the current document.
Syntax
CorelVersionRetrieveCurrentDlg ()
CorelVersionRetrieveDocumentDlg
Purpose
Retrieve any version already saved for any document.
Syntax
CorelVersionRetrieveDocumentDlg ()
CounterCreate
Purpose
Specify a box reference number.
Syntax
CounterCreate (CounterName: any; {Method: enumeration; })
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
Method
enumeration (optional) The numbering method. To specify different numbering methods for each level, repeat the method parameter. Enclose repeating parameters in braces ({}) separated by a semicolon.
LowLetter!
LowRoman!
Numbers!
UpLetter!
UpRoman!
See Also
CounterDelete, CounterSetMethod, CounterSetValue
CounterDecrement
Purpose
Decrease a counter level by one.
Syntax
CounterDecrement (CounterName: any; Level: numeric)
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
Level
numeric
See Also
CounterIncrement, CounterSetValue
CounterDelete
Purpose
Delete a user-defined counter or reset a program-defined counter.
Syntax
CounterDelete (CounterName: any)
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
See Also
CounterCreate
CounterDisplay
Purpose
Display the counter value of a box or user-defined counter.
Syntax
CounterDisplay (CounterName: any; Level: numeric)
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
Level
numeric
CounterDlg
Purpose
Display the Counter Numbering dialog box.
Syntax
CounterDlg ()
CounterEditLevel
Purpose
Specify the number of levels a counter contains.
Syntax
CounterEditLevel (CounterName: any; NewNumLvls: numeric)
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
NewNumLvls
numeric The counter level.
See Also
CounterEditLevelMethod, CounterEditLevelName
CounterEditLevelMethod
Purpose
Change the numbering method for a multi-level counter.
Syntax
CounterEditLevelMethod (CounterName: any; LevelNum: numeric; NewMethod: enumeration)
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
LevelNum
numeric
NewMethod
enumeration
LowLetter!
LowRoman!
Numbers!
UpLetter!
UpRoman!
See Also
CounterEditMethod
CounterEditLevelName
Purpose
Rename the specified level of a multi-level counter.
Syntax
CounterEditLevelName (OldCounterName: any; OldLevelName: string; NewLevelName: string)
Parameters
OldCounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
OldLevelName
string
NewLevelName
string
See Also
CounterEditName
CounterEditMethod
Purpose
Change a counter numbering method.
Syntax
CounterEditMethod (CounterName: any; NewMethod: enumeration)
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
NewMethod
enumeration
LowLetter!
LowRoman!
Numbers!
UpLetter!
UpRoman!
See Also
CounterEditLevelMethod
CounterEditName
Purpose
Rename a user-defined counter.
Syntax
CounterEditName (OldName: string; NewName: string)
Parameters
OldName
string
NewName
string
See Also
CounterEditLevelName
CounterIncrement
Purpose
Increase a counter level by one.
Syntax
CounterIncrement (CounterName: any; Level: numeric)
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
Level
numeric
See Also
CounterDecrement
CounterSetMethod
Purpose
Specify a counter numbering method.
Syntax
CounterSetMethod (CounterName: any; CounterLevel: numeric; Method: enumeration)
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
CounterLevel
numeric
Method
enumeration
LowerLetters!
LowerRoman!
Numbers!
UpperLetters!
UpperRoman!
CounterSetValue
Purpose
Set a counter value.
Syntax
CounterSetValue (CounterName: any; {CounterLevel: numeric; })
Parameters
CounterName
any
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
CounterLevel
numeric (optional) To change counter levels, repeat the CounterLevel parameter.
CreateBoxToggle
Purpose
Enable or disable Drag to Create, which allows you to create and size boxes by clicking and dragging.
Syntax
CreateBoxToggle (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
CreateMapFile
Purpose
Create a .MAP file containing the current document's character mapping and save it with the specified filename and path.
Syntax
CreateMapFile (FileName: string)
Parameters
FileName
string (optional)
CreateRegionLink
Purpose
Indicate that a portion of the current document has been copied to the Clipboard and specify the type of link that has been established.
Syntax
CreateRegionLink (Region: enumeration)
Parameters
Region
enumeration
OBEXRegion!
OLERegion!
CrossRefMarkReference
Purpose
Create a cross-reference.
Syntax
CrossRefMarkReference (TargetName: string; RefType: enumeration; CounterName: any)
Parameters
TargetName
string The reference name.
RefType
enumeration What is referenced.
RefBox!
RefChapter!
RefCounter!
RefEndnote!
RefFootnote!
RefPage!
RefParagraph!
RefSecondaryPage!
RefVolume!
CounterName
any (optional)
EquationCounter!
FigureCounter!
None!
TableBoxCounter!
TextBoxCounter!
UserBoxCounter!
CrossRefMarkTarget
Purpose
Create a cross-reference target.
Syntax
CrossRefMarkTarget (TagName: string)
Parameters
TagName
string (optional)
CtrlBreak
Purpose
Cancel the current action in Corel WordPerfect.
Syntax
CtrlBreak ()
CustomBoxDlg
Purpose
Display the Custom Box dialog box.
Syntax
CustomBoxDlg ()
Cut
Purpose
Remove the selected text and copy it to the Clipboard, replacing previous Clipboard contents. Included for DOS compatibility. Recordable substitute: EditCut.
Syntax
Cut ()
CutAndPaste
Purpose
Remove the selected text and copy to the Clipboard. Use EditPaste or MoveModeEnd to paste the selection in the current document. Included for DOS compatibility. Recordable substitutes: EditCut and EditPaste.
Syntax
CutAndPaste ()
DateCode
Purpose
Insert a code to display the current date at the insertion point. The date code updates to the system date when the document is retrieved or reformatted.
Syntax
DateCode ()
See Also
DateText
DateFormat
Purpose
Specify a date format, and insert the Date Fmt code at the insertion point.
Syntax
DateFormat (DateFormatString: string)
Parameters
DateFormatString
string A combination of text characters, date, and/or time codes. Select date and time codes from the Macro Codes dialog. Click Codes on the Macro Bar to display the Macro Codes dialog.
See Also
DateFormatDlg
DateFormatDlg
Purpose
Display the Document Date/Time Format dialog box.
Syntax
DateFormatDlg ()
See Also
DateFormat
DateText
Purpose
Insert the system date as text at the insertion point.
Syntax
DateText ()
See Also
DateCode
DDEChangeUpdateMode
Purpose
Specify a manual or automatic DDE link update method.
Syntax
DDEChangeUpdateMode (LinkName: string; UpdateMode: enumeration)
Parameters
LinkName
string
UpdateMode
enumeration (optional)
Automatic!
Manual!
DDECreateLink
Purpose
Establish a link between a Corel WordPerfect document and a file in another application. Data changes in the source file are automatically made in the Corel WordPerfect document.
Syntax
DDECreateLink (LinkName: string; Source: string; UpdateMode: enumeration; Format: enumeration)
Parameters
LinkName
string
Source
string The application, file, and optionally, an item within the file that is linked to a Corel WordPerfect document. Separate the application and filename with a vertical bar (|). If an item (a section of a file) is specified, separate the item from the file name with a second vertical bar.
UpdateMode
enumeration (optional)
Automatic!
Manual!
Format
enumeration (optional)
|
METAFILE! |
WP7DOC! |
|
OEMTEXT! |
WP7TEXT! |
|
RTF! |
WP8DOC! |
|
TEXT! |
WP8TEXT! |
|
WB1! |
WPDOC! |
|
WP6DOC! |
WPG2! |
|
WP6TEXT! |
DDECreateLinkDlg
Purpose
Display the Links dialog box.
Syntax
DDECreateLinkDlg ()
DDEDeleteLink
Purpose
Remove a DDE link.
Syntax
DDEDeleteLink ({LinkName: string; })
Parameters
LinkName
string (optional)
DDEDeleteLinkDlg
Purpose
Display the Links dialog box.
Syntax
DDEDeleteLinkDlg ()
DDEEditLink
Purpose
Change the properties of a DDE link.
Syntax
DDEEditLink (LinkName: string; NewName: string; NewSource: string)
Parameters
LinkName
string
NewName
string (optional)
NewSource
string (optional)
DDEEditLinkDlg
Purpose
Display the Change Links dialog box.
Syntax
DDEEditLinkDlg ()
DDEPasteLink
Purpose
Establish a link between a Corel WordPerfect document and a file in another application. Data changes in the source file are automatically made in the Corel WordPerfect document. After copying a selection in another application to the Clipboard, use DDEPasteLink to link it to a Corel WordPerfect document.
Syntax
DDEPasteLink (Format: enumeration)
Parameters
Format
enumeration (optional)
|
METAFILE! |
WP7DOC! |
|
OEMTEXT! |
WP7TEXT! |
|
RTF! |
WP8DOC! |
|
TEXT! |
WP8TEXT! |
|
WB1! |
WPDOC! |
|
WP6DOC! |
WPG2! |
|
WP6TEXT! |
DDEUpdateLink
Purpose
Update a specified DDE link. If the optional LinkName parameter is left off, all links in the current document are updated.
Syntax
DDEUpdateLink ({LinkName: string; })
Parameters
LinkName
string (optional)
DDEUpdateLinkDlg
Purpose
Display the Links dialog box.
Syntax
DDEUpdateLinkDlg ()
DecimalAlignmentCharacter
Purpose
Specify the ASCII numeric equivalent of a decimal character.
Syntax
DecimalAlignmentCharacter (Character: string)
Parameters
Character
string The decimal separator character.
See Also
?DecimalAlignmentCharacter
DelayCodes
Purpose
Postpone the effects of codes for one or more pages.
Syntax
DelayCodes (PagesToDelay: numeric)
Parameters
PagesToDelay
numeric
DelayCodesDlg
Purpose
Display the Delay Codes dialog box.
Syntax
DelayCodesDlg ()
DeleteAppend
Purpose
Delete a selection and append it to the Clipboard.
Syntax
DeleteAppend ()
DeleteCharNext
Purpose
Delete the character to the right of the insertion point.
Syntax
DeleteCharNext ()
See Also
DeleteCharPrevious
DeleteCharPrevious
Purpose
Delete the character to the left of the insertion point.
Syntax
DeleteCharPrevious ()
See Also
DeleteCharNext
DeleteToBeginningOfWord
Purpose
Delete the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the current word. The insertion point must be in a word.
Syntax
DeleteToBeginningOfWord ()
See Also
DeleteToEndOfWord
DeleteToEndOfLine
Purpose
Delete the text and codes from the insertion point to the end of the current line. Does not delete hard returns or hard page breaks.
Syntax
DeleteToEndOfLine ()
DeleteToEndOfPage
Purpose
Delete the text and codes from the insertion point to the end of the current page. Does not delete hard page breaks.
Syntax
DeleteToEndOfPage ()
DeleteToEndOfWord
Purpose
Delete the text and codes from the insertion point to the end of the current word.
Syntax
DeleteToEndOfWord ()
See Also
DeleteToBeginningOfWord
DeleteWord
Purpose
Delete the current word or space.
Syntax
DeleteWord ()
DirectoryCreate
Purpose
Create a new directory.
Syntax
DirectoryCreate (Directory: string)
Parameters
Directory
string The path and directory name.
DirectoryExists
Purpose
Return whether a specified directory exists.
Syntax
DirectoryExists (Variable: variable; Directory: string)
Parameters
Variable
variable True or False.
Directory
string
Display
Purpose
Display macro execution when a macro is played. A macro runs faster with display off. A “Macro Play” message appears on the status bar.
Syntax
boolean := Display (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
InhibitInput
DisplayMode
Purpose
Display the current document in Draft or Page mode. Included for DOS compatibility. DOS enumerations do not correspond exactly with Corel WordPerfect 8 View options. FastDraft! stops macro execution, Text! and Graphics! specify Draft mode, and FullPage! specifies Page mode. Recordable substitutes: ViewDraft, ViewPage, and ViewTwoPage.
Syntax
DisplayMode (DisplayMode: enumeration)
Parameters
DisplayMode
enumeration
FastDraft!
FullPage!
Graphics!
Text!
WebPage!
DisplayZoom
Purpose
Specify the current zoom setting.
Syntax
DisplayZoom (Percent: numeric)
Parameters
Percent
numeric Percent: 25-400.
DocCompare
Purpose
Compare the current document with an original copy of the document and mark differences with Redline and Strikeout.
Syntax
DocCompare (Filename: string; CompFlags: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string The original document.
CompFlags
enumeration The scope of comparison.
Paragraph!
Phrase!
Sentence!
Word!
See Also
DocCompareAddMarkingsDlg, DocCompareRemoveMarkingsDlg
DocCompareAddMarkingsDlg
Purpose
Display the Add Markings dialog box.
Syntax
DocCompareAddMarkingsDlg ()
See Also
DocCompare, DocCompareRemoveMarkingsDlg
DocCompareRemoveMarkingsDlg
Purpose
Display the Remove Markings dialog box.
Syntax
DocCompareRemoveMarkingsDlg ()
See Also
DocCompare, DocCompareAddMarkingsDlg
DocCompareRemoveRedline
Purpose
Remove Strikeout and Redline codes and Strikeout text, or remove only Strikeout codes and text.
Syntax
DocCompareRemoveRedline (Flag: enumeration)
Parameters
Flag
enumeration
LeaveRedline!
RemoveAll!
See Also
DocCompare
DocInitialFont
Purpose
Set the default font for the current document.
Syntax
DocInitialFont (Name: string; PointSize: measurement; Family: enumeration; Attributes: enumeration; Weight: enumeration; Width: enumeration; Source: enumeration; Type: enumeration; CharacterSet: enumeration)
Parameters
Name
string
PointSize
measurement (optional)
Family
enumeration (optional)
|
FamilyAestheticOrnamented! |
FamilyITCZapfDingbats! |
|
FamilyAlbertus! |
FamilyLetterGothic! |
|
FamilyBodoni! |
FamilyMadrone! |
|
FamilyBroadway! |
FamilyMicrostyle! |
|
FamilyBrush! |
FamilyOldEnglish! |
|
FamilyCenturySchoolbook! |
FamilyOptima! |
|
FamilyComputer! |
FamilyParkAvenue! |
|
FamilyCourier! |
FamilyPonderosa! |
|
FamilyHelvetica! |
FamilyPTBarnum! |
|
FamilyHobo! |
FamilyRevue! |
|
FamilyITCBenguiat! |
FamilySignetRoundhand! |
|
FamilyITCGaramond! |
FamilyTekton! |
|
FamilyITCLubalinGraph! |
FamilyTimesRoman! |
|
FamilyITCRonda! |
FamilyUncial! |
Attributes
enumeration (optional)
FontMatchItalic!
FontMatchNormal!
FontMatchOutline!
FontMatchShadow!
FontMatchSmallCaps!
Weight
enumeration (optional)
|
WeightBlack! |
WeightMaximum! |
|
WeightBold! |
WeightMedium! |
|
WeightBook! |
WeightRegular! |
|
WeightDemiBold! |
WeightRoman! |
|
WeightDemiLight! |
WeightSemiBold! |
|
WeightExtraBlack! |
WeightSemiLight! |
|
WeightExtraBold! |
WeightThin! |
|
WeightExtraHeavy! |
WeightUltraBlack! |
|
WeightExtraLight! |
WeightUltraHeavy! |
|
WeightExtraThin! |
WeightUltraLight! |
|
WeightHeavy! |
WeightUltraThin! |
|
WeightLight! |
WeightUnknown! |
Width
enumeration (optional)
|
WidthCompressed! |
WidthSemiCondensed! |
|
WidthCondensed! |
WidthSemiExpanded! |
|
WidthDoubleWide! |
WidthTripleWide! |
|
WidthExpanded! |
WidthUltraCompressed! |
|
WidthExtraCondensed! |
WidthUltraCondensed! |
|
WidthExtraExpanded! |
WidthUltraExpanded! |
|
WidthNormal! |
WidthUnknown! |
Source
enumeration (optional)
DRSFile!
PRSFile!
Type
enumeration (optional)
Intellifont!
Speedo!
TrueType!
Type1!
CharacterSet
enumeration (optional)
|
FontMatchArabic! |
FontMatchJapaneseKana! |
|
FontMatchArabicScript! |
FontMatchMath! |
|
FontMatchASCII! |
FontMatchMathExtension! |
|
FontMatchBoxDrawing! |
FontMatchMultinational1! |
|
FontMatchCyrillic! |
FontMatchMultinational2! |
|
FontMatchGreek! |
FontMatchTypographicSymbols! |
|
FontMatchHebrew! |
FontMatchUserDefined! |
|
FontMatchIconicSymbols! |
See Also
?DocumentFont, DocInitialFontDlg
DocInitialFontDlg
Purpose
Display the Document Initial Font dialog box.
Syntax
DocInitialFontDlg ()
See Also
DocInitialFont
DocMaximize
Purpose
Maximize the current document window. If the document is already maximized, the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
DocMaximize ()
See Also
AppMaximize, AppMinimize, AppRestore, DocMinimize, DocRestore
DocMinimize
Purpose
Minimize the current document window. If the document is already minimized, the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
DocMinimize ()
See Also
AppMaximize, AppMinimize, AppRestore, DocMaximize, DocRestore
DocMove
Purpose
Reposition or resize the current document if the application window has been minimized.
Syntax
DocMove ()
See Also
AppMove
DocNext
Purpose
Move the current document to the back and the most recently opened document to the front.
Syntax
DocNext ()
See Also
DocPrevious
DocPrevious
Purpose
Activate the previous document window, if the document is still open.
Syntax
DocPrevious ()
See Also
DocNext
DocRedlineMethodDlg
Purpose
Display the Redline dialog box.
Syntax
DocRedlineMethodDlg ()
DocRestore
Purpose
Restore the current document to the size it was before it was minimized or maximized. If the document is already restored, the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
DocRestore ()
See Also
AppMaximize, AppMinimize, AppRestore, DocMaximize, DocMinimize
DocSize
Purpose
Move or resize the current minimized document window. If the window is maximized, an error is displayed and the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
DocSize ()
See Also
AppSize
DocSummaryConfig
Purpose
Specify the fields to include in the current document summary.
Syntax
DocSummaryConfig ({DocSumFieldName: enumeration; })
Parameters
DocSumFieldName
enumeration (optional) Repeat the parameter for as many fields as need to be specified. Enclose repeating parameters in braces ({}) and separate with semi-colons.
|
Abstract! |
Language! |
|
Account! |
MailStop! |
|
Address! |
Matter! |
|
Attachments! |
Office! |
|
Author! |
Owner! |
|
Authorization! |
Project! |
|
BillTo! |
Publisher! |
|
BlindCopy! |
Purpose! |
|
CarbonCopy! |
ReceivedFrom! |
|
Category! |
RecordedBy! |
|
CheckedBy! |
RecordedDate! |
|
Client! |
Reference! |
|
Comments! |
RevisionDate! |
|
CreationDate! |
RevisionNotes! |
|
DateCompleted! |
RevisionNumber! |
|
Department! |
Section! |
|
DescriptiveName! |
Security! |
|
DescriptiveType! |
Source! |
|
Destination! |
Status! |
|
Disposition! |
Subject! |
|
Division! |
TelephoneNumber! |
|
DocumentNumber! |
Typist! |
|
Editor! |
VersionDate! |
|
ForwardTo! |
VersionNotes! |
|
Group! |
VersionNumber! |
|
Keywords! |
See Also
DocSumSet
DocSummaryDelete
Purpose
Delete the current document summary information.
Syntax
DocSummaryDelete ()
See Also
DocSummaryDlg
DocSummaryDlg
Purpose
Display the Document Summary dialog box.
Syntax
DocSummaryDlg ()
See Also
DocSummaryDelete
DocSummaryPrint
Purpose
Print the current document summary.
Syntax
DocSummaryPrint ()
See Also
DocSummaryDlg, Print
DocSummarySaveAs
Purpose
Save the current document summary with a filename.
Syntax
DocSummarySaveAs (Filename: string; ExportType: enumeration; AppendReplace: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
ExportType
enumeration (optional)
|
AmiPro_10! |
RTF! |
|
AmiPro_12! |
RTFJ! |
|
AmiPro_12A! |
WindowsWrite! |
|
AmiPro_12B! |
WordForWindows_10! |
|
AmiPro_30! |
WordForWindows_11! |
|
ANSIDelimitedTextWindows! |
WordForWindows_12! |
|
ANSIGenericWordProcessor_Windo! |
WordForWindows_1A! |
|
ANSIText_Windows! |
WordForWindows_20! |
|
ASCIIStandard! |
WordForWindows_20a! |
|
ASCIIStripped! |
WordForWindows_20b! |
|
DelimitedText! |
WordForWindows_50! |
|
DisplayWrite_40! |
WordPerfect_42! |
|
DisplayWrite_42! |
WordPerfect_50! |
|
DisplayWrite_50! |
WordPerfect_51! |
|
Excel_40! |
WordPerfect_5xA! |
|
FFT! |
WordPerfect_60! |
|
Kermit_7bit_Transfer! |
WordPerfect_7! |
|
MicroSoftWord_40! |
WordStar_33! |
|
MicroSoftWord_50! |
WordStar_331! |
|
MicroSoftWord_55! |
WordStar_34! |
|
MultiMate_33! |
WordStar_40! |
|
MultiMate_40! |
WordStar_50! |
|
MultiMateAdvantage_36! |
WordStar_55! |
|
MultiMateAdvantageII_10! |
WordStar_60! |
|
NavyDIF! |
WordStar2000_10! |
|
OfficeWriter_60! |
WordStar2000_20! |
|
OfficeWriter_61! |
WordStar2000_30! |
|
OfficeWriter_611! |
XyWriteIIIPlus_355! |
|
OfficeWriter_62! |
XyWriteIIIPlus_356! |
|
RFT! |
AppendReplace
enumeration (optional)
Append!
Replace!
DocSumSet
Purpose
Modify the data of the specified document summary field. Repeat both parameters for each field of the summary. Enclose repeating parameters in braces ({}).
Syntax
DocSumSet ({DocSumFieldName: enumeration; DocSumFieldData: string; })
Parameters
DocSumFieldName
enumeration (optional) The fields to modify.
|
Abstract! |
Keywords! |
|
Account! |
Language! |
|
Address! |
MailStop! |
|
Attachments! |
Matter! |
|
Author! |
Office! |
|
Authorization! |
Owner! |
|
BillTo! |
Project! |
|
BlindCopy! |
Publisher! |
|
CarbonCopy! |
Purpose! |
|
Category! |
ReceivedFrom! |
|
CheckedBy! |
RecordedBy! |
|
Client! |
RecordedDate! |
|
Comments! |
Reference! |
|
CreationDate! |
RevisionNotes! |
|
DateCompleted! |
RevisionNumber! |
|
Department! |
Section! |
|
DescriptiveName! |
Security! |
|
DescriptiveType! |
Source! |
|
Destination! |
Status! |
|
Disposition! |
Subject! |
|
Division! |
TelephoneNumber! |
|
DocumentNumber! |
Typist! |
|
Editor! |
VersionDate! |
|
ForwardTo! |
VersionNotes! |
|
Group! |
VersionNumber! |
DocSumFieldData
string (optional) The data for a document summary field. If CreationDate!, DateCompleted!, RecordedDate!, RevisionDate!, or VersionDate! is specified in the DocSumFieldName parameter, the date must be entered in the sequence of Year, Month, Day. For example: “1994, 9, 14". If the date format is incorrect, the specified date field is not updated.
DotLeader
Purpose
Specify the ASCII number of a dot leader character, and the number of spaces between each character.
Syntax
DotLeader (Character: string; SpaceCount: numeric)
Parameters
Character
string The ASCII number of a dot leader character.
SpaceCount
numeric The number of spaces between the visible dot leader characters.
See Also
?DotLeader
DoubleSidedPrint
Purpose
Turn double-sided printing (Duplex) on or off, and specify a binding edge. This command inserts a code in the document at the beginning of the current page.
Syntax
DoubleSidedPrint (Flags: enumeration)
Parameters
Flags
enumeration
LongEdge!
None!
ShortEdge!
See Also
Binding, PrintTwoSided, PrintTwoSidedDocCodesDlg, PrintUseTwoSidedDocCodes
DoubleSmartQuote
Purpose
Turn Double SmartQuotes on or off and specify a quote character.
Syntax
DoubleSmartQuote (State: enumeration; OpenDoubleQuote: numeric; CloseDoubleQuote: numeric)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
OpenDoubleQuote
numeric (optional) The numeric equivalent of the quote character.
CloseDoubleQuote
numeric (optional) The numeric equivalent of the quote character.
See Also
SingleSmartQuote, UseRegQuotesWithNumbers
DraftZoom100
Purpose
Display Draft view with screen text and graphics at 100%. Draft view does not display headers, footers, or other substructures.
Syntax
DraftZoom100 ()
See Also
DraftZoomMargin
DraftZoomMargin
Purpose
Display Draft view with screen text and graphics reaching the margins. Draft view does not display headers, footers, and other substructures.
Syntax
DraftZoomMargin ()
See Also
DraftZoom100
DropCapAdjustDlg
Purpose
Display the Drop Cap Options dialog box.
Syntax
DropCapAdjustDlg ()
DropCapBegin
Purpose
Begin a drop cap. Follow with drop cap editing commands and DropCapEnd.
Syntax
DropCapBegin ()
DropCapBorderFillDlg
Purpose
Display the Drop Cap Border/Fill dialog box.
Syntax
DropCapBorderFillDlg ()
See Also
DropCapBorderStyle, DropCapFillStyle
DropCapBorderStyle
Purpose
Specify a drop cap border style. Use with DropCapBegin and DropCapEnd.
Syntax
DropCapBorderStyle (BorderStyleName: any)
Parameters
BorderStyleName
any Enclose custom styles in quotation marks.
|
ButtonBorder! |
HeavySingleBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderAll! |
NoBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderBetween! |
SingleBorder! |
|
DashedBorder! |
SpacingOnly! |
|
DottedBorder! |
ThickBorder! |
|
DoubleBorder! |
ThickThinBorder! |
|
ExtraThickBorder! |
ThickTopBottomBorder! |
|
HeavyDoubleBorder! |
ThinThickBorder! |
See Also
DropCapBegin, DropCapBorderFillDlg, DropCapEnd
DropCapCharacters
Purpose
Specify the number of characters in a drop cap.
Syntax
DropCapCharacters (Number: numeric)
Parameters
Number
numeric
See Also
DropCapCharacterSize
DropCapCharacterSize
Purpose
Specify the size of a drop cap character(s).
Syntax
DropCapCharacterSize (Size: numeric)
Parameters
Size
numeric
See Also
DropCapCharacters
DropCapContourWrap
Purpose
Wrap text around a drop cap.
Syntax
DropCapContourWrap (State: any)
Parameters
State
any
No!
Yes!
DropCapControlBar
Purpose
Display the Drop Cap feature bar.
Syntax
DropCapControlBar ()
DropCapEnd
Purpose
End a drop cap and save the changes. Precede with DropCapBegin and drop cap editing commands.
Syntax
DropCapEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
DropCapFillStyle
Purpose
Specify a drop cap fill style.
Syntax
DropCapFillStyle (FillStyleName: any)
Parameters
FillStyleName
any Enclose custom styles in quotation marks.
|
Fill10! |
Fill60! |
|
Fill100! |
Fill70! |
|
Fill20! |
Fill80! |
|
Fill30! |
Fill90! |
|
Fill40! |
FillButton! |
|
Fill5! |
NoFill! |
|
Fill50! |
See Also
DropCapBorderFillDlg
DropCapFontDlg
Purpose
Display the Drop Cap Font dialog box.
Syntax
DropCapFontDlg ()
DropCapHorizontalAdjustment
Purpose
Specify the percentage of a drop cap that is located in the margin.
Syntax
DropCapHorizontalAdjustment (Adjustment: numeric)
Parameters
Adjustment
numeric Percent.
See Also
DropCapVerticalAdjustment
DropCapIncludeDescender
Purpose
Allow descending characters in a drop cap.
Syntax
DropCapIncludeDescender (State: any)
Parameters
State
any
No!
Yes!
See Also
DropCapIncludeDiacritic
DropCapIncludeDiacritic
Purpose
Include diacritic marks in a drop cap.
Syntax
DropCapIncludeDiacritic (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
DropCapKerning
Purpose
Specify the spacing between drop cap characters.
Syntax
DropCapKerning (Adjustment: measurement)
Parameters
Adjustment
measurement
DropCapNoWrap
Purpose
Prevent text from wrapping around a drop cap.
Syntax
DropCapNoWrap (State: any)
Parameters
State
any
No!
Yes!
DropCapOff
Purpose
End the drop cap of the current paragraph.
Syntax
DropCapOff ()
DropCapPositionOtherDlg
Purpose
Display the Drop Cap Position dialog box.
Syntax
DropCapPositionOtherDlg ()
DropCapSizeDlg
Purpose
Display the Drop Cap Size dialog box.
Syntax
DropCapSizeDlg ()
DropCapVerticalAdjustment
Purpose
Specify the number of blank lines between a drop cap and the text that follows it.
Syntax
DropCapVerticalAdjustment (Adjustment: numeric)
Parameters
Adjustment
numeric
See Also
DropCapHorizontalAdjustment
EditBoxDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Box dialog box.
Syntax
EditBoxDlg ()
See Also
GraphicEditBox
EditBoxDlgClose
Purpose
Close the Edit Box dialog box.
Syntax
EditBoxDlgClose ()
See Also
GraphicEditBox
EditComment
Purpose
Display the Comment feature bar.
Syntax
EditComment ()
EditCopy
Purpose
Replace the Clipboard contents with the selected text or graphic.
Syntax
EditCopy ()
EditCut
Purpose
Replace the Clipboard contents with the selected text or graphic and delete the selection from the current document.
Syntax
EditCut ()
EditPaste
Purpose
Paste the Clipboard contents into the current document at the insertion point.
Syntax
EditPaste (ClipboardFormat: string; FormatId: numeric; LinkType: enumeration)
Parameters
ClipboardFormat
string (optional) The registered Clipboard format. If the information you wish to paste is in a registered Clipboard format, this parameter is required and the FormatId parameter is ignored. Several different formats are supported. The options displayed in the Paste Special dialog box will depend on the contents in the Clipboard.
FormatId
numeric (optional) The predefined Clipboard format ID number. If the information you wish to paste is in a Clipboard predefined format, this parameter is required and the ClipboardFormat parameter is ignored. Predefined Clipboard format ID numbers include:
5 = ANSI text.
6 = Old IBM PC character set.
7 = Device Independent Bitmap (DIB).
8 = Bitmap.
9 = Metafilepict.
LinkType
enumeration (optional)
DDE!
OLE!
EditPasteSimple
Purpose
Paste the Clipboard contents without text attributes (unless beginning and ending attribute codes are included in the pasted selection).
Syntax
EditPasteSimple ()
EndCenterOrAlignment
Purpose
Insert a [END Cntr/Align] code, which turns off Center, Flush Right, and alignment tabs at the insertion point for the current line only.
Syntax
EndCenterOrAlignment ()
EndnoteCreate
Purpose
Open a new endnote window, in order to create an endnote. Follow with commands that insert text and codes. End with SubstructureExit.
Syntax
EndnoteCreate ()
See Also
Close
EndnoteEdit
Purpose
Open a specific endnote window, in order to edit the endnote.
Syntax
EndnoteEdit (EndnoteNumber: string)
Parameters
EndnoteNumber
string (optional) Letters, arabic numbers, or roman numerals.
See Also
Close, EndnoteEditDlg
EndnoteEditDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Endnote dialog box.
Syntax
EndnoteEditDlg ()
See Also
EndnoteEdit
EndnoteFootnoteConvert
Purpose
Convert footnotes to endnotes or endnotes to footnotes in the current document.
Syntax
EndnoteFootnoteConvert (Action: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
EndnoteToFootnote!
FootnoteToEndnote!
EndnoteFootnoteNext
Purpose
Go to the next endnote/footnote.
Syntax
EndnoteFootnoteNext ()
EndnoteFootnotePrev
Purpose
Go to the previous endnote/footnote.
Syntax
EndnoteFootnotePrev ()
EndnoteMinimum
Purpose
Specify the amount of endnote text to keep together.
Syntax
EndnoteMinimum (Size: measurement)
Parameters
Size
measurement If less than 1, precede the decimal with 0. Default: 0.5".
See Also
EndnoteOptionsDlg
EndnoteNewNumber
Purpose
Insert an [Endnote Num Set] code to begin new numbering for subsequent endnotes.
Syntax
EndnoteNewNumber (EndnoteNumber: string)
Parameters
EndnoteNumber
string The new starting number or character.
EndnoteNumberDecrement
Purpose
Decrease the current endnote number by one.
Syntax
EndnoteNumberDecrement ()
See Also
EndnoteNewNumber
EndnoteNumberDisplay
Purpose
Display the current endnote number.
Syntax
EndnoteNumberDisplay ()
See Also
EndnoteNewNumber
EndnoteNumberIncrement
Purpose
Increase the current endnote number by one.
Syntax
EndnoteNumberIncrement ()
See Also
EndnoteNewNumber
EndnoteNumberMethod
Purpose
Specify an endnote numbering method.
Syntax
EndnoteNumberMethod (NumberingMethod: enumeration; Characters: string)
Parameters
NumberingMethod
enumeration
|
Characters! |
Numbers! |
|
LowerLetters! |
UpperLetters! |
|
LowerRoman! |
UpperRoman! |
Characters
string (optional) Use when the first parameter is Characters!.
See Also
EndnoteNewNumber
EndnoteOptions
Purpose
Specify endnote options beginning at the insertion point.
Syntax
EndnoteOptions (NumberingMethod: enumeration; Characters: string; BetweenSpacing: measurement; MinimumHeight: measurement)
Parameters
NumberingMethod
enumeration (optional)
|
Characters! |
Numbers! |
|
LowerLetters! |
UpperLetters! |
|
LowerRoman! |
UpperRoman! |
Characters
string (optional) Use up to five characters when the numbering method is Characters!.
BetweenSpacing
measurement (optional) The space between endnotes.
MinimumHeight
measurement (optional) How much of an endnote to keep together on a page.
See Also
EndnoteOptionsDlg
EndnoteOptionsDlg
Purpose
Display the Endnote Options dialog box.
Syntax
EndnoteOptionsDlg ()
See Also
EndnoteOptions
EndnotePlacement
Purpose
Mark where to generate an endnote list, and specify whether to reset numbering for subsequent endnotes. This command applies to endnotes before the Endnote Placement code, or after the last Endnote Placement code.
Syntax
EndnotePlacement (Restart: enumeration)
Parameters
Restart
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
EndnotePlacementDlg
EndnotePlacementDlg
Purpose
Display the Endnote Placement dialog box.
Syntax
EndnotePlacementDlg ()
See Also
EndnotePlacement
EndnoteSetNumberDlg
Purpose
Display the Endnote Number dialog box.
Syntax
EndnoteSetNumberDlg ()
EndnotesSpaceBetween
Purpose
Specify the distance between endnotes.
Syntax
EndnotesSpaceBetween (Width: measurement)
Parameters
Width
measurement
See Also
EndnoteOptions
EndnoteToFootnoteShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro ENDFOOT.WCM to convert endnotes to footnotes in the current document or selected text. ENDFOOT.WCM must already be installed.
Syntax
EndnoteToFootnoteShippingMacro ()
See Also
FootnoteToEndnoteShippingMacro, EndnoteFootnoteConvert
EndOfSentenceSpacing
Purpose
Specify the number of spaces at the end of a sentence.
Syntax
EndOfSentenceSpacing (Type: enumeration)
Parameters
Type
enumeration
DoubleToSingle!
None!
SingleToDouble!
See Also
?EndOfSentenceSpacing
EnterKey
Purpose
Perform an Enter function.
Syntax
EnterKey ()
EnvelopeDlg
Purpose
Display the Envelope dialog box.
Syntax
EnvelopeDlg ()
EquationBaseFontDlg
Purpose
Display the Equation Font dialog box.
Syntax
EquationBaseFontDlg ()
EquationCreate
Purpose
Create an equation box and open the Equation Editor.
Syntax
EquationCreate ()
See Also
Close
EquationPalette
Purpose
Display the Equation Palette in the Equation Editor.
Syntax
EquationPalette (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
See Also
EquationPaletteToggle
EquationPaletteToggle
Purpose
Toggle the Equation Editor palette on and off.
Syntax
EquationPaletteToggle ()
See Also
EquationPalette
EquationRetrieveDlg
Purpose
Display the Retrieve Equation Text dialog box.
Syntax
EquationRetrieveDlg ()
EquationZoomDlg
Purpose
Display the Zoom Equation Display dialog box.
Syntax
EquationZoomDlg ()
ExecScrapBook
Purpose
Run the Scrapbook program. You can then drag images from the Scrapbook and drop them into your document.
Syntax
ExecScrapBook ()
ExitWordPerfect
Purpose
Exit Corel WordPerfect.
Syntax
ExitWordPerfect ()
ExpandAllAbbrevShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro EXPNDALL.WCM to expand all abbreviations in the current document. EXPNDALL.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
ExpandAllAbbrevShippingMacro ()
See Also
AbbreviationExpand
ExpandDlg
Purpose
Display the Expand Master Document dialog box.
Syntax
ExpandDlg ()
FancyPageBorder
Purpose
Specify a Fancy Border for the current page. This command places a Fancy Border code in the current document at the beginning of the paragraph where the insertion point is located.
Syntax
FancyPageBorder (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
See Also
PageBorderDlg, TextBorderCreate
FancyPageBorderInParagraph
Purpose
Return a value indicating whether the current paragraph contains a Fancy Border code. The current paragraph is the paragraph where the insertion point is located. (This command returns 0 if the current paragraph contains a Fancy Border code following the insertion point. Since the Fancy Border code is always inserted at the beginning of the current paragraph when created or edited, this condition could exist only if the code was moved manually.)
Syntax
boolean := FancyPageBorderInParagraph ()
See Also
?PageBorder
FancyPageBorderOccur
Purpose
Return True if Fancy Page Borders are active at the insertion point, False if not. This command will return False if there is no Fancy Border code in the document before the insertion point, even if a Fancy Border code follows the insertion point on the same page.
Syntax
boolean := FancyPageBorderOccur ()
See Also
?PageBorder
FancyPageBorderOff
Purpose
Turn off Fancy Page Borders. This command inserts a Fancy Border End code at the insertion point. If the insertion point is located following the Fancy Border definition code and on the same page, rather than inserting a Fancy Border End code, the Fancy Border definition code is removed.
Syntax
FancyPageBorderOff ()
FigurePaletteDlg
Purpose
Display the Image Tools palette in order to edit an image.
Syntax
FigurePaletteDlg ()
See Also
FigurePaletteDlgEnd
FigurePaletteDlgEnd
Purpose
Close the Image Tools palette.
Syntax
FigurePaletteDlgEnd ()
See Also
FigurePaletteDlg
FigureRetrieveDlg
Purpose
Display the Insert Image dialog box.
Syntax
FigureRetrieveDlg ()
FileChangeAttributes
Purpose
Rename a file and specify a file type.
Syntax
FileChangeAttributes (Filename: string; {Attributes: enumeration; })
Parameters
Filename
string
Attributes
enumeration (optional)
Archive!
Hidden!
Normal!
ReadOnly!
System!
FileChangeDir
Purpose
Change the Documents or Graphics Files directory.
Syntax
FileChangeDir (Directory: string)
Parameters
Directory
string
FileCopy
Purpose
Copy a source file to a destination file.
Syntax
FileCopy (SourceFile: string; DestinationFile: string)
Parameters
SourceFile
string
DestinationFile
string
See Also
FileDelete, FileMove
FileDelete
Purpose
Delete a specific file.
Syntax
FileDelete (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string (optional)
See Also
FileCopy, FileMove
FileExists
Purpose
Return whether a specified file exists.
Syntax
FileExists (Variable: variable; Filename: string)
Parameters
Variable
variable True (exists) or False (not exist).
Filename
string
FileInsert
Purpose
Retrieve a file into the current document at the insertion point.
Syntax
FileInsert (Filename: string; AutoDetect: enumeration; InsertIntoDoc: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string (optional)
AutoDetect
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
InsertIntoDoc
enumeration (optional) Display a prompt before a file is inserted. Default: Insert! - insert file without prompt.
Insert!
Prompt!
See Also
FileOpen
FileInsertDlg
Purpose
Display the Insert File dialog box, which allows you to retrieve an existing file.
Syntax
FileInsertDlg ()
FileMove
Purpose
Rename and move a file.
Syntax
FileMove (SourceFile: string; DestinationFile: string)
Parameters
SourceFile
string (optional)
DestinationFile
string (optional) The new filename and/or location.
See Also
FileCopy, FileDelete
FileNew
Purpose
Create a new document based on a new or existing template. If the maximum nine documents are open, the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
FileNew ()
FileOpen
Purpose
Retrieve a specified file into a new document window. If the maximum nine document windows are open, the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
FileOpen (Filename: string; Format: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
Format
enumeration (optional)
|
AmiPro_12! |
OfficeWriter_62! |
|
AmiPro_12A! |
P1EXE! |
|
AmiPro_12B! |
RFT! |
|
AmiPro_20! |
RTF! |
|
AmiPro_30! |
RTFJ! |
|
ANSIDelimitedTextWindows! |
SGML! |
|
ANSIGenericWordProcessor_Windo! |
WaiSing_251! |
|
ANSIText_Windows! |
WindowsWrite! |
|
AreAHangol! |
WordForWindows_10! |
|
Aruga_23! |
WordForWindows_11! |
|
ASCIIStandard! |
WordForWindows_12! |
|
ASCIIStripped! |
WordForWindows_1A! |
|
DelimitedText! |
WordForWindows_20! |
|
DisplayWrite_40! |
WordForWindows_20a! |
|
DisplayWrite_42! |
WordForWindows_20b! |
|
DisplayWrite_50! |
WordForWindows_20c! |
|
Excel_40! |
WordForWindows_50! |
|
FFT! |
WordForWindows_60! |
|
Hana! |
WordPerfect_42! |
|
HTML! |
WordPerfect_50! |
|
Ichitaro_3x! |
WordPerfect_51! |
|
Ichitaro_4x! |
WordPerfect_5xA! |
|
Ichitaro_5x! |
WordPerfect_60! |
|
Kermit_7bit_Transfer! |
WordPerfect_7! |
|
Matu_4! |
WordStar_33! |
|
Matu_5! |
WordStar_331! |
|
Matu_6! |
WordStar_34! |
|
MicroSoftWord_40! |
WordStar_40! |
|
MicroSoftWord_50! |
WordStar_50! |
|
MicroSoftWord_55! |
WordStar_55! |
|
MultiMate_33! |
WordStar_60! |
|
MultiMate_40! |
WordStar2000_10! |
|
MultiMateAdvantage_36! |
WordStar2000_20! |
|
MultiMateAdvantageII_10! |
WordStar2000_30! |
|
NavyDIF! |
WPS_Chinese! |
|
OfficeWriter_60! |
XyWriteIIIPlus_355! |
|
OfficeWriter_61! |
XyWriteIIIPlus_356! |
|
OfficeWriter_611! |
See Also
Close, FileOpenDlg, LastOpenedAdd
FileOpenDlg
Purpose
Display the Open File dialog box.
Syntax
FileOpenDlg ()
See Also
FileOpen
FileRemoveDirectory
Purpose
Remove a directory.
Syntax
FileRemoveDirectory (Directory: string)
Parameters
Directory
string
FileSave
Purpose
Save the current file or display the Save As dialog box for a new document.
Syntax
FileSave (Filename: string; ExportType: enumeration; Overwrite: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string (optional)
ExportType
enumeration (optional)
|
AmiPro_12! |
OfficeWriter_611! |
|
AmiPro_12A! |
OfficeWriter_62! |
|
AmiPro_12B! |
P1EXE! |
|
AmiPro_20! |
RFT! |
|
AmiPro_30! |
RTF! |
|
ANSIDelimitedTextWindows! |
RTFJ! |
|
ANSIGeneratedWordProcessor_Win! |
SGML! |
|
ANSIText_Windows! |
WaiSing_251! |
|
AreAHangol! |
WindowsWrite! |
|
Aruga_23! |
WordForWindows_10! |
|
ASCIIStandard! |
WordForWindows_11! |
|
ASCIIStripped! |
WordForWindows_12! |
|
DelimitedText! |
WordForWindows_1A! |
|
DisplayWrite_40! |
WordForWindows_20! |
|
DisplayWrite_42! |
WordForWindows_20a! |
|
DisplayWrite_50! |
WordForWindows_20b! |
|
EDGAR! |
WordForWindows_20c! |
|
Excel_40! |
WordForWindows_50! |
|
FFT! |
WordForWindows_60! |
|
Hana! |
WordPerfect_42! |
|
HTML! |
WordPerfect_50! |
|
Ichitaro_3x! |
WordPerfect_51! |
|
Ichitaro_4x! |
WordPerfect_5xA! |
|
Ichitaro_5x! |
WordPerfect_60! |
|
Kermit_7bit_Transfer! |
WordPerfect_7! |
|
Matu_4! |
WordStar_33! |
|
Matu_5! |
WordStar_331! |
|
Matu_6! |
WordStar_34! |
|
MicroSoftWord_40! |
WordStar_40! |
|
MicroSoftWord_50! |
WordStar_50! |
|
MicroSoftWord_55! |
WordStar_55! |
|
MultiMate_33! |
WordStar_60! |
|
MultiMate_40! |
WordStar2000_10! |
|
MultiMateAdvantage_36! |
WordStar2000_20! |
|
MultiMateAdvantageII_10! |
WordStar2000_30! |
|
NavyDIF! |
WPS_Chinese! |
|
OfficeWriter_60! |
XyWriteIIIPlus_355! |
|
OfficeWriter_61! |
XyWriteIIIPlus_356! |
Overwrite
enumeration (optional) Automatically overwrite a file with the same name, or prompt the user to enter a new filename.
No!
Prompt!
Yes!
See Also
FileSaveAsDlg
FileSaveAsDlg
Purpose
Display the Save As dialog box, which allows you to save a file.
Syntax
FileSaveAsDlg ()
See Also
FileSave
FileStampShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro FILESTMP.WCM to display the File Stamp Options dialog box. The dialog box allows you to insert the path and filename of a document in a header or footer. FILESTMP.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
FileStampShippingMacro ()
FillColors
Purpose
Specify a fill color for boxes and tables. Precede with commands such as BoxFill, FillStyleCreate, or TableBorderEditBegin and end with commands such as BoxUpdateDisplay and BoxEnd, FillStyleEnd, or TableBorderEditEnd.
Syntax
FillColors (ForeColorName: string; ForeRed: numeric; ForeGreen: numeric; ForeBlue: numeric; ForeShade: numeric; BackColorName: string; BackRed: numeric; BackGreen: numeric; BackBlue: numeric; BackShade: numeric)
Parameters
ForeColorName
string (optional)
ForeRed
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
ForeGreen
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
ForeBlue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
ForeShade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
BackColorName
string (optional)
BackRed
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
BackGreen
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
BackBlue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
BackShade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
See Also
BoxFill, BoxUpdateDisplay, FillSetGradient, FillSetWPG2, FillStyleCreate, FillStyleEnd, TableSecondFillColors
FillSetGradient
Purpose
Customize a gradient fill. Precede with FillStyleCreate or FillStyleEdit and end with FillStyleEnd.
Syntax
FillSetGradient (Gradient: enumeration; Angle: numeric; XLocation: numeric; YLocation: numeric; Calculate: numeric; State: enumeration)
Parameters
Gradient
enumeration
LinearGradient!
RadialGradient!
RectangularGradient!
Angle
numeric (optional)
XLocation
numeric (optional) The percentage of horizontal offset. A 10% offset places the center of the gradient effect toward the left edge; 50% centers it horizontally.
YLocation
numeric (optional) The percentage of vertical offset. A 10% offset places the center of the gradient effect toward the top edge; 50% centers it vertically.
Calculate
numeric (optional) The number of steps to create a gradient. Default: 30. Both maximum (999) and minimum (1) produce a solid appearance. The optimum is approximately 120.
State
enumeration (optional) Turn the gradient fill on or off.
No!
Yes!
See Also
?FillGradientType, FillColors, FillStyleCreate, FillStyleDelete, FillStyleEdit, FillStyleEnd
FillSetWPG2
Purpose
Specify a pattern set and a pattern from the set. Precede with commands such as BoxFill, FillStyleCreate, or TableBorderEditBegin and end with commands such as BoxUpdateDisplay, FillStyleEnd, or TableBorderEditEnd.
Syntax
FillSetWPG2 (PatternSet: numeric; Index: enumeration)
Parameters
PatternSet
numeric Only 0 is available.
Index
enumeration Specify a pattern.
|
WPG2_12Gray! |
WPG2_Honeycomb! |
|
WPG2_25Gray! |
WPG2_Lines1! |
|
WPG2_50Gray! |
WPG2_Lines2! |
|
WPG2_Arch! |
WPG2_Lines3! |
|
WPG2_Balls! |
WPG2_Lines4! |
|
WPG2_Bricks1! |
WPG2_Lines5! |
|
WPG2_Bricks2! |
WPG2_Lines6! |
|
WPG2_Chainlink! |
WPG2_Lines7! |
|
WPG2_Checkboard1! |
WPG2_Lines8! |
|
WPG2_Checkboard2! |
WPG2_Mesh! |
|
WPG2_Crosses! |
WPG2_Patio! |
|
WPG2_Crosshatch1! |
WPG2_Plaid! |
|
WPG2_Crosshatch2! |
WPG2_Solid! |
|
WPG2_Crosshatch3! |
WPG2_Triangles! |
|
WPG2_Crosshatch4! |
WPG2_Waves! |
|
WPG2_Fishscale! |
WPG2_Weave! |
See Also
?FillWPG2Pattern, FillColors, FillStyleCreate, FillStyleEdit
FillStyleCopy
Purpose
Copy a fill style.
Syntax
FillStyleCopy (StyleName: any; FromLibrary: enumeration; ToLibrary: enumeration; DestName: string)
Parameters
StyleName
any
|
Fill10! |
Fill60! |
|
Fill100! |
Fill70! |
|
Fill20! |
Fill80! |
|
Fill30! |
Fill90! |
|
Fill40! |
FillButton! |
|
Fill5! |
NoFill! |
|
Fill50! |
FromLibrary
enumeration
CurrentDocument!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
ToLibrary
enumeration
CurrentDocument!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
DestName
string (optional) Rename a copied fill style.
See Also
FillStyleCreate, FillStyleDelete, FillStyleEdit
FillStyleCreate
Purpose
Create a fill style.
Syntax
FillStyleCreate (TemplateName: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
TemplateName
string
Library
enumeration
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
FillColors, FillSetGradient, FillSetWPG2, FillStyleCopy, FillStyleDelete, FillStyleEdit, FillStyleEnd
FillStyleDelete
Purpose
Delete a fill style.
Syntax
FillStyleDelete (StyleName: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
StyleName
any
|
Fill10! |
Fill60! |
|
Fill100! |
Fill70! |
|
Fill20! |
Fill80! |
|
Fill30! |
Fill90! |
|
Fill40! |
FillButton! |
|
Fill5! |
NoFill! |
|
Fill50! |
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
FillStyleCopy, FillStyleCreate, FillStyleEdit
FillStyleEdit
Purpose
Begin a FillStyleEdit-FillStyleEnd statement.
Syntax
FillStyleEdit (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any
|
Fill10! |
Fill60! |
|
Fill100! |
Fill70! |
|
Fill20! |
Fill80! |
|
Fill30! |
Fill90! |
|
Fill40! |
FillButton! |
|
Fill5! |
NoFill! |
|
Fill50! |
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
?Fill, FillStyleCreate, FillStyleEnd
FillStyleEnd
Purpose
Save or cancel changes to a fill style.
Syntax
FillStyleEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
See Also
FillStyleCreate, FillStyleEdit
FillStyleName
Purpose
Name a user-created fill style. Precede with FillStyleEdit and end with FillStyleEnd.
Syntax
FillStyleName (FillName: string)
Parameters
FillName
string
FillStyleRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve all fill graphics styles from the specified document or template and add to the specified style list.
Syntax
FillStyleRetrieve (Filename: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string The path and filename of a document or template containing the styles to retrieve.
Library
enumeration The destination for the retrieved styles. Use CurrentDoc! to add the styles to the current document style list. Use PersonalLibrary! to add the styles to the default template style list. Use SharedLibrary! to add the styles to the additional objects template style list. If an additional objects template is not specified in Files Settings, and SharedLibrary! is used here, the command does nothing.
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
FillStyleSave
FillStyleSave
Purpose
Save a fill style.
Syntax
FillStyleSave (Filename: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
Library
enumeration
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
FillStyleRetrieve
FindDlg
Purpose
Display the Find and Replace Text dialog box.
Syntax
FindDlg ()
See Also
ReplaceDlg
FirstLineIndent
Purpose
Specify the distance between the left margin and the first word of indented text.
Syntax
FirstLineIndent (Width: measurement)
Parameters
Width
measurement
FloatingCellBegin
Purpose
Move the insertion point in a floating cell to the beginning of the cell.
Syntax
FloatingCellBegin ()
See Also
FloatingCellEnd
FloatingCellCreate
Purpose
Create a floating cell.
Syntax
FloatingCellCreate ()
See Also
FloatingCellEdit, FloatingCellEnd, FloatingCellNumberFormat
FloatingCellEdit
Purpose
Search backward for a floating cell and move the insertion point to the beginning of the first one found. If not found searching backward, the search continues from the insertion point forward.
Syntax
FloatingCellEdit ()
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellFormula, FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency, FloatingCellNumberDateFormat, FloatingCellNumberDecDigits, FloatingCellNumberFormat, FloatingCellNumberNegNumber, FloatingCellNumberRound, FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency, FloatingCellNumberUseCommas, FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency
FloatingCellEnd
Purpose
Move the insertion point in a floating cell to the end of the cell.
Syntax
FloatingCellEnd ()
See Also
FloatingCellBegin
FloatingCellFormula
Purpose
Specify a floating cell formula. Precede with FloatingCellCreate or FloatingCellEdit.
Syntax
FloatingCellFormula (Formula: string)
Parameters
Formula
string
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellEdit
FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency
Purpose
Align the currency symbols in a floating cell. Precede with FloatingCellCreate or FloatingCellEdit.
Syntax
FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency (Align: enumeration)
Parameters
Align
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellEdit, FloatingCellNumberFormat, FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency, FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency
FloatingCellNumberDateFormat
Purpose
Specify a floating cell date format.
Syntax
FloatingCellNumberDateFormat (Format: numeric)
Parameters
Format
numeric 1 March 5, 1993
|
2 3/5/93 |
8 March 5, 1993 (4:18pm) |
|
3 Mar 5, 1993 |
9 1993-03-05 |
|
4 5 March 1993 |
10 3/05 |
|
5 Friday, March 5, 1993 |
11 Mar 05 |
|
6 4:18 pm |
12 04:18:53 (hh:mm:ss) |
|
7 05Mar93 |
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellEdit, FloatingCellNumberFormat
FloatingCellNumberDecDigits
Purpose
Specify the number of digits after the decimal point in a floating cell. The insertion point must be between floating cell codes (Flt Cell).
Syntax
FloatingCellNumberDecDigits (Number: numeric)
Parameters
Number
numeric
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellEdit, FloatingCellNumberFormat, FloatingCellNumberRound
FloatingCellNumberFormat
Purpose
Specify a number type for floating cells.
Syntax
FloatingCellNumberFormat (CellNumType: enumeration)
Parameters
CellNumType
enumeration
|
Accounting! |
General! |
|
Commas! |
Integer! |
|
Currency! |
Percent! |
|
DateFormat! |
Scientific! |
|
Fixed2! |
TextOnly! |
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellEdit, FloatingCellNumberDecDigits, FloatingCellNumberNegNumber, FloatingCellNumberRound, FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency, FloatingCellNumberUseCommas, FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency
FloatingCellNumberNegNumber
Purpose
Specify how to display negative numbers in a floating cell.
Syntax
FloatingCellNumberNegNumber (NegDisplay: enumeration)
Parameters
NegDisplay
enumeration
CRDR!
Minus!
Parentheses!
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellEdit, FloatingCellNumberFormat
FloatingCellNumberRound
Purpose
Round numbers for calculation in a floating cell.
Syntax
FloatingCellNumberRound (Round: enumeration)
Parameters
Round
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellEdit, FloatingCellNumberDecDigits, FloatingCellNumberFormat
FloatingCellNumberUseCommas
Purpose
Use commas in floating cell numbers.
Syntax
FloatingCellNumberUseCommas (Commas: enumeration)
Parameters
Commas
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellEdit, FloatingCellNumberFormat
FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency
Purpose
Use currency symbols in a floating cell.
Syntax
FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency (Currency: enumeration)
Parameters
Currency
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellEdit, FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency, FloatingCellNumberFormat, FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency
FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency
Purpose
Specify a currency symbol for floating cells.
Syntax
FloatingCellNumSelectCurrency (IntlCurrency: enumeration)
Parameters
IntlCurrency
enumeration
|
Austria! |
Israel! |
|
Belgium! |
Italy! |
|
BelgiumFrench! |
Japan! |
|
Brazil! |
Korea! |
|
Canada! |
Netherlands! |
|
China! |
Norway! |
|
Croatia! |
NorwayIntl! |
|
CzechRepublic! |
Paraguay! |
|
DefaultCurrency! |
Peseta! |
|
Denmark! |
Peso! |
|
Dollar! |
Poland! |
|
Ecuador! |
Portugal! |
|
ElSalvador! |
Ruble! |
|
Finland! |
RussianRuble! |
|
FinlandIntl! |
Singapore! |
|
France! |
SlovakRepublic! |
|
FrenchCanada! |
Slovenia! |
|
Germany! |
SouthAfrica! |
|
Greece! |
Sweden! |
|
Guatemala! |
Switzerland! |
|
Honduras! |
Taiwan! |
|
HongKong! |
Turkey! |
|
Hungary! |
UnitedKingdom! |
|
Iceland! |
Venezuela! |
See Also
FloatingCellCreate, FloatingCellEdit, FloatingCellNumAlignCurrency, FloatingCellNumberFormat, FloatingCellNumberUseCurrency
FlushRight
Purpose
Align text at the right margin.
Syntax
FlushRight ()
See Also
FlushRightWithDotLeaders
FlushRightWithDotLeaders
Purpose
Right justify a line of text with dot leaders.
Syntax
FlushRightWithDotLeaders ()
See Also
FlushRight
Font
Purpose
Specify font options.
Syntax
Font (Name: string; Family: enumeration; Attributes: enumeration; Weight: enumeration; Width: enumeration; Source: enumeration; Type: enumeration; CharacterSet: enumeration)
Parameters
Name
string
Family
enumeration (optional)
|
FamilyAestheticOrnamented! |
FamilyITCZapfDingbats! |
|
FamilyAlbertus! |
FamilyLetterGothic! |
|
FamilyBodon! |
FamilyMadrone! |
|
FamilyBroadway! |
FamilyMicrostyle! |
|
FamilyBrush! |
FamilyOldEnglish! |
|
FamilyCenturySchoolbook! |
FamilyOptima! |
|
FamilyComputer! |
FamilyParkAvenue! |
|
FamilyCourier! |
FamilyPonderosa! |
|
FamilyHelvetica! |
FamilyPTBarnum! |
|
FamilyHobo! |
FamilyRevue! |
|
FamilyITCBenguiat! |
FamilySignetRoundhand! |
|
FamilyITCGaramond! |
FamilyTekton! |
|
FamilyITCLubalinGraph! |
FamilyTimesRoman! |
|
FamilyITCRonda! |
FamilyUncial! |
Attributes
enumeration (optional)
FontMatchItalic!
FontMatchNormal!
FontMatchOutline!
FontMatchShadow!
FontMatchSmallCaps!
Weight
enumeration (optional)
|
WeightBlack! |
WeightMaximum! |
|
WeightBold! |
WeightMedium! |
|
WeightBook! |
WeightRegular! |
|
WeightDemiBold! |
WeightRoman! |
|
WeightDemiLight! |
WeightSemiBold! |
|
WeightExtraBlack! |
WeightSemiLight! |
|
WeightExtraBold! |
WeightThin! |
|
WeightExtraHeavy! |
WeightUltraBlack! |
|
WeightExtraLight! |
WeightUltraHeavy! |
|
WeightExtraThin! |
WeightUltraLight! |
|
WeightHeavy! |
WeightUltraThin! |
|
WeightLight! |
WeightUnknown! |
Width
enumeration (optional)
|
WidthCompressed! |
WidthSemiCondensed! |
|
WidthCondensed! |
WidthSemiExpanded! |
|
WidthDoubleWide! |
WidthTripleWide! |
|
WidthExpanded! |
WidthUltraCompressed! |
|
WidthExtraCondensed! |
WidthUltraCondensed! |
|
WidthExtraExpanded! |
WidthUltraExpanded! |
|
WidthNormal! |
WidthUnknown! |
Source
enumeration (optional)
DRSFile!
PRSFile!
Type
enumeration (optional)
|
Intellifont! |
TrueType! |
|
Speedo! |
Type1! |
CharacterSet
enumeration (optional)
|
FontMatchArabic! |
FontMatchJapaneseKana! |
|
FontMatchArabicScript! |
FontMatchMath! |
|
FontMatchASCII! |
FontMatchMathExtension! |
|
FontMatchBoxDrawing! |
FontMatchMultinational1! |
|
FontMatchCyrillic! |
FontMatchMultinational2! |
|
FontMatchGreek! |
FontMatchTypographicSymbols! |
|
FontMatchHebrew! |
FontMatchUserDefined! |
|
FontMatchIconicSymbols! |
See Also
QuickFontEx
FontDlg
Purpose
Display the Font dialog box.
Syntax
FontDlg ()
See Also
Font
FontDnShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro FONTDN.WCM to reduce the font size of the selected text by two points. FONTDN.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
FontDnShippingMacro ()
FontDoubleUnderlineToggle
Purpose
Toggle Double Underline at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeAppearanceToggle.
Syntax
FontDoubleUnderlineToggle ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceToggle
FontExtraLargeToggle
Purpose
Toggle Extra Large at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeRelativeSizeToggle.
Syntax
FontExtraLargeToggle ()
See Also
AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
FontFineToggle
Purpose
Toggle Fine at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeRelativeSizeToggle.
Syntax
FontFineToggle ()
See Also
AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
FontHiddenToggle
Purpose
Toggle Hidden at the insertion point.
Syntax
FontHiddenToggle ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceToggle
FontItalicToggle
Purpose
Toggle Italic at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeAppearanceToggle.
Syntax
FontItalicToggle ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceToggle
FontLargeToggle
Purpose
Toggle Large at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeRelativeSizeToggle.
Syntax
FontLargeToggle ()
See Also
AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
FontOutlineToggle
Purpose
Toggle the Outline font attribute at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeAppearanceToggle.
Syntax
FontOutlineToggle ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceToggle
FontRedlineToggle
Purpose
Toggle Redline at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeAppearanceToggle.
Syntax
FontRedlineToggle ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceToggle
FontShadowToggle
Purpose
Toggle Shadow at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeAppearanceToggle.
Syntax
FontShadowToggle ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceToggle
FontSize
Purpose
Specify the size of a selected font at the insertion point.
Syntax
FontSize (FontSize: measurement)
Parameters
FontSize
measurement
See Also
Font
FontSmallCapsToggle
Purpose
Toggle Small Caps at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeAppearanceToggle.
Syntax
FontSmallCapsToggle ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceToggle
FontSmallToggle
Purpose
Toggle Small at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeRelativeSizeToggle.
Syntax
FontSmallToggle ()
See Also
AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
FontStrikeoutToggle
Purpose
Toggle Strikeout at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeAppearanceToggle.
Syntax
FontStrikeoutToggle ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceToggle
FontSubscriptToggle
Purpose
Toggle Subscript at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributePositionToggle.
Syntax
FontSubscriptToggle ()
See Also
AttributePositionToggle
FontSuperscriptToggle
Purpose
Toggle Superscript at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributePositionToggle.
Syntax
FontSuperscriptToggle ()
See Also
AttributePositionToggle
FontUnderlineToggle
Purpose
Toggle Underline at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeAppearanceToggle.
Syntax
FontUnderlineToggle ()
See Also
AttributeAppearanceToggle
FontUpShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro FONTUP.WCM to increase the font size of the selected text by two points. FONTUP.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
FontUpShippingMacro ()
FontVeryLargeToggle
Purpose
Toggle Very Large at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: AttributeRelativeSizeToggle.
Syntax
FontVeryLargeToggle ()
See Also
AttributeRelativeSizeToggle
FooterA
Purpose
Create, edit, or discontinue Footer A, and specify footer position.
Syntax
FooterA (Action: enumeration; Occurrence: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
Create!
Edit!
Off!
Occurrence
enumeration (optional)
AllPages!
EvenPages!
NoPages!
OddPages!
See Also
?FooterAOccur, NewHFWOccurrence
FooterB
Purpose
Create, edit, or discontinue Footer B, and specify footer position.
Syntax
FooterB (Action: enumeration; Occurrence: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
Create!
Edit!
Off!
Occurrence
enumeration (optional)
AllPages!
EvenPages!
NoPages!
OddPages!
See Also
?FooterBOccur, NewHFWOccurrence
FooterSeparationDistance
Purpose
Specify the distance between text and footers.
Syntax
FooterSeparationDistance (Distance: measurement)
Parameters
Distance
measurement Default: .167".
FootnoteContinuedMessage
Purpose
Print “(continued...)” when a footnote continues on the next page.
Syntax
FootnoteContinuedMessage (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
FootnoteOptionsDlg
FootnoteCreate
Purpose
Open a footnote window, in order to create a footnote. Subsequent commands insert text and codes. SubstructureExit closes the window and places a reference to the footnote at the insertion point.
Syntax
FootnoteCreate ()
See Also
Close
FootnoteEdit
Purpose
Open a specified footnote window in order to edit the footnote. Subsequent commands apply to the footnote window until SubstructureExit.
Syntax
FootnoteEdit (FootnoteNumber: string)
Parameters
FootnoteNumber
string (optional) Footnotes can be numbered with arabic numerals, roman numerals, or letters.
See Also
Close, FootnoteEditDlg
FootnoteEditDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Footnote dialog box.
Syntax
FootnoteEditDlg ()
See Also
FootnoteEdit
FootnoteEndnoteDlg
Purpose
Display the Footnote/Endnote dialog box.
Syntax
FootnoteEndnoteDlg ()
FootnoteMinimum
Purpose
Specify the amount of footnote text to keep together on a page.
Syntax
FootnoteMinimum (Width: measurement)
Parameters
Width
measurement
See Also
FootnoteOptions
FootnoteNewNumber
Purpose
Specify a new footnote number and increment subsequent footnotes from that number.
Syntax
FootnoteNewNumber (FootnoteNumber: string)
Parameters
FootnoteNumber
string
See Also
FootnoteNewNumberDlg
FootnoteNewNumberDlg
Purpose
Display the Footnote Number dialog box.
Syntax
FootnoteNewNumberDlg ()
FootnoteNumberDecrement
Purpose
Decrease the last footnote number by one.
Syntax
FootnoteNumberDecrement ()
See Also
FootnoteNumberIncrement
FootnoteNumberDisplay
Purpose
Insert the current footnote number at the insertion point.
Syntax
FootnoteNumberDisplay ()
See Also
FootnoteNewNumber
FootnoteNumberIncrement
Purpose
Increase the last footnote number by one.
Syntax
FootnoteNumberIncrement ()
See Also
FootnoteNumberDecrement
FootnoteNumberMethod
Purpose
Specify a footnote numbering method. Recordable substitute: FootnoteOptions.
Syntax
FootnoteNumberMethod (NumberingMethod: enumeration; Character: string)
Parameters
NumberingMethod
enumeration
|
Characters! |
Numbers! |
|
LowerLetters! |
UpperLetters! |
|
LowerRoman! |
UpperRoman! |
Character
string (optional) Use up to five characters when the numbering method is Characters!.
FootnoteOptions
Purpose
Specify the footnote options from the insertion point forward.
Syntax
FootnoteOptions (NumberingMethod: enumeration; Characters: string; BetweenSpacing: measurement; MinimumHeight: measurement; Restart: enumeration; PrintContinued: enumeration; FootnotePosition: enumeration; Separator: enumeration)
Parameters
NumberingMethod
enumeration (optional)
|
Characters! |
Numbers! |
|
LowerLetters! |
UpperLetters! |
|
LowerRoman! |
UpperRoman! |
Characters
string (optional) Use up to five characters when the numbering method is Characters!.
BetweenSpacing
measurement (optional)
MinimumHeight
measurement (optional) How much of a footnote to keep together on a page.
Restart
enumeration (optional) Restart the footnote numbers on every page.
Off!
On!
PrintContinued
enumeration (optional) Print “(continued)...” on the last footnote line of the first page and “...(continued)” on the first footnote line of the next page.
No!
Yes!
FootnotePosition
enumeration (optional)
AfterText!
BottomOfPage!
Separator
enumeration (optional)
MarginToMargin!
NoLine!
ShortLine!
See Also
FootnoteOptionsDlg
FootnoteOptionsDlg
Purpose
Display the Advanced Footnote Options dialog box.
Syntax
FootnoteOptionsDlg ()
See Also
FootnoteOptions
FootnotePosition
Purpose
Print footnotes at the bottom of the page or just below the last line of text. Recordable substitute: FootnoteOptions.
Syntax
FootnotePosition (Position: enumeration)
Parameters
Position
enumeration
AfterText!
BottomOfPage!
FootnoteRestartEachPage
Purpose
Restart the footnote numbering on each page. Recordable substitute: FootnoteOptions.
Syntax
FootnoteRestartEachPage (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
FootnoteSeparatorLine
Purpose
Specify a separator line between text and footnotes.
Syntax
FootnoteSeparatorLine (Style: any; SpaceAboveLine: measurement; SpaceBelowLine: measurement; Alignment: enumeration; Width: measurement; Position: measurement)
Parameters
Style
any
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
SpaceAboveLine
measurement The space between the separator line and the last line of text.
SpaceBelowLine
measurement The space between the separator line and the first footnote.
Alignment
enumeration
Center!
Full!
Left!
Right!
SetPosition!
Width
measurement (optional) The separator line width.
Position
measurement (optional) The distance of a separator line from the left edge of the page.
See Also
FootnoteOptionsDlg
FootnoteSpaceBetween
Purpose
Specify the amount of blank space between footnotes.
Syntax
FootnoteSpaceBetween (Space: measurement)
Parameters
Space
measurement Default: .167".
See Also
FootnoteOptionsDlg
FootnoteToEndnoteShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro FOOTEND.WCM, which converts footnotes to endnotes in the current document or selected text. FOOTEND.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
FootnoteToEndnoteShippingMacro ()
See Also
EndnoteToFootnoteShippingMacro, EndnoteFootnoteConvert
ForcePage
Purpose
Force a page break or specify that a certain page always has an odd or even number.
Syntax
ForcePage (EvenOddNew: enumeration)
Parameters
EvenOddNew
enumeration
Even!
New!
Odd!
ForcePageDlg
Purpose
Display the Force Page dialog box.
Syntax
ForcePageDlg ()
FormatMarginsDlg
Purpose
Display the Margins dialog box.
Syntax
FormatMarginsDlg ()
GenerateDlg
Purpose
Display the Generate dialog box.
Syntax
GenerateDlg ()
GenerateDoc
Purpose
Generate indexes, tables of contents, lists, cross references, tables of authorities, and master documents.
Syntax
GenerateDoc (SaveSubDocs: enumeration; UndoAction: enumeration; Hypertext: enumeration)
Parameters
SaveSubDocs
enumeration (optional) Save the subdocuments in a master document. Required only to generate a master document.
DontSave!
Save!
UndoAction
enumeration (optional) Required only to generate a master document.
NoUndo!
Undo!
Hypertext
enumeration (optional)
CreateHypertext!
See Also
GenerateDlg
GetAcceleratorText
Purpose
Assign the accelerator text of a macro command to a variable. When a command is mapped to a keystroke, the accelerator text represents the keystroke.
Syntax
GetAcceleratorText (Variable: variable; Token: command name)
Parameters
Variable
variable
Token
command name
See Also
GetData
GetData
Purpose
Assign information to a variable about the state of Corel WordPerfect or a Corel WordPerfect document. The macro uses the variable with other commands to retrieve information or to determine whether to perform specified actions.
Syntax
GetData (Variable: variable; Group: enumeration; Item: enumeration; Template: enumeration; ItemNum: any)
Parameters
Variable
variable
Group
enumeration The group a variable belongs to. Summary! extracts data from the document summary by order of entry. SummaryTag! extracts data from the document summary by field tab number.
|
Abbreviation! |
QuickWords! |
|
Bookmark! |
ReplaceString! |
|
Font! |
Styles! |
|
ODMA! |
Summary! |
|
OutlineStyles! |
SummaryTag! |
|
PaperSize! |
Table! |
|
Printer! |
TableNames! |
Item
enumeration The item type. For example, Count! returns the number of available fields in the document summary. Name!, Data!, Type!, and Tag! return information from the document summary field specified by the ItemNum parameter.
|
Author! |
Name! |
|
ContentFormat! |
Port! |
|
Count! |
Tag! |
|
Data! |
TitleText! |
|
DMSDefined! |
Type! |
|
DMSInfo! |
Width! |
|
Length! |
Template
enumeration The location of specified items.
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
ItemNum
any (optional) The item number from which the Item parameter gets information. For example, ItemNum can specify a particular document summary field.
|
Abstract! |
Language! |
|
Account! |
MailStop! |
|
Address! |
Matter! |
|
Attachments! |
Office! |
|
Author! |
Owner! |
|
Authorization! |
Project! |
|
BillTo! |
Publisher! |
|
BlindCopy! |
Purpose! |
|
CarbonCopy! |
ReceivedFrom! |
|
Category! |
RecordedBy! |
|
CheckedBy! |
RecordedDate! |
|
Client! |
Reference! |
|
Comments! |
RevisionDate! |
|
CreationDate! |
RevisionNotes! |
|
DateCompleted! |
RevisionNumber! |
|
Department! |
Section! |
|
DescriptiveName! |
Security! |
|
DescriptiveType! |
Source! |
|
Destination! |
Status! |
|
Disposition! |
Subject! |
|
Division! |
TelephoneNumber! |
|
DocumentNumber! |
Typist! |
|
Editor! |
VersionDate! |
|
ForwardTo! |
VersionNotes! |
|
Group! |
VersionNumber! |
|
Keywords! |
GotoDosShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro GOTODOS.WCM to switch to DOS. GOTODOS.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
GotoDosShippingMacro ()
GoToQuickmarkOnOpen
Purpose
Return a value indicating whether Go to Quickmark on file open is selected in the Bookmark dialog box.
Syntax
boolean := GoToQuickmarkOnOpen ()
GraphicBoxStyleDlg
Purpose
Display the Box Style dialog box.
Syntax
GraphicBoxStyleDlg ()
GraphicCreateBox
Purpose
Display the Insert Image dialog box.
Syntax
GraphicCreateBox (BoxStyleName: any)
Parameters
BoxStyleName
any (optional)
See Also
GraphicEditBox
GraphicCreateChart
Purpose
Create a chart with Corel Presentations.
Syntax
GraphicCreateChart ()
GraphicCreateTextArt
Purpose
Start TextArt to create a TextArt image. TextArt allows you to add special effects to text.
Syntax
GraphicCreateTextArt ()
GraphicCustomMenuDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Graphics Menu dialog box.
Syntax
GraphicCustomMenuDlg ()
GraphicEditBox
Purpose
Display the Edit Box dialog box. If the current document contains more than one graphics box and none of them are selected, the Select Box to Edit dialog box displays. Also, if the current document does not contain a graphics box, an invalid function error is returned.
Syntax
GraphicEditBox (BoxNumber: numeric)
Parameters
BoxNumber
numeric (optional)
See Also
GraphicCreateBox
GraphicsBoxCaptionDlg
Purpose
Display the Box Caption dialog box.
Syntax
GraphicsBoxCaptionDlg ()
GraphicsBoxContentDlg
Purpose
Display the Box Content dialog box.
Syntax
GraphicsBoxContentDlg ()
GraphicsBoxFindDlg
Purpose
Display the Select Box to Edit dialog box. The current document must contain at least two boxes.
Syntax
GraphicsBoxFindDlg ()
GraphicsBoxSizeDlg
Purpose
Display the Box Size dialog box.
Syntax
GraphicsBoxSizeDlg ()
GraphicsFigureEditAllDlg
Purpose
Display the Image Settings dialog box.
Syntax
GraphicsFigureEditAllDlg ()
GraphicsLineColor
Purpose
Specify the color of a graphics line.
Syntax
GraphicsLineColor (ColorName: string; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; Shade: numeric)
Parameters
ColorName
string (optional) This parameter has been left in for backward compatability with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect. To specify a color in Corel WordPerfect 8, use the Red, Green, and Blue parameters.
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Shade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0 to 100.
See Also
?GraphicsLineColorBlue, ?GraphicsLineColorGreen, ?GraphicsLineColorRed, ?GraphicsLineColorShading, GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEnd
GraphicsLineCreate
Purpose
Create a graphics line.
Syntax
GraphicsLineCreate (LineType: enumeration)
Parameters
LineType
enumeration (optional)
HorizontalLine!
VerticalLine!
See Also
GraphicsLineDelete, GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEnd, HLineCreate, LineCreateDlg, VLineCreate
GraphicsLineDelete
Purpose
Delete a graphics line.
Syntax
GraphicsLineDelete (Line: numeric)
Parameters
Line
numeric
See Also
GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEnd
GraphicsLineEdit
Purpose
Specify a graphics line to edit.
Syntax
GraphicsLineEdit (Line: numeric)
Parameters
Line
numeric
See Also
GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineDelete, GraphicsLineEditNext, GraphicsLineEditPrevious, GraphicsLineEnd, LineEditDlg
GraphicsLineEditNext
Purpose
Begin editing of the next graphics line.
Syntax
GraphicsLineEditNext (LineType: enumeration)
Parameters
LineType
enumeration (optional)
HorizontalLine!
VerticalLine!
See Also
GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEditPrevious, GraphicsLineEnd
GraphicsLineEditPrevious
Purpose
Begin editing of the previous graphics line.
Syntax
GraphicsLineEditPrevious (LineType: enumeration)
Parameters
LineType
enumeration (optional)
HorizontalLine!
VerticalLine!
See Also
GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEditNext, GraphicsLineEnd
GraphicsLineEnd
Purpose
Save or cancel changes made to a graphics line.
Syntax
GraphicsLineEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
See Also
GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineDelete, GraphicsLineEdit
GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition
Purpose
Position a graphics line horizontally.
Syntax
GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition (Position: enumeration; AbsPos: measurement; LeftColNum: numeric)
Parameters
Position
enumeration
|
BetweenColumns! |
Left! |
|
Center! |
Right! |
|
FullAlign! |
Set! |
AbsPos
measurement (optional) Exact position on a page for a graphics line. Use if Position parameter is Set!.
LeftColNum
numeric (optional) The column to the left of a graphics line. Use if the Position parameter is BetweenColumns!.
See Also
?GraphicsLineHorizontalAlign, ?GraphicsLineHorizontalColumn, ?GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition, GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEdit
GraphicsLineLength
Purpose
Specify the length of graphics lines. The horizontal or vertical position of the graphics line may not be set to Full in the Create Graphics Line (or Edit Graphics Line) dialog box. Precede with GraphicsLineCreate or GraphicsLineEdit and follow with GraphicsLineEnd.
Syntax
GraphicsLineLength (Length: measurement)
Parameters
Length
measurement
See Also
?GraphicsLineLength, GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEnd
GraphicsLineSpacing
Purpose
Specify the amount of white space between a graphics line and text. Precede with GraphicsLineCreate or GraphicsLineEdit and follow with GraphicsLineEnd.
Syntax
GraphicsLineSpacing (TopSpace: measurement; BottomSpace: measurement)
Parameters
TopSpace
measurement The space above a horizontal graphics line or to the left of a vertical graphics line between the line and text.
BottomSpace
measurement (optional) The space below a horizontal graphics line or to the right of a vertical graphics line between the line and text. Default: amount entered for the TopSpace parameter.
See Also
?GraphicsLineBottomSpacing, ?GraphicsLineTopSpacing, GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEnd
GraphicsLineStyle
Purpose
Specify a graphics line style. Precede with GraphicsLineCreate or GraphicsLineEdit and follow with GraphicsLineEnd.
Syntax
GraphicsLineStyle (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any Enclose custom styles in quotation marks.
|
ButtonBottomRight! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeft! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
See Also
?GraphicsLineStyle, GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEnd
GraphicsLineThickness
Purpose
Specify the thickness of a graphics line. Precede with GraphicsLineCreate or GraphicsLineEdit and follow with GraphicsLineEnd.
Syntax
GraphicsLineThickness (Thickness: any)
Parameters
Thickness
any Specify the thickness of a graphics line.
See Also
?GraphicsLineThickness, GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEnd
GraphicsLineType
Purpose
Specify whether a graphics line is horizontal or vertical.
Syntax
GraphicsLineType (LineType: enumeration)
Parameters
LineType
enumeration
Horizontal!
Vertical!
See Also
?GraphicsLineType, GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEnd
GraphicsLineUpdateDisplay
Purpose
Update a graphics line display after editing.
Syntax
GraphicsLineUpdateDisplay (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
GraphicsLineUseColor
Purpose
Select or deselect the default line style color for a graphics line. Precede with GraphicsLineCreate or GraphicsLineEdit and follow with GraphicsLineEnd.
Syntax
GraphicsLineUseColor (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?GraphicsLineUseColor, GraphicsLineColor, GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEnd
GraphicsLineVerticalPosition
Purpose
Specify the vertical position of a graphics line.
Syntax
GraphicsLineVerticalPosition (Position: enumeration; Where: measurement)
Parameters
Position
enumeration
|
Baseline! |
FullAlign! |
|
Bottom! |
Set! |
|
Center! |
Top! |
Where
measurement (optional) The exact position of a graphics line if the Position parameter is Set!.
See Also
?GraphicsLineVerticalAlign, ?GraphicsLineVerticalPosition, GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEnd, GraphicsLineHorizontalPosition
GraphicsStylesDlg
Purpose
Display the Graphics Styles dialog box.
Syntax
GraphicsStylesDlg ()
Guidelines
Purpose
Show or hide guidelines and return the current state. To return the current state without changing any guideline settings, omit the parameters.
Syntax
numeric := Guidelines (ShowTableGuides: enumeration; ShowMarginGuides: enumeration; ShowColumnGuides: enumeration; ShowHeaderFooterGuides: enumeration)
Parameters
ShowTableGuides
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
ShowMarginGuides
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
ShowColumnGuides
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
ShowHeaderFooterGuides
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
GuidelinesDlg
GuidelinesDlg
Purpose
Display the Guidelines dialog box.
Syntax
GuidelinesDlg ()
See Also
Guidelines
HardColumnBreak
Purpose
Insert a hard column break at the insertion point and begin a new column.
Syntax
HardColumnBreak ()
See Also
ColumnsOff
HardPageBreak
Purpose
Insert a hard page break at the insertion point and begin a new page.
Syntax
HardPageBreak ()
See Also
HardPageBreakInsert
HardPageBreakInsert
Purpose
Insert a page break in columns without positioning the insertion point in the next column.
Syntax
HardPageBreakInsert ()
See Also
HardPageBreak
HardPageBreakKey
Purpose
Insert a hard page break at the insertion point and begin a new page. Recordable substitute: HardPageBreak.
Syntax
HardPageBreakKey ()
HardReturn
Purpose
Insert a [HRt] code and begin a new line.
Syntax
HardReturn ()
See Also
HardReturnInsert
HardReturnInsert
Purpose
Insert a [HRt] code in Outline mode.
Syntax
HardReturnInsert ()
See Also
HardReturn
HardSpace
Purpose
Insert a [HSpace] code at the insertion point. A hard space holds two words together.
Syntax
HardSpace ()
HeaderA
Purpose
Create, edit, or discontinue Header A, and specify the pages on which it will appear.
Syntax
HeaderA (Action: enumeration; Occurrence: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
Create!
Edit!
Off!
Occurrence
enumeration (optional) The location of Header A.
AllPages!
EvenPages!
NoPages!
OddPages!
See Also
?HeaderAOccur, ?HeaderBOccur
HeaderB
Purpose
Create, edit, or discontinue Header B, and specify the pages on which it will appear.
Syntax
HeaderB (Action: enumeration; Occurrence: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
Create!
Edit!
Off!
Occurrence
enumeration (optional) The location of Header B.
AllPages!
EvenPages!
NoPages!
OddPages!
See Also
?HeaderAOccur, ?HeaderBOccur
HeaderFooterDistanceDlg
Purpose
Display the Distance dialog box.
Syntax
HeaderFooterDistanceDlg ()
HeaderFooterDlg
Purpose
Display the Headers/Footers dialog box.
Syntax
HeaderFooterDlg ()
HeaderFooterNext
Purpose
Advance to the next header/footer.
Syntax
HeaderFooterNext ()
HeaderFooterPlacement
Purpose
Specify the pages on which headers and footers will appear. They can be placed on odd-numbered pages only, even-numbered pages only, or on all pages.
Syntax
HeaderFooterPlacement (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
AllPages!
EvenPages!
NoPages!
OddPages!
HeaderFooterPlacementDlg
Purpose
Display the Pages dialog box.
Syntax
HeaderFooterPlacementDlg ()
See Also
NewHFWOccurrence
HeaderFooterPrev
Purpose
Advance to the next header/footer.
Syntax
HeaderFooterPrev ()
HeaderSeparationDistance
Purpose
Specify the distance between text and headers.
Syntax
HeaderSeparationDistance (Distance: measurement)
Parameters
Distance
measurement If less than 1, precede the decimal with 0.
See Also
?HeaderSeparator
HelpAskThePerfectExpert
Purpose
Display the Ask the PerfectExpert dialog box.
Syntax
HelpAskThePerfectExpert ()
HelpCoachDlg
Purpose
Display the Ask the PerfectExpert dialog box.
Syntax
HelpCoachDlg ()
See Also
HelpShowMe
HelpContents
Purpose
Display the Help Topics window with the Contents tab active.
Syntax
HelpContents ()
HelpFilesPath
Purpose
Return the location of the Corel WordPerfect Help files.
Syntax
string := HelpFilesPath ()
HelpHelpTopics
Purpose
Display the Help Topics window with the last selected tab displayed.
Syntax
HelpHelpTopics ()
HelpHowDoI
Purpose
Display instructions on how to use Help.
Syntax
HelpHowDoI ()
See Also
HelpHowToUseHelp
HelpHowToUseHelp
Purpose
Display instructions on how to use Help.
Syntax
HelpHowToUseHelp ()
See Also
HelpHowDoI
HelpKeystrokes
Purpose
Open Help for keystrokes.
Syntax
HelpKeystrokes ()
See Also
HelpContents, HelpHowToUseHelp
HelpMacroManual
Purpose
Open the Macros Help file.
Syntax
HelpMacroManual ()
See Also
HelpContents, HelpHowToUseHelp
HelpOnlineSupportDlg
Purpose
Display the Help Online dialog box.
Syntax
HelpOnlineSupportDlg ()
See Also
WebLaunchWebBrowser, LaunchOnlineService
HelpSearchForHelpOn
Purpose
Display the Help Topics window with the Index tab active.
Syntax
HelpSearchForHelpOn ()
See Also
HelpHelpTopics
HelpShowMe
Purpose
Display the Ask the PerfectExpert dialog box.
Syntax
HelpShowMe ()
See Also
HelpCoachDlg
HelpWhatIs
Purpose
Activate the Windows What's This feature. (Use PAUSE to pause a macro when it encounters HelpWhatIs.)
Syntax
HelpWhatIs ()
See Also
HelpHowDoI
HiddenText
Purpose
Turn Hidden Text on or off for selected text.
Syntax
HiddenText (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
HiddenTextShowAll
HiddenTextShowAll
Purpose
Display or hide hidden text.
Syntax
HiddenTextShowAll (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?HiddenTextActive, HiddenText
HideBars
Purpose
Display the Hide Bars Information dialog box (unless user-disabled) before hiding scroll bars, toolbars, etc.
Syntax
HideBars (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional) Default: toggle.
Off!
On!
HighlightColor
Purpose
Set the color and shade of the highlighter.
Syntax
HighlightColor (Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; Shade: numeric)
Parameters
Red
numeric Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric Value: 0-255.
Shade
numeric Percent: 0-100.
HighlightColorDlg
Purpose
Display the Highlight Color dialog box.
Syntax
HighlightColorDlg ()
HighlightPrint
Purpose
Toggle highlight printing and display on or off in the current document for the current session. Highlight Print/Show is active by default for all new and just-opened documents.
Syntax
HighlightPrint ()
HighlightRemove
Purpose
Remove highlighting from the selected text and turn off the selection. If select mode is off and the insertion point is between Highlight codes, this command removes the codes and turns off the selection. If select mode is off and the insertion point is not between Highlight codes, this command does nothing. If select mode is on and the selection contains no highlighting, the selection is turned off.
Syntax
HighlightRemove ()
HighlightToggle
Purpose
Toggle highlighting on or off. If text is selected, this command highlights the selected text and turns the selection off. If nothing is selected, highlight mode is turned on or off.
Syntax
HighlightToggle ()
HLineCreate
Purpose
Create a horizontal line. The line will extend from the left margin to the right margin.
Syntax
HLineCreate ()
Hypertext
Purpose
Activate or deactivate all hyperlinks.
Syntax
Hypertext (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Active!
Inactive!
HypertextCreate
Purpose
Create a hyperlink to a find a bookmark, launch a web browser and find a URL, or play a macro, and specify the appearance of the hyperlink.
Syntax
HypertextCreate (Action: enumeration; Macro: string; Bookmark: string; Display: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
GoToBookmark!
RunMacro!
Macro
string (optional) The document filename, web document URL (Internet address), or macro name if the Action parameter is RunMacro!.
Bookmark
string (optional) Bookmark in the current document if the Action parameter is GoToBookmark!.
Display
enumeration (optional)
Button!
HighlightedText!
See Also
HypertextDelete, HypertextEdit, HypertextExecute, HypertextInfo
HypertextCreateDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Hyperlink dialog box.
Syntax
HypertextCreateDlg ()
HypertextDelete
Purpose
Delete the hyperlink that contains the insertion point.
Syntax
HypertextDelete ()
See Also
HypertextCreate, HypertextEdit, HypertextExecute
HypertextEdit
Purpose
Edit a hyperlink.
Syntax
HypertextEdit (Action: enumeration; Macro: string; Bookmark: string; Appearance: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
GoToBookmark!
RunMacro!
Macro
string (optional) The document filename, web document URL (Internet address), or macro name if the Action parameter is RunMacro!.
Bookmark
string (optional) Bookmark in the current document if the Action parameter is GoToBookmark!.
Appearance
enumeration (optional)
Button!
HighlightedText!
See Also
HypertextCreate, HypertextDelete, HypertextExecute
HypertextEditDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Hyperlink dialog box.
Syntax
HypertextEditDlg ()
HypertextExecute
Purpose
Perform a hyperlink.
Syntax
HypertextExecute ()
See Also
HypertextCreate, HypertextDelete, HypertextEdit
HypertextInfo
Purpose
Return the specified information pertaining to the current hyperlink. If the insertion point is not on a hyperlink, information regarding the previous hyperlink is returned. If there are no hyperlinks preceding the insertion point, information regarding the next hyperlink is returned. If there are no hyperlinks in the current document, 0 is always returned, regardless of the value of the Data parameter.
Syntax
any := HypertextInfo (Data: enumeration)
Parameters
Data
enumeration Specify the link information to return.
Action!
Appearance!
Bookmark!
Name!
See Also
HypertextCreate
HypertextNext
Purpose
Advance to the next hyperlink.
Syntax
HypertextNext ()
See Also
HypertextPrevious
HypertextPrevious
Purpose
Return to the previous hyperlink.
Syntax
HypertextPrevious ()
See Also
HypertextNext
HypertextReturnFrom
Purpose
Return the insertion point from a bookmark to the bookmark's hyperlink.
Syntax
HypertextReturnFrom ()
HypertextStyleEdit
Purpose
Edit the Hyperlink Style.
Syntax
HypertextStyleEdit ()
Hyphen
Purpose
Insert a hyphen.
Syntax
Hyphen ()
Hyphenation
Purpose
Turn Hyphenation on or off.
Syntax
Hyphenation (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?Hyphenation, HyphenationIgnore
HyphenationIgnore
Purpose
Cancel hyphenation of the current word.
Syntax
HyphenationIgnore ()
See Also
Hyphenation
HyphenationSoftReturn
Purpose
Insert a hyphenation soft return code [Hyph SRt] at the insertion point. This code will break the word, if hyphenation is necessary, at the specified point.
Syntax
HyphenationSoftReturn ()
HyphenationZoneLeft
Purpose
Specify the lower limit of a hyphenation zone.
Syntax
HyphenationZoneLeft (HZone: numeric)
Parameters
HZone
numeric
See Also
?LeftHyphZone, HyphenationZoneRight
HyphenationZoneRight
Purpose
Specify the upper limit of a hyphenation zone.
Syntax
HyphenationZoneRight (HZone: numeric)
Parameters
HZone
numeric
See Also
?RightHyphZone, HyphenationZoneLeft
ImportCreateDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Data Link dialog box.
Syntax
ImportCreateDlg ()
ImportDlg
Purpose
Display the Import Data dialog box.
Syntax
ImportDlg ()
ImportDoEdit
Purpose
Modify and perform an existing link between a spreadsheet or database and the current document.
Syntax
ImportDoEdit ()
See Also
ImportDoImport, ImportDoLink, ImportDoUpdate
ImportDoImport
Purpose
Import ASCII text, ANSI text, table data, spreadsheet data, or database data.
Syntax
ImportDoImport ()
See Also
ImportDoEdit, ImportDoLink, ImportDoUpdate
ImportDoLink
Purpose
Create and perform a link between a spreadsheet or database and the current document.
Syntax
ImportDoLink ()
See Also
ImportDoEdit, ImportDoImport, ImportDoUpdate
ImportDoUpdate
Purpose
Update linked data in the current document to match the data in linked spreadsheet or database files.
Syntax
ImportDoUpdate ()
See Also
ImportDoEdit, ImportDoImport, ImportDoLink
ImportEditDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Data Link dialog box.
Syntax
ImportEditDlg ()
ImportOptionsDlg
Purpose
Display the Link Options dialog box.
Syntax
ImportOptionsDlg ()
ImportSetAsciiEncap
Purpose
Specify an ASCII encapsulation character for importing spreadsheet or database data saved as ASCII delimited text.
Syntax
ImportSetAsciiEncap (EncapsulationChar: string)
Parameters
EncapsulationChar
string
See Also
ImportSetAsciiFieldDelimiter, ImportSetAsciiRecordDelimiter, ImportSetAsciiStrip
ImportSetAsciiFieldDelimiter
Purpose
Specify the characters to mark the beginning or end of a field when importing spreadsheet or database data saved as ASCII delimited text.
Syntax
ImportSetAsciiFieldDelimiter (FieldDelimiter: string)
Parameters
FieldDelimiter
string
See Also
ImportSetAsciiEncap, ImportSetAsciiRecordDelimiter, ImportSetAsciiStrip
ImportSetAsciiRecordDelimiter
Purpose
Specify the characters to mark the beginning or end of a record when importing spreadsheet or database data saved as ASCII delimited text.
Syntax
ImportSetAsciiRecordDelimiter (RecordDelimiter: string)
Parameters
RecordDelimiter
string
See Also
ImportSetAsciiEncap, ImportSetAsciiFieldDelimiter, ImportSetAsciiStrip
ImportSetAsciiStrip
Purpose
Delete extra characters when importing spreadsheet or database data saved as ASCII delimited text.
Syntax
ImportSetAsciiStrip (StripChars: string)
Parameters
StripChars
string
See Also
ImportSetAsciiEncap, ImportSetAsciiFieldDelimiter, ImportSetAsciiRecordDelimiter
ImportSetDataSource
Purpose
Specify the data source for an ODBC import.
Syntax
ImportSetDataSource (Source: string)
Parameters
Source
string
ImportSetDestination
Purpose
Specify a format for linked or imported spreadsheet or database data.
Syntax
ImportSetDestination (DestinationType: enumeration)
Parameters
DestinationType
enumeration
MergeData!
TabbedText!
WPTable!
See Also
ImportSetSource
ImportSetDictPath
Purpose
Specify the Novell NetWare SQL dictionary path for imported spreadsheet or database data. Available only for Pioneer Q+E drivers.
Syntax
ImportSetDictPath (DictionaryPath: string)
Parameters
DictionaryPath
string
See Also
ImportSetFilePath, ImportSetPassword, ImportSetUserID
ImportSetFields
Purpose
Specify the database fields to import.
Syntax
ImportSetFields (FieldNames: string)
Parameters
FieldNames
string Separate fields with a comma, enclosed in quotation marks.
See Also
ImportSetFileName, ImportSetIncludeNames
ImportSetFileName
Purpose
Specify a source file to link to or import from.
Syntax
ImportSetFileName (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
See Also
ImportSetFields
ImportSetFilePath
Purpose
Specify a NetWare SQL file path. Available only for Pioneer Q+E drivers.
Syntax
ImportSetFilePath (FilePath: string)
Parameters
FilePath
string
See Also
ImportSetDictPath, ImportSetPassword, ImportSetUserID
ImportSetIncludeNames
Purpose
Use the field names as headings for imported database data.
Syntax
ImportSetIncludeNames (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
ImportSetFields
ImportSetPanel
Purpose
Specify a Corel DataPerfect panel to retrieve.
Syntax
ImportSetPanel (PanelName: string)
Parameters
PanelName
string
See Also
ImportSetFields, ImportSetFileName
ImportSetPassword
Purpose
Specify a password to import SQL data. Available only for Pioneer Q+E drivers.
Syntax
ImportSetPassword (Password: string)
Parameters
Password
string
ImportSetQuery
Purpose
Specify the field conditions for a database import query. For examples of valid conditions, choose Example from the Define Selection Conditions dialog box.
Syntax
ImportSetQuery (FieldName1: string; FieldName2: string; FieldName3: string; Condition1Field1: string; Condition1Field2: string; Condition1Field3: string; Condition2Field1: string; Condition2Field2: string; Condition2Field3: string; Condition3Field1: string; Condition3Field2: string; Condition3Field3: string; Condition4Field1: string; Condition4Field2: string; Condition4Field3: string)
Parameters
FieldName1
string (optional)
FieldName2
string (optional)
FieldName3
string (optional)
Condition1Field1
string (optional)
Condition1Field2
string (optional)
Condition1Field3
string (optional)
Condition2Field1
string (optional)
Condition2Field2
string (optional)
Condition2Field3
string (optional)
Condition3Field1
string (optional)
Condition3Field2
string (optional)
Condition3Field3
string (optional)
Condition4Field1
string (optional)
Condition4Field2
string (optional)
Condition4Field3
string (optional)
ImportSetRange
Purpose
Specify a range of spreadsheet cells to import.
Syntax
ImportSetRange (Range: string)
Parameters
Range
string
ImportSetServer
Purpose
Specify a server for a NetWare SQL database import. Available only for Pioneer Q+E drivers.
Syntax
ImportSetServer (ServerName: string)
Parameters
ServerName
string
ImportSetSizeToFit
Purpose
Size table columns to fit data after it is imported.
Syntax
ImportSetSizeToFit (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
ImportSetSource
Purpose
Specify the format of spreadsheet or database data to import.
Syntax
ImportSetSource (SourceType: enumeration)
Parameters
SourceType
enumeration
|
ANSIText! |
ODBC! |
|
ASCII! |
ODBC_NO_SQL! |
|
Clipper! |
Oracle! |
|
DataPerfect! |
Paradox! |
|
DB2! |
Spreadsheet! |
|
dBase! |
SQLBase! |
|
FoxPro! |
SQLServer! |
|
InFormix! |
Sybase! |
|
NetWare! |
XDB! |
ImportSetSQLQuery
Purpose
Specify the conditions for a database link or import query. For examples of valid conditions, choose Example from the Define Selection Conditions dialog box.
Syntax
ImportSetSQLQuery (SQLQuery: string)
Parameters
SQLQuery
string
ImportSetTable
Purpose
Specify a table to import.
Syntax
ImportSetTable (TableName: string)
Parameters
TableName
string
ImportSetUserID
Purpose
Specify a NetWare SQL database user identification. Available only for Pioneer Q+E drivers.
Syntax
ImportSetUserID (UserId: string)
Parameters
UserId
string
See Also
ImportSetDictPath, ImportSetFilePath, ImportSetPassword
ImportUpdateDlg
Purpose
Display the Update import dialog box.
Syntax
ImportUpdateDlg ()
Indent
Purpose
Indent a paragraph one tab stop to the right without changing the margins.
Syntax
Indent ()
See Also
?Indent
IndentLeftRight
Purpose
Indent both sides of a paragraph equally from the left and right margin.
Syntax
IndentLeftRight ()
IndexDefineDlg
Purpose
Display the Define Index dialog box.
Syntax
IndexDefineDlg ()
IndexDefinition
Purpose
Create and insert an index definition.
Syntax
IndexDefinition (Heading: any; Subheading: any; NumMode: enumeration; PgCombine: enumeration; Concordance: string; UserFormat: string)
Parameters
Heading
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Subheading
any The subheading style.
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
NumMode
enumeration The page numbering method after a heading.
DefFlushRight!
DefFollows!
DefLeader!
DefNone!
DefParentheses!
PgCombine
enumeration Combine sequential page numbers (for example, 51-53) or not (51, 52, 53).
Combine!
NoCombine!
Concordance
string (optional)
UserFormat
string (optional) The page number format. Default: document format.
See Also
?IndexDefinition, IndexMark
IndexMark
Purpose
Mark the text to be indexed. You can specify both a heading and a subheading.
Syntax
IndexMark (Heading: string; Subheading: string)
Parameters
Heading
string (optional)
Subheading
string (optional)
See Also
IndexDefinition
InhibitInput
Purpose
Enable or disable keyboard and menu input during macro execution.
Syntax
boolean := InhibitInput (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
See Also
Display
InitialCapShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro CAPITAL.WCM to capitalize the first letter of the current word. CAPITAL.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
InitialCapShippingMacro ()
InitialCodesDoc
Purpose
Begin initial codes. All codes between InitialCodesDoc and SubstructureExit are placed in initial codes.
Syntax
InitialCodesDoc ()
InitialCodesStyleDlg
Purpose
Display the Styles Editor dialog box. Recordable equivalent: Format, Document, Initial Codes Style.
Syntax
InitialCodesStyleDlg ()
InsertDefaultBullet
Purpose
Insert another bullet or number of the last type inserted.
Syntax
InsertDefaultBullet ()
InsertFilename
Purpose
Insert the filename of the current document.
Syntax
InsertFilename ()
See Also
InsertFilenameWithPath
InsertFilenameWithPath
Purpose
Insert the path and filename of the current document.
Syntax
InsertFilenameWithPath ()
See Also
InsertFilename
InsertOtherCodesDlg
Purpose
Display the Other Codes dialog box.
Syntax
InsertOtherCodesDlg ()
InternetPublisherDlg
Purpose
Display the Internet Publisher dialog box.
Syntax
InternetPublisherDlg ()
See Also
WebNewDlg, WebViewInWebBrowser, WebPublish, WebFormatAsWebDocument
InvokeDialog
Purpose
Display a specified dialog box but do not pause the macro for input.
Syntax
InvokeDialog (Dialog: command name)
Parameters
Dialog
command name
IrregularCap
Purpose
Corrects two consecutive uppercase letters followed by a lowercase letter at the beginning of a word. The second uppercase letter is made lowercase.
Syntax
IrregularCap (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
IsTokenValid
Purpose
Indicate whether a specified macro command can be executed given the current state of the program. For example, when the Clipboard is empty, the EditPaste command is invalid. This command is equivalent to checking whether an option grayed is in the interface. Menu items and dialog boxes are represented by the macro commands that execute them. For example, to check the Open dialog, use FileOpenDlg.
Syntax
boolean := IsTokenValid (Variable: variable; Token: command name)
Parameters
Variable
variable The value of the variable specified in this parameter is set to True if token specified in the Token parameter is available, False if not.
Token
command name The macro command (token) specifying item or dialog to check.
Justification
Purpose
Align text on the right or left margins, on both margins (including or not including the last line), or center it between the margins.
Syntax
Justification (Justification: enumeration)
Parameters
Justification
enumeration
Center!
DecAlign!
Full!
FullAll!
Left!
Right!
See Also
?Justification, TableFormatJustification
JustifyAll
Purpose
Align all lines of text, including the last line of a paragraph, between the left and right margins from the current paragraph forward.
Syntax
JustifyAll ()
See Also
JustifyCenter, JustifyFull, JustifyLeft, JustifyRight
JustifyCenter
Purpose
Center all lines of text from the current paragraph forward.
Syntax
JustifyCenter ()
See Also
JustifyAll, JustifyFull, JustifyLeft, JustifyRight
JustifyFull
Purpose
Align text, except the last line of each paragraph, along the left and right margins from the current paragraph forward.
Syntax
JustifyFull ()
See Also
JustifyAll, JustifyCenter, JustifyLeft, JustifyRight
JustifyLeft
Purpose
Align text at the left margin from the current paragraph forward.
Syntax
JustifyLeft ()
See Also
JustifyAll, JustifyCenter, JustifyFull, JustifyRight
JustifyRight
Purpose
Align text at the right margin from the current paragraph forward.
Syntax
JustifyRight ()
See Also
JustifyAll, JustifyCenter, JustifyFull, JustifyLeft
KeepTextTogetherDlg
Purpose
Display the Keep Text Together dialog box.
Syntax
KeepTextTogetherDlg ()
See Also
BlockProtect, ConditionalEndOfPage, WidowOrphan
Kerning
Purpose
Turn Automatic Kerning on or off.
Syntax
Kerning (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?Kerning
KerningSpacing
Purpose
Move the character to the right of the insertion point a specified distance to the left or right.
Syntax
KerningSpacing (KerningSpacingValue: measurement)
Parameters
KerningSpacingValue
measurement (optional) The distance to move the character. Negative values move left, positive values move right.
See Also
Advance, Kerning
KeyboardSelect
Purpose
Select a keyboard, such as WPWin 6.0 Keyboard, Equation Editor Keyboard, or WPDOS 6.0 Compatible Keyboard.
Syntax
KeyboardSelect (Keyboard: string)
Parameters
Keyboard
string (optional)
See Also
KeyboardSelectDlg
KeyboardSelectDlg
Purpose
Display the Keyboard Settings dialog box.
Syntax
KeyboardSelectDlg ()
See Also
KeyboardSelect
LabelsDefine
Purpose
Create a customized labels definition.
Syntax
LabelsDefine (Filename: string; LabelName: string; LabelFlags: enumeration; SheetWidth: measurement; SheetLength: measurement; ColumnsPerPage: numeric; RowsPerPage: numeric; LabelWidth: measurement; LabelLength: measurement; LeftOffset: measurement; TopOffset: measurement; BetweenColumns: measurement; BetweenRows: measurement; MarginLeft: measurement; MarginRight: measurement; MarginTop: measurement; MarginBottom: measurement)
Parameters
Filename
string
LabelName
string
LabelFlags
enumeration
Laser!
LaserandTractorFed!
TractorFed!
SheetWidth
measurement
SheetLength
measurement
ColumnsPerPage
numeric
RowsPerPage
numeric
LabelWidth
measurement
LabelLength
measurement
LeftOffset
measurement The distance from the left edge of the page to the left edge of the first label column.
TopOffset
measurement The distance from the top edge of the page to the top edge of the first label row.
BetweenColumns
measurement
BetweenRows
measurement
MarginLeft
measurement
MarginRight
measurement
MarginTop
measurement
MarginBottom
measurement
See Also
LabelsDlg, LabelsFileCreate, LabelsFileDescription, LabelsOff, LabelsSelect, PaperSizeAdd, PaperSizeResave, PaperSizeSelect
LabelsDelete
Purpose
Delete a labels definition.
Syntax
LabelsDelete (Filename: string; LabelName: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
LabelName
string
LabelsDlg
Purpose
Display the Labels dialog box.
Syntax
LabelsDlg ()
LabelsFileCreate
Purpose
Create a labels file.
Syntax
LabelsFileCreate (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
See Also
LabelsFileDescription, LabelsFileSelect
LabelsFileDescription
Purpose
Create a description for a labels file.
Syntax
LabelsFileDescription (Filename: string; Description: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
Description
string
See Also
LabelsFileCreate, LabelsFileSelect
LabelsFileSelect
Purpose
Select a labels file.
Syntax
LabelsFileSelect (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
See Also
LabelsFileDescription
LabelsOff
Purpose
Turn off labels mode.
Syntax
LabelsOff ()
See Also
LabelsFileSelect, LabelsSelect
LabelsSelect
Purpose
Select a label definition.
Syntax
LabelsSelect (Filename: string; LabelName: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
LabelName
string
Language
Purpose
Specify a language for a document or a selection of text.
Syntax
Language (Language: string)
Parameters
Language
string Two characters that specify a language.
LanguageDlg
Purpose
Display the Language dialog box.
Syntax
LanguageDlg ()
LastOpenedAdd
Purpose
Place a filename at the top of Last Opened on the File menu.
Syntax
LastOpenedAdd ({Filename: string; })
Parameters
Filename
string (optional)
LaunchOnlineService
Purpose
Start an online service and specify an address.
Syntax
LaunchOnlineService (ProgramPath: string; Address: string)
Parameters
ProgramPath
string The path and filename of online service program.
Address
string
See Also
HelpOnlineSupportDlg, WebLaunchWebBrowser
Leading
Purpose
Specify the leading adjustment.
Syntax
Leading (Adjustment: measurement)
Parameters
Adjustment
measurement
LineBreak
Purpose
Insert a Ln Brk (Line Break) code at the insertion point. This command begins a new line without ending the paragraph. It was created for use in web documents, but it also works in regular documents.
Syntax
LineBreak ()
LineCreateDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Graphics Line dialog box.
Syntax
LineCreateDlg ()
See Also
GraphicsLineCreate
LineEditDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Graphics Line dialog box.
Syntax
LineEditDlg ()
See Also
GraphicsLineEdit, LineCreateDlg
LineHeight
Purpose
Specify the line height, measured from baseline to baseline in single-spaced text. Fixed line height: specify unit of measurement by preceding LineHeight with DEFAULTUNITS or by specifying a unit of measurement identifier (“, c, p, w) in the Height parameter. Auto line height: measured as point size of the current font plus two points.
Syntax
LineHeight (Height: any)
Parameters
Height
any Select Auto! or specify a fixed line height and unit of measurement.
Auto!
See Also
LineHeightDlg
LineHeightDlg
Purpose
Display the Line Height dialog box.
Syntax
LineHeightDlg ()
See Also
LineHeight
LineHyphenationDlg
Purpose
Display the Line Hyphenation dialog box.
Syntax
LineHyphenationDlg ()
LineNumbering
Purpose
Turn Line Numbering on or off, and set numbering attributes. When the Default parameter is DontUseDefaultValues!, you can specify font, color, Shade, and AttributesOn parameters. You can see the values of a selected color in the Define Color Printing Palette dialog box.
Syntax
LineNumbering (State: enumeration; RestartAtNewPage: enumeration; CountBlankLines: enumeration; NumberColumns: enumeration; PositionRelativeToLeftEdge: enumeration; Position: measurement; FirstPrintingNumber: numeric; NumberInterval: numeric; Default: enumeration; FontFace: string; FontSize: measurement; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; Shade: numeric; {AttributesOn: enumeration; })
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
RestartAtNewPage
enumeration (optional)
DontRestartNumbersEachPage!
RestartNumbersEachPage!
CountBlankLines
enumeration (optional)
CountBlankLines!
DontCountBlankLines!
NumberColumns
enumeration (optional)
DontNumberAllNewspaperColumns!
NumberAllNewspaperColumns!
PositionRelativeToLeftEdge
enumeration (optional)
PosNumberFromLeftEdgeOfPaper!
PosNumberFromLeftMargin!
Position
measurement (optional) Where to print line numbers.
FirstPrintingNumber
numeric (optional)
NumberInterval
numeric (optional)
Default
enumeration (optional)
DontUseDefaultValues!
UseDefaultValues!
FontFace
string (optional)
FontSize
measurement (optional)
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Shade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
AttributesOn
enumeration (optional)
|
Bold! |
Shadow! |
|
DoubleUnderline! |
Small! |
|
ExtraLarge! |
SmallCaps! |
|
Fine! |
Strikeout! |
|
Italics! |
Subscript! |
|
Large! |
Superscript! |
|
Outline! |
Underline! |
|
Redline! |
VeryLarge! |
See Also
?LineNumbering, ?LineNumCountBlankLines, ?StartingLineNumber, LineNumberingMethod, LineNumberSet
LineNumberingDlg
Purpose
Display the Line Numbering dialog box.
Syntax
LineNumberingDlg ()
See Also
LineNumbering
LineNumberingMethod
Purpose
Specify a method for numbering lines.
Syntax
LineNumberingMethod (NumberingMethod: enumeration)
Parameters
NumberingMethod
enumeration
LowerLetters!
LowerRoman!
Numbers!
UpperLetters!
UpperRoman!
See Also
?LineNumberMethod, LineNumbering, LineNumberSet
LineNumberSet
Purpose
Specify the first line number on a page.
Syntax
LineNumberSet (Number: numeric)
Parameters
Number
numeric
See Also
LineNumbering, LineNumberingMethod
LineNumberShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro LINENUM.WCM to move the insertion point to a specified line and line position in a macro. LINENUM.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
LineNumberShippingMacro ()
LineSegmentColor
Purpose
Specify the color of a line segment. Use with commands such as LineSegmentCreate and LineSegmentEnd.
Syntax
LineSegmentColor (ColorName: string; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; Shade: numeric)
Parameters
ColorName
string (optional) This parameter has been left in for backward compatability with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect. To specify a color in Corel WordPerfect 8, use the Red, Green, and Blue parameters.
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Shade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100. Although Shade is optional, omitting it defaults the line color to black, regardless of the other parameter values.
See Also
?LineSegmentBlue, ?LineSegmentGreen, ?LineSegmentRed, ?LineSegmentShading, LineSegmentCreate, LineSegmentEnd, LineStyleEdit, LineStyleEnd
LineSegmentCreate
Purpose
Create a custom line style of stacked lines. Use with commands such as LineStyleEdit.
Syntax
LineSegmentCreate (Position: numeric)
Parameters
Position
numeric First (inside) position: 1.
See Also
LineSegmentDelete, LineSegmentEnd, LineStyleEdit, TableEdit
LineSegmentDelete
Purpose
Delete a single line of a stacked custom line. Use with commands such as LineStyleEdit and LineSegmentEnd.
Syntax
LineSegmentDelete (Position: numeric)
Parameters
Position
numeric First (inside) position: 1.
See Also
LineSegmentCreate, LineStyleEdit, LineStyleEnd
LineSegmentEdit
Purpose
Specify a line segment to edit. Follow with editing commands and LineSegmentEnd.
Syntax
LineSegmentEdit (Position: numeric)
Parameters
Position
numeric First (inside) position: 0.
See Also
LineSegmentColor, LineSegmentEnd, LineSegmentSpacing, LineSegmentWidth
LineSegmentEnd
Purpose
Save or cancel changes to a line segment. Precede with LineSegmentCreate or LineSegmentEdit.
Syntax
LineSegmentEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
See Also
LineSegmentCreate, LineSegmentEdit
LineSegmentSetUser
Purpose
Begin the sequence that defines a custom line pattern, and specify the number of dashes and spaces in the pattern. Follow with the number of LineSegmentSetUserData commands equal to the number of dashes and spaces specified, and by LineSegmentSetUserEnd.
Syntax
LineSegmentSetUser (OnOffs: numeric)
Parameters
OnOffs
numeric The number of dashes/spaces.
See Also
LineSegmentSetUserData, LineSegmentSetUserEnd, LineSegmentSetWPG2
LineSegmentSetUserData
Purpose
Specify a dash or space length in a custom line pattern. Precede with LineSegmentSetUser and follow with LineSegmentEnd.
Syntax
LineSegmentSetUserData (SegSize: measurement)
Parameters
SegSize
measurement The length of a dash or space.
See Also
LineSegmentSetUser, LineSegmentSetUserEnd, LineSegmentSetWPG2
LineSegmentSetUserEnd
Purpose
End the sequence that defines a custom line pattern.
Syntax
LineSegmentSetUserEnd ()
See Also
LineSegmentSetUser, LineSegmentSetUserData, LineSegmentSetWPG2
LineSegmentSetWPG2
Purpose
Set a line segment pattern to a predefined WPG2 line pattern.
Syntax
LineSegmentSetWPG2 (Style: numeric; LineStyle: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
numeric The pattern set. The only valid entry is 0.
LineStyle
enumeration
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
See Also
?LineSegmentWPG2Pattern, LineSegmentSetUser, LineSegmentSetUserData, LineSegmentSetUserEnd
LineSegmentSpacing
Purpose
Specify the distance between lines in a stacked custom line.
Syntax
LineSegmentSpacing (Spacing: measurement)
Parameters
Spacing
measurement
See Also
?LineSegmentSpacing
LineSegmentWidth
Purpose
Set the thickness (width) of a line segment.
Syntax
LineSegmentWidth (Width: measurement)
Parameters
Width
measurement
See Also
?LineSegmentWidth, LineSegmentCreate, LineSegmentEdit, LineSegmentEnd
LineSpacing
Purpose
Specify line spacing for the current and subsequent paragraphs. When recorded, the tenths position is used. When typed, tenths is optional.
Syntax
LineSpacing (Spacing: numeric)
Parameters
Spacing
numeric
See Also
?LineSpacing
LineSpacingDlg
Purpose
Display the Line Spacing dialog box.
Syntax
LineSpacingDlg ()
See Also
LineSpacing
LineStyleCopy
Purpose
Copy a graphics line style.
Syntax
LineStyleCopy (Style: any; FromLibrary: enumeration; ToLibrary: enumeration; DestName: string)
Parameters
Style
any
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
FromLibrary
enumeration
CurrentDocument!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
ToLibrary
enumeration
CurrentDocument!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
DestName
string (optional) The new line name.
See Also
GraphicsLineCreate, GraphicsLineEdit, GraphicsLineEnd
LineStyleCreate
Purpose
Create a graphics line style. Use with LineStyleEdit and LineStyleEnd.
Syntax
LineStyleCreate (Name: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Name
string
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
LineStyleEnd
LineStyleDelete
Purpose
Delete a user-defined graphics line style. Corel WordPerfect line styles cannot be deleted.
Syntax
LineStyleDelete (Name: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Name
any
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
LineStyleEdit
Purpose
Edit a line style. Use with commands such as LineStyleCreate and LineStyleEnd.
Syntax
LineStyleEdit (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
LineStyleCreate, LineStyleDelete, LineStyleEnd
LineStyleEnd
Purpose
Save or cancel changes to a graphics line style.
Syntax
LineStyleEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
See Also
LineStyleCreate, LineStyleEdit
LineStyleName
Purpose
Rename a user-defined graphics line style. Corel WordPerfect line styles cannot be renamed. Precede with LineStyleCreate or LineStyleEdit and end with LineStyleEnd.
Syntax
LineStyleName (LineName: string)
Parameters
LineName
string
See Also
LineStyleCreate, LineStyleEdit, LineStyleEnd
LineStyleRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve all line graphics styles from the specified document or template and add to the specified style list.
Syntax
LineStyleRetrieve (Filename: string; Style: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string The path and filename of a document or template containing the styles to retrieve.
Style
enumeration The destination for the retrieved styles. Use CurrentDoc! to add the styles to the current document style list. Use PersonalLibrary! to add the styles to the default template style list. Use SharedLibrary! to add the styles to the additional objects template style list. If an additional objects template is not specified in Files Settings, and SharedLibrary! is used here, the command does nothing.
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
LineStyleSave
Purpose
Save a line style library.
Syntax
LineStyleSave (FileName: string; Style: enumeration)
Parameters
FileName
string
Style
enumeration
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibary!
ListDefineDlg
Purpose
Display the Define List dialog box.
Syntax
ListDefineDlg ()
ListDefinition
Purpose
Select a list definition and specify where to generate the list. Use ListDefinitionCreate to create a definition.
Syntax
ListDefinition (ListName: string; Style: any; Numbering: enumeration; Counter: any; NumberingFormat: string)
Parameters
ListName
string Name or rename a selected list definition.
Style
any (optional)
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Numbering
enumeration (optional) The list numbering mode.
|
DefFlushRight! |
DefNone! |
|
DefFollows! |
DefParentheses! |
|
DefLeader! |
Counter
any (optional)
|
ButtonBox! |
TableBox! |
|
EquationBox! |
TextBox! |
|
FigureBox! |
UserBox! |
|
InlineEquationBox! |
WatermarkImageBox! |
|
NoBox! |
NumberingFormat
string (optional) The numbering characters.
See Also
?ListDefinition, ListDefinitionCreate
ListDefinitionCreate
Purpose
Create a list definition. Follow with commands such as ListDefinitionMode and ListDefinitionStyle.
Syntax
ListDefinitionCreate (ListName: string; Style: any; Numbering: enumeration; Counter: any; NumberingFormat: string)
Parameters
ListName
string
Style
any (optional)
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Numbering
enumeration (optional)
|
DefFlushRight! |
DefNone! |
|
DefFollows! |
DefParentheses! |
|
DefLeader! |
Counter
any (optional)
|
ButtonBox! |
TableBox! |
|
EquationBox! |
TextBox! |
|
FigureBox! |
UserBox! |
|
InlineEquationBox! |
WatermarkImageBox! |
|
NoBox! |
NumberingFormat
string (optional)
See Also
ListDefinition
ListDefinitionDelete
Purpose
Delete a list definition.
Syntax
ListDefinitionDelete (ListName: string)
Parameters
ListName
string
ListDefinitionEditBox
Purpose
Change the box type of a list definition.
Syntax
ListDefinitionEditBox (Name: string; BoxName: any)
Parameters
Name
string The list definition.
BoxName
any
|
ButtonBox! |
TableBox! |
|
EquationBox! |
TextBox! |
|
FigureBox! |
UserBox! |
|
InlineEquationBox! |
WatermarkImageBox! |
|
NoBox! |
ListDefinitionMode
Purpose
Change the numbering mode of a list definition.
Syntax
ListDefinitionMode (ListName: string; Numbering: enumeration)
Parameters
ListName
string
Numbering
enumeration (optional)
DefFlushRight!
DefFollows!
DefLeader!
DefNone!
DefParentheses!
ListDefinitionRename
Purpose
Rename a list definition.
Syntax
ListDefinitionRename (OldName: string; NewName: string)
Parameters
OldName
string
NewName
string
ListDefinitionRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve a list definition from a document.
Syntax
ListDefinitionRetrieve (Filename: string; ListName: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
ListName
string
ListDefinitionStyle
Purpose
Edit a list definition and change the list style.
Syntax
ListDefinitionStyle (ListName: string; Style: any)
Parameters
ListName
string
Style
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
See Also
ListEditPageFormat
ListEditPageFormat
Purpose
Edit the page numbering format of a list definition.
Syntax
ListEditPageFormat (ListName: string; NumberFormat: any)
Parameters
ListName
string
NumberFormat
any If there is nothing between the quotation marks, the list uses document style.
DocFormat!
See Also
ListDefinitionStyle
ListMark
Purpose
Mark the selected text as an item to add to a list when a document is generated.
Syntax
ListMark (ListName: string)
Parameters
ListName
string (optional)
LotusNotesHandle
Purpose
Return the handle to Lotus Notes. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is invoked by Lotus Notes through OLE. Not recordable.
Syntax
numeric := LotusNotesHandle ()
MacroCommandInserter
Purpose
Turn the Corel WordPerfect Macro Command Inserter on or off.
Syntax
MacroCommandInserter (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
MacroEditControlBar
Purpose
Display the Macro Edit feature bar.
Syntax
MacroEditControlBar (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
MacroExecuteQuick
Purpose
Playback the current QuickMacro.
Syntax
MacroExecuteQuick ()
MacroFileChain
Purpose
Specify a macro to play upon completion of the current macro.
Syntax
MacroFileChain (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
See Also
MacroFilePlay
MacroFilePlay
Purpose
Play a macro.
Syntax
MacroFilePlay (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
MacroMenuAdd
Purpose
Add a macro to the macro submenu.
Syntax
MacroMenuAdd (UpdateBIF: enumeration; MenuPos: numeric; Location: enumeration; Filename: string; TemplateName: string)
Parameters
UpdateBIF
enumeration
No!
Yes!
MenuPos
numeric The menu position.
Location
enumeration
CurrentTemplate!
FileOnDisk!
StandardTemplate!
Filename
string (optional)
TemplateName
string (optional)
MacroMenuDelete
Purpose
Delete a macro from a menu.
Syntax
MacroMenuDelete (UpdateBIF: enumeration; {MenuPos: numeric; })
Parameters
UpdateBIF
enumeration
No!
Yes!
MenuPos
numeric (optional) The menu position.
MacroPause
Purpose
Pause a macro until the user presses Enter or selects Pause on the Macro menu.
Syntax
MacroPause ()
MacroStatusPrompt
Purpose
Turn the macro status prompt line on or off.
Syntax
MacroStatusPrompt (State: enumeration; Prompt: string)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
Prompt
string (optional)
MacroTemplatePlay
Purpose
Play a macro located on a template.
Syntax
MacroTemplatePlay (Location: enumeration; MacroName: string)
Parameters
Location
enumeration
CurrentTemplate!
DefaultTemplate!
MacroName
string
MailDlg
Purpose
Determine if a mail system is running and start it if necessary; display the mail view; and attach a copy of the active Corel WordPerfect document, or if text was selected, it is pasted in the message box. If multiple mail systems are available, the highest priority mail system is used.
Syntax
MailDlg ()
MakeItFit
Purpose
Shrink or expand a document to fill a specified number of pages.
Syntax
MakeItFit (TargetPage: numeric; {Adjust: enumeration; })
Parameters
TargetPage
numeric The number of pages to fill.
Adjust
enumeration (optional)
FitBottomMargin!
FitFontSize!
FitLeftMargin!
FitLineSpacing!
FitRightMargin!
FitTopMargin!
MakeItFitDlg
Purpose
Display the Make It Fit Expert dialog box.
Syntax
MakeItFitDlg ()
MarginAdjustLeft
Purpose
Move the left margin to the left or right, relative to the current margin setting.
Syntax
MarginAdjustLeft (AmtToAdjust: measurement)
Parameters
AmtToAdjust
measurement (optional) A positive value increases the margin; a negative value decreases it.
See Also
?LeftMarginAdj, MarginAdjustRight, MarginLeft
MarginAdjustRight
Purpose
Move the right margin to the left or right, relative to the current margin setting.
Syntax
MarginAdjustRight (AmtToAdjust: measurement)
Parameters
AmtToAdjust
measurement A positive value increases the margin; a negative value decreases it.
See Also
?RightMarginAdj, MarginAdjustLeft, MarginRight
MarginBottom
Purpose
Set the bottom margin.
Syntax
MarginBottom (MarginWidth: measurement)
Parameters
MarginWidth
measurement
See Also
?MarginBottom
MarginLeft
Purpose
Set the left margin.
Syntax
MarginLeft (MarginWidth: measurement)
Parameters
MarginWidth
measurement
See Also
?MarginLeft, MarginAdjustLeft
MarginReleaseInsert
Purpose
Insert a [Hd Back Tab] code at the insertion point. This moves the margin back one tab.
Syntax
MarginReleaseInsert ()
MarginRight
Purpose
Set the right margin.
Syntax
MarginRight (MarginWidth: measurement)
Parameters
MarginWidth
measurement
See Also
?MarginRight, MarginAdjustRight
MarginTop
Purpose
Set the top margin.
Syntax
MarginTop (MarginWidth: measurement)
Parameters
MarginWidth
measurement
See Also
?MarginTop
MarkCrossRef
Purpose
Display the Cross-Reference feature bar.
Syntax
MarkCrossRef ()
See Also
MarkCrossRefUpdateList
MarkCrossRefUpdateList
Purpose
Add a specified target name to the Target name list.
Syntax
MarkCrossRefUpdateList (Target: string)
Parameters
Target
string The target name to add to the Target name list.
See Also
MarkCrossRef
MarkIndex
Purpose
Display the Index feature bar.
Syntax
MarkIndex ()
See Also
MarkIndexUpdateList
MarkIndexUpdateList
Purpose
Create a reference to a specified heading and subheading in the index.
Syntax
MarkIndexUpdateList (Heading: string; SubHeading: string)
Parameters
Heading
string
SubHeading
string
See Also
MarkIndex
MarkList
Purpose
Display the List feature bar.
Syntax
MarkList ()
See Also
MarkListUpdateList
MarkListUpdateList
Purpose
Update the List feature bar.
Syntax
MarkListUpdateList (ListName: string)
Parameters
ListName
string
See Also
MarkList
MarkTableOfAuthorities
Purpose
Display the Table of Authorities feature bar.
Syntax
MarkTableOfAuthorities ()
MarkTableOfContents
Purpose
Display the Table of Contents feature bar.
Syntax
MarkTableOfContents ()
MarkTOAUpdateList
Purpose
Update the Table of Authorities feature bar.
Syntax
MarkTOAUpdateList (ShortForm: string)
Parameters
ShortForm
string The list name in a table of authorities.
MasterDocCondense
Purpose
Condense selected subdocuments and save changes.
Syntax
MasterDocCondense (Filename: string; Action: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string (optional)
Action
enumeration
SaveSub!
SkipSub!
See Also
MasterDocCondenseDlg
MasterDocCondenseDlg
Purpose
Display the Condense/Save Subdocuments dialog box.
Syntax
MasterDocCondenseDlg ()
See Also
MasterDocCondense
MasterDocExpand
Purpose
Expand a subdocument. Specify a subdocument with SubDocInclude.
Syntax
MasterDocExpand (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string (optional)
MasterDocSubdocDlg
Purpose
Display the Include Subdocument dialog box.
Syntax
MasterDocSubdocDlg ()
MatchElement
Purpose
Specify that Find and Replace finds a tag that meets certain conditions. The command applies only to searches for specific elements. Begin your search with SpecificSearchStringBegin and end it with SpecificStringEnd. Use SGMLInsertElement to specify which element name you are searching for. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed and the current document is a Corel WordPerfect SGML document.
Syntax
MatchElement (Attribute: string; Value: string; Type: enumeration; EditAttribute: enumeration)
Parameters
Attribute
string (optional)
Value
string (optional)
Type
enumeration
End!
Start!
EditAttribute
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
SpecificSearchStringBegin, SpecificStringEnd, SGMLInsertElement
MatchExtendSelection
Purpose
In a Find and Replace search, extend the selected text to include matches that are not in the original selection.
Syntax
MatchExtendSelection ()
MatchFindIfInElements
Purpose
Specify that Find and Replace search only in the specified SGML elements. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed and the current document is a Corel WordPerfect SGML document.
Syntax
MatchFindIfInElements (State: enumeration; Action: enumeration; {Element: string; })
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
Action
enumeration (optional) If Action is AnyOrder!, then a match will occur only within any of the specified elements. If Action is ListedOrder!, then the match will occur only within any of the specified elements when the elements are in the order of the element string. For example, if you specify to find a word that is within <TITLE> which is within <titlpage>, a match will not be made if the word is within <TITLE> which is not within <titlpage>.
AnyOrder!
ListedOrder!
Element
string (optional)
MatchLimit
Purpose
Limit a Replace All search to a specified number of occurrences.
Syntax
MatchLimit (State: enumeration; LimitValue: numeric)
Parameters
State
enumeration Limit a Find and Replace search.
No!
Yes!
LimitValue
numeric (optional)
MatchPositionAfter
Purpose
Place the insertion point after matched text in a Find and Replace search.
Syntax
MatchPositionAfter ()
See Also
MatchPositionBefore
MatchPositionBefore
Purpose
Place the insertion point before matched text in a Find and Replace search.
Syntax
MatchPositionBefore ()
See Also
MatchPositionAfter
MatchSelection
Purpose
Select matched text in a Find and Replace search.
Syntax
MatchSelection ()
MatchSkipIfInElements
Purpose
Specify that Find and Replace search all of the document except within the specified SGML elements. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed and the current document is a Corel WordPerfect SGML document.
Syntax
MatchSkipIfInElements ({Element: string; })
Parameters
Element
string (optional)
MatchWithAttributes
Purpose
Match only text with specified attributes in a Find and Replace search.
Syntax
MatchWithAttributes (State: enumeration; {Attribute: enumeration; })
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
Attribute
enumeration (optional)
|
Bold! |
Shadow! |
|
DoubleUnderline! |
Small! |
|
ExtraLarge! |
SmallCaps! |
|
Fine! |
Strikeout! |
|
Italics! |
Subscript! |
|
Large! |
Superscript! |
|
Outline! |
Underline! |
|
Redline! |
VeryLarge! |
See Also
MatchWithFont, MatchWithFontSize
MatchWithFont
Purpose
Match only text with specified font attributes in a Find and Replace search.
Syntax
MatchWithFont (State: enumeration; Typeface: string; Family: enumeration; Attributes: enumeration; Weight: enumeration; Width: enumeration; Source: enumeration; Type: enumeration; CharacterSet: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
Typeface
string (optional)
Family
enumeration (optional)
|
FamilyAestheticOrnamented! |
FamilyITCZapfDingbats! |
|
FamilyAlbertus! |
FamilyLetterGothic! |
|
FamilyBodoni! |
FamilyMadrone! |
|
FamilyBroadway! |
FamilyMicrostyle! |
|
FamilyBrush! |
FamilyOldEnglish! |
|
FamilyCenturySchoolbook! |
FamilyOptima! |
|
FamilyComputer! |
FamilyParkAvenue! |
|
FamilyCourier! |
FamilyPonderosa! |
|
FamilyHelvetica! |
FamilyPTBarnum! |
|
FamilyHobo! |
FamilyRevue! |
|
FamilyITCBenguiat! |
FamilySignetRoundhand! |
|
FamilyITCGaramon! |
FamilyTekton! |
|
FamilyITCLubalinGraph! |
FamilyTimesRoman! |
|
FamilyITCRonda! |
FamilyUncial! |
Attributes
enumeration (optional)
FontMatchItalic!
FontMatchNormal!
FontMatchOutline!
FontMatchShadow!
FontMatchSmallCaps!
Weight
enumeration (optional)
|
WeightBlack! |
WeightMaximum! |
|
WeightBold! |
WeightMedium! |
|
WeightBook! |
WeightRegular! |
|
WeightDemiBold! |
WeightRoman! |
|
WeightDemiLight! |
WeightSemiBold! |
|
WeightExtraBlack! |
WeightSemiLight! |
|
WeightExtraBold! |
WeightThin! |
|
WeightExtraHeavy! |
WeightUltraBlack! |
|
WeightExtraLight! |
WeightUltraHeavy! |
|
WeightExtraThin! |
WeightUltraLight! |
|
WeightHeavy! |
WeightUltraThin! |
|
WeightLight! |
WeightUnknown! |
Width
enumeration (optional)
|
WidthCompressed! |
WidthSemiCondensed! |
|
WidthCondensed! |
WidthSemiExpanded! |
|
WidthDoubleWide! |
WidthTripleWide! |
|
WidthExpanded! |
WidthUltraCompressed! |
|
WidthExtraCondensed! |
WidthUltraCondensed! |
|
WidthExtraExpanded! |
WidthUltraExpanded! |
|
WidthNormal! |
WidthUnknown! |
Source
enumeration (optional)
DRSFile!
PRSFile!
Type
enumeration (optional)
Intellifont!
Speedo!
TrueType!
Type1!
CharacterSet
enumeration (optional)
|
FontMatchArabic! |
FontMatchJapaneseKana! |
|
FontMatchArabicScript! |
FontMatchMath! |
|
FontMatchASCII! |
FontMatchMathExtension! |
|
FontMatchBoxDrawing! |
FontMatchMultinational1! |
|
FontMatchCyrillic! |
FontMatchMultinational2! |
|
FontMatchGreek! |
FontMatchTypographicSymbols! |
|
FontMatchHebrew! |
FontMatchUserDefined! |
|
FontMatchIconicSymbols! |
See Also
MatchWithAttributes, MatchWithFontSize
MatchWithFontSize
Purpose
Match only text with a specified font size in a Find and Replace search.
Syntax
MatchWithFontSize (State: enumeration; FontSize: measurement)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
FontSize
measurement (optional)
See Also
MatchWithAttributes, MatchWithFont
MenuAddFeature
Purpose
Add a feature to the current Corel WordPerfect menu.
Syntax
boolean := MenuAddFeature (Menu: string; Name: command name; Offset: numeric)
Parameters
Menu
string
Name
command name
Offset
numeric (optional)
MenuAddMacro
Purpose
Add a macro to the current Corel WordPerfect menu.
Syntax
boolean := MenuAddMacro (Menu: string; Name: string; MacroName: string; Hint: string; Offset: numeric)
Parameters
Menu
string
Name
string
MacroName
string
Hint
string (optional)
Offset
numeric (optional)
MenuAddProgram
Purpose
Add a program to the current Corel WordPerfect menu.
Syntax
boolean := MenuAddProgram (Menu: string; Name: string; ProgramName: string; Hint: string; Offset: numeric)
Parameters
Menu
string
Name
string
ProgramName
string
Hint
string (optional)
Offset
numeric (optional)
MenuAddScript
Purpose
Add a keyboard script to the current Corel WordPerfect menu.
Syntax
boolean := MenuAddScript (Menu: string; Name: string; Script: string; Hint: string; Offset: numeric)
Parameters
Menu
string
Name
string
Script
string
Hint
string (optional)
Offset
numeric (optional)
MenuAddSeparator
Purpose
Add a separator to the current Corel WordPerfect menu.
Syntax
boolean := MenuAddSeparator (Menu: string; Offset: numeric)
Parameters
Menu
string
Offset
numeric (optional)
MenuAddSubMenu
Purpose
Add a submenu to the current Corel WordPerfect menu.
Syntax
boolean := MenuAddSubMenu (Menu: string; Name: string; Hint: string; Offset: numeric)
Parameters
Menu
string
Name
string
Hint
string (optional)
Offset
numeric (optional)
MenuDeleteItemEx
Purpose
Delete an item from the current Corel WordPerfect menu.
Syntax
boolean := MenuDeleteItemEx (Menu: string; Name: string; Offset: numeric)
Parameters
Menu
string
Name
string (optional)
Offset
numeric (optional) This parameter is optional only when you are deleting a feature from a menu. If you want to delete a macro or a program, then this parameter is required.
MenuSelect
Purpose
Choose a menu.
Syntax
MenuSelect (MenuName: string)
Parameters
MenuName
string (optional)
See Also
MenuSelectDlg
Purpose
Display the Menu Bar Settings dialog box.
Syntax
MenuSelectDlg ()
See Also
MenuSelect
MergeAddressBook
Purpose
Specify an address book to associate with the current form file.
Syntax
MergeAddressBook (AddressBook: string)
Parameters
AddressBook
string The name of the address book to associate. If this parameter is left blank, the current association for the form file is removed whether it is associated with an address book or a data file.
MergeAddressBookSaveAs
Purpose
Save address book records as a merge data file.
Syntax
MergeAddressBookSaveAs (OutputFile: string; AddressBook: string)
Parameters
OutputFile
string The path and filename of the new merge data file.
AddressBook
string (optional) The address book to save as a merge data file. If this parameter is blank, the currently selected records are used; if not, all records in the specified address book are used. Address book selections can include records from multiple address books.
MergeBlankField
Purpose
Leave or remove a blank field. If blank fields are removed, the remaining fields shift up one line.
Syntax
MergeBlankField (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Leave!
Remove!
MergeCode
Purpose
Insert a merge code.
Syntax
MergeCode (Codes: enumeration; String: string)
Parameters
Codes
enumeration
|
Assign! |
Keyboard! |
|
AssignLocal! |
Label! |
|
Beep! |
Look! |
|
Break! |
MrgCmnd! |
|
Call! |
NestData! |
|
CancelOff! |
NestForm! |
|
CancelOn! |
NestMacro! |
|
Caps! |
Next! |
|
CaseOf! |
NextRecord! |
|
ChainData! |
NtoC! |
|
ChainForm! |
OnCancel! |
|
ChainMacro! |
OnError! |
|
Char! |
PageOff! |
|
Codes! |
PageOn! |
|
Comment! |
PostNet! |
|
Continue! |
Print!Macro List Text = ProcessOff! |
|
CtoN! |
ProcessOn! |
|
Date! |
Prompt! |
|
Default! |
Quit! |
|
DisplayStop! |
RepeatRow! |
|
Document! |
Return! |
|
Else! |
ReturnCancel! |
|
EmbedMacro! |
ReturnError! |
|
EndField! |
Rewrite! |
|
EndFor! |
StatusPrompt! |
|
EndIf! |
StepOff! |
|
EndRecord! |
StepOn! |
|
EndSwitch! |
Stop! |
|
EndWhile! |
StrLen! |
|
Field! |
StrPos! |
|
FieldNames! |
SubstData! |
|
FirstCap! |
SubstForm! |
|
ForEach! |
SubStr! |
|
ForNext! |
Switch! |
|
GetString! |
System! |
|
Go! |
ToLower! |
|
If! |
ToUpper! |
|
IfBlank! |
Variable! |
|
IfExists! |
Wait! |
|
IfNotBlank! |
While! |
|
Insert! |
String
string (optional) The field parameters.
MergeCodesDisplayEdit
Purpose
Display or hide merge codes, or display them as markers.
Syntax
MergeCodesDisplayEdit (Display: enumeration)
Parameters
Display
enumeration
Hide!
Marker!
Show!
See Also
MergeCodesDisplayRun
MergeCodesDisplayRun
Purpose
Display or hide merge codes, or display them as markers in a merged document.
Syntax
MergeCodesDisplayRun (Display: enumeration)
Parameters
Display
enumeration
Hide!
Marker!
Show!
See Also
MergeCodesDisplayEdit
MergeCodesDlg
Purpose
Display the Insert Merge Codes dialog box.
Syntax
MergeCodesDlg ()
MergeCondition
Purpose
Define a condition to select records from a data file.
Syntax
MergeCondition (Condition1: string; Condition2: string; Condition3: string; Condition4: string; Condition5: string; Condition6: string; Condition7: string; Condition8: string; Condition9: string; Condition10: string; Condition11: string; Condition12: string; Condition13: string; Condition14: string; Condition15: string)
Parameters
Condition1
string (optional)
Condition2
string (optional)
Condition3
string (optional)
Condition4
string (optional)
Condition5
string (optional)
Condition6
string (optional)
Condition7
string (optional)
Condition8
string (optional)
Condition9
string (optional)
Condition10
string (optional)
Condition11
string (optional)
Condition12
string (optional)
Condition13
string (optional)
Condition14
string (optional)
Condition15
string (optional)
MergeDataFile
Purpose
Specify the data file to associate with a form file.
Syntax
MergeDataFile (DataFile: string)
Parameters
DataFile
string (optional)
See Also
SortAction, SortType
MergeDlg
Purpose
Display the Merge dialog box.
Syntax
MergeDlg ()
MergeEndField
Purpose
Insert an [ENDFIELD] code at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: MergeCode.
Syntax
MergeEndField ()
MergeEndRecord
Purpose
Insert an [ENDRECORD] code at the insertion point. Recordable substitute: MergeCode.
Syntax
MergeEndRecord ()
MergeEnvelope
Purpose
Create an envelope for merged records.
Syntax
MergeEnvelope (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin
Purpose
Begin a MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin-MergeEnvelopeDefinitionEnd statement. Contains address information.
Syntax
MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin ()
See Also
MergeEnvelope, MergeEnvelopeDefinitionEnd
MergeEnvelopeDefinitionEnd
Purpose
End a merge envelope definition. Precede with MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin.
Syntax
MergeEnvelopeDefinitionEnd ()
See Also
MergeEnvelope, MergeEnvelopeDefinitionBegin
MergeFileAssociate
Purpose
Associate form and data files. MergeDataFile creates a recordable association.
Syntax
MergeFileAssociate (FormFile: string; DataFile: string)
Parameters
FormFile
string
DataFile
string (optional)
MergeFileAssociateAddressBook
Purpose
Associate a form file with an address book data source. This command also removes a data file association from the form file, if such an association exists.
Syntax
MergeFileAssociateAddressBook (FormFile: string; AddressBook: string)
Parameters
FormFile
string The path and filename of the form file to associate with the address book.
AddressBook
string (optional) The name of the address book to use as a data source for the form file. If this is blank, all associations will be removed.
MergeFileAssociateODBC
Purpose
Associate a form file with an ODBC data source and table.
Syntax
MergeFileAssociateODBC (FormFile: string; DataSource: string; TableName: string)
Parameters
FormFile
string
DataSource
string (optional)
TableName
string (optional)
MergeFilesDlg
Purpose
Display the Perform Merge dialog box.
Syntax
MergeFilesDlg ()
MergeFileType
Purpose
Specify the file type to merge.
Syntax
MergeFileType (FileType: enumeration)
Parameters
FileType
enumeration
Form!
None!
TableData!
TextData!
MergeFormDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Merge File dialog box.
Syntax
MergeFormDlg ()
MergeMark
Purpose
Mark a record to include in a merge.
Syntax
MergeMark (RecordNum: numeric)
Parameters
RecordNum
numeric A record number.
MergeODBC
Purpose
Specify an ODBC data source and table to associate with the current form file.
Syntax
MergeODBC (DataSource: string; TableName: string)
Parameters
DataSource
string
TableName
string
MergePageBreak
Purpose
Separate merged documents with a page break.
Syntax
MergePageBreak (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
MergePrintText
Purpose
Print a data file without page breaks between the records.
Syntax
MergePrintText ()
See Also
MergeFileType
MergeRepeat
Purpose
Specify the number of times to merge each record.
Syntax
MergeRepeat (NumberToRepeat: numeric)
Parameters
NumberToRepeat
numeric
MergeRun
Purpose
Merge a form file and a data file.
Syntax
MergeRun (FormFileType: enumeration; FormFile: string; DataFileType: enumeration; DataFile: string; OutputFileType: enumeration; OutputFile: string; AddressBook: string; EmailAddress: string; SubjectLine: string; DataSource: string; TableName: string)
Parameters
FormFileType
enumeration
Clipboard!
Current!
FormFile!
FormFile
string (optional)
DataFileType
enumeration If this parameter is set to AddressBook!, the DataFile parameter is ignored.
AddressBook!
Clipboard!
DataFile!
NoData!
ODBC!
DataFile
string (optional)
OutputFileType
enumeration
ToCurrentDoc!
ToEMail!
ToFile!
ToNewDoc!
ToPrinter!
OutputFile
string (optional) Merge the output file when OutputFileType parameter is ToFile!.
AddressBook
string (optional) The name of the address book to use as the data source for the merge. This parameter is ignored if the DataFileType parameter is not set to AddressBook! If the Address Book parameter is set to AddressBook! and this parameter is left blank, the currently selected address book records are used as the data source for the merge.
EmailAddress
string (optional)
SubjectLine
string (optional)
DataSource
string (optional)
TableName
string (optional)
MergeSelect
Purpose
Specify the records to merge.
Syntax
MergeSelect (SelectType: enumeration; Begin: numeric; End: numeric)
Parameters
SelectType
enumeration If the data source for the merge is an Address Book, use the All! enumeration.
All!
Marked!
Range!
Begin
numeric (optional) The low end of a range.
End
numeric (optional) The high end of a range.
See Also
MergeMark
MergeTableDataDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Data File dialog box.
Syntax
MergeTableDataDlg ()
MergeTextDataDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Merge File dialog box.
Syntax
MergeTextDataDlg ()
MinusSign
Purpose
Insert a minus sign (hyphen character) at the insertion point.
Syntax
MinusSign ()
MoveModeEnd
Purpose
End the command sequence to move text.
Syntax
MoveModeEnd ()
NewHFWOccurrence
Purpose
Specify the occurrence of headers, footers, and watermarks.
Syntax
NewHFWOccurrence (Occurrence: enumeration)
Parameters
Occurrence
enumeration
AllPages!
EvenPages!
NoPages!
OddPages!
NumberingOptionDlg
Purpose
Display the Page Numbering Options dialog box. Recordable equivalent: Format, Page, Numbering, Options.
Syntax
NumberingOptionDlg ()
OLE1InsertDlg
Purpose
Display the Insert Object dialog box.
Syntax
OLE1InsertDlg ()
See Also
OLEInsertDlg
OLE1LinksDlg
Purpose
Display the Links dialog box.
Syntax
OLE1LinksDlg ()
See Also
OLELinksDlg
OLE1PasteDlg
Purpose
Display the Paste Special dialog box.
Syntax
OLE1PasteDlg ()
See Also
OLEPasteDlg
OLEAcceptLinks
Purpose
Accept a link updated or initialized between server and client applications. Included for 6.0 compatibility only.
Syntax
OLEAcceptLinks ()
See Also
OLEInitializeLinks, OLEUpdateLink
OLECancelLink
Purpose
Cancel a link to an object.
Syntax
OLECancelLink (LinkName: string)
Parameters
LinkName
string
OLEChangeLink
Purpose
Change the file in a link.
Syntax
OLEChangeLink (ObjectName: string; Filename: string)
Parameters
ObjectName
string
Filename
string The replacement file.
OLEDeactivate
Purpose
Remove an OLE object from in-place editing mode.
Syntax
OLEDeactivate ()
OLEInitializeLinks
Purpose
Reinitialize a link with its server application. Record when you create, update, change, or perform any function on a link. Included for 6.0 compatibility only.
Syntax
OLEInitializeLinks ()
See Also
OLEAcceptLinks, OLEChangeLink, OLEUpdateLink
OLEInsertDlg
Purpose
Display the Insert Object dialog box.
Syntax
OLEInsertDlg ()
OLEInsertObject
Purpose
Specify the name of a program to insert an object into.
Syntax
OLEInsertObject (ObjectType: string; DisplayMode: enumeration)
Parameters
ObjectType
string The program name.
DisplayMode
enumeration (optional)
DisplayAsIcon!
DisplayNormal!
See Also
QuattroPro
OLEInsertObjectFile
Purpose
Insert an object file into the current document.
Syntax
OLEInsertObjectFile (Filename: string; DisplayMode: enumeration; ObjectMode: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
DisplayMode
enumeration (optional)
DisplayAsIcon!
DisplayNormal!
ObjectMode
enumeration (optional)
Embedded!
Linked!
OLELinksDlg
Purpose
Display the Links dialog box.
Syntax
OLELinksDlg ()
OLEObject
Purpose
Open an OLE object in the current document.
Syntax
OLEObject ()
See Also
OLEInsertObject
OLEPasteDlg
Purpose
Display the Paste Special dialog box.
Syntax
OLEPasteDlg ()
OLESetLinkUpdate
Purpose
Specify whether a linked object is always updated or manually updated.
Syntax
OLESetLinkUpdate (ObjectName: string; UpdateType: enumeration)
Parameters
ObjectName
string
UpdateType
enumeration
UpdateAlways!
UpdateManually!
OLEUpdateLink
Purpose
Update a specified link.
Syntax
OLEUpdateLink (LinkName: string)
Parameters
LinkName
string
OLEVerb
Purpose
Perform a pre-determined action on an OLE object. The action is determined by verbs defined by the OLE server. Verb 0 is the default verb (action) and is performed and recorded by double-clicking an object. For example, the default action for a sound clip is Play. Executing OLEVerb(Verb:0) on a sound clip plays the sound clip. Verbs range from 0 to the highest number defined by an OLE server for an object. See your OLE server documentation for valid verbs.
Syntax
OLEVerb (Verb: numeric)
Parameters
Verb
numeric Specify an action. 0 is the default verb.
OutlineBarDisplay
Purpose
Turn on the Outline mode, insert the first level number and style code of the current definition, and display the Outline feature bar. Use Off! to hide the feature bar. Recordable substitute: ViewOutline or OutlineOff.
Syntax
OutlineBarDisplay (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
OutlineParagraphNumber, OutlineSetParagraphNumber, OutlineStyleDescription, OutlineStyleLevel, OutlineStyleNumberFormat
OutlineBarSetup
Purpose
Display or hide outline symbols.
Syntax
OutlineBarSetup (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
See Also
OutlineIconsDisplay
OutlineBeginNew
Purpose
Begin a new outline in a specified style.
Syntax
OutlineBeginNew (Style: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
enumeration
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
See Also
OutlineEnd
OutlineBodyText
Purpose
Display or hide outline body text.
Syntax
OutlineBodyText (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional) If this parameter is not included, the command toggles to the opposite state.
HideBodyText!
ShowBodyText!
See Also
OutlineHideShowingBodyText
OutlineBodyTextToggle
Purpose
Toggle the current paragraph between an outline item and body text.
Syntax
OutlineBodyTextToggle ()
See Also
OutlineChangeToBodyText
OutlineChangeToBodyText
Purpose
Change the current outline item to body text. Recordable substitute: OutlineBodyTextToggle.
Syntax
OutlineChangeToBodyText ()
See Also
OutlineBodyText, OutlineParagraphNumber
OutlineDown
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the next outline item or paragraph of body text.
Syntax
OutlineDown ()
See Also
OutlineUp
OutlineEnd
Purpose
Turn off Outline.
Syntax
OutlineEnd ()
See Also
OutlineBeginNew
OutlineFamilyCopy
Purpose
Copy the current family items to the Clipboard.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyCopy ()
See Also
MoveModeEnd, OutlineFamilyCut, OutlineFamilySelect, OutlineFamilyMove
OutlineFamilyCut
Purpose
Delete the current family items and adjust the numbering.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyCut ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyCopy, OutlineFamilySelect, OutlineFamilyMove
OutlineFamilyDemote
Purpose
Demote the current family items to the next level and adjust the numbering.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyDemote ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyPromote, OutlineFamilySelect
OutlineFamilyDown
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the next outline family.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyDown ()
See Also
OutlineDown, OutlineFamilyLeft, OutlineFamilyRight, OutlineFamilyUp
OutlineFamilyDragDown
Purpose
Move the current family items below the next family and adjust the numbering. Recordable equivalent: OutlineParagraphDragDown.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyDragDown ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyDown, OutlineFamilyDragUp, OutlineFamilySelect, OutlineParagraphDragDown
OutlineFamilyDragUp
Purpose
Move the current family items above the previous family and adjust the numbering. Recordable equivalent: OutlineParagraphDragUp.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyDragUp ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyDragDown, OutlineFamilySelect, OutlineFamilyUp, OutlineParagraphDragUp
OutlineFamilyHide
Purpose
Hide all but the current level of the outline family.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyHide (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
HideBodyText!
ShowBodyText!
See Also
OutlineFamilySelect, OutlineFamilyShow
OutlineFamilyLeft
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous outline family.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyLeft ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyDown, OutlineFamilyRight, OutlineFamilyUp
OutlineFamilyMove
Purpose
Move an outline family.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyMove ()
See Also
MoveModeEnd, OutlineFamilyCopy, OutlineFamilyCut, OutlineFamilySelect
OutlineFamilyPromote
Purpose
Raise the current family items one level.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyPromote ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyDemote, OutlineFamilySelect
OutlineFamilyRight
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the next outline item, skipping body text.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyRight ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyDown, OutlineFamilyLeft, OutlineFamilyUp, OutlineRight
OutlineFamilySelect
Purpose
Select the current outline family, including body text.
Syntax
OutlineFamilySelect ()
See Also
OutlineParagraphSelect
OutlineFamilyShow
Purpose
Display or hide body text in the current outline family.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyShow (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
HideBodyText!
ShowBodyText!
See Also
OutlineFamilyHide
OutlineFamilyUp
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous outline family.
Syntax
OutlineFamilyUp ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyDown, OutlineFamilyLeft, OutlineFamilyRight, OutlineUp
OutlineHideShowingBodyText
Purpose
Hide all outline items and display the body text.
Syntax
OutlineHideShowingBodyText ()
See Also
OutlineBodyText
OutlineIconsDisplay
Purpose
Display the outline level icons.
Syntax
OutlineIconsDisplay (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
See Also
OutlineBarSetup
OutlineNumberDlg
Purpose
Display the Set Paragraph Number dialog box.
Syntax
OutlineNumberDlg ()
See Also
OutlineParagraphNumber
OutlineOff
Purpose
Close the Outline feature bar.
Syntax
OutlineOff ()
See Also
OutlineBarDisplay
OutlineParagraphCopy
Purpose
Copy the current outline item to the Clipboard.
Syntax
OutlineParagraphCopy ()
See Also
MoveModeEnd, OutlineParagraphDelete, OutlineParagraphMove, OutlineParagraphSelect
OutlineParagraphDelete
Purpose
Delete the current outline item and adjust the numbering.
Syntax
OutlineParagraphDelete ()
See Also
MoveModeEnd, OutlineParagraphCopy, OutlineParagraphMove, OutlineParagraphSelect
OutlineParagraphDemote
Purpose
Demote the current outline item one level and adjust the numbering.
Syntax
OutlineParagraphDemote ()
See Also
OutlineParagraphPromote, OutlineParagraphSelect
OutlineParagraphDragDown
Purpose
Move the current outline item down one item and adjust the numbering.
Syntax
OutlineParagraphDragDown ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyDragDown, OutlineParagraphDragUp, OutlineParagraphSelect
OutlineParagraphDragUp
Purpose
Move the current outline item up one item and adjust the numbering.
Syntax
OutlineParagraphDragUp ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyDragUp, OutlineParagraphDragDown, OutlineParagraphSelect
OutlineParagraphMove
Purpose
Delete the current outline item and adjust the numbering.
Syntax
OutlineParagraphMove ()
See Also
MoveModeEnd, OutlineParagraphCopy, OutlineParagraphDelete, OutlineParagraphSelect
OutlineParagraphNumber
Purpose
Specify an outline level. Default: current level.
Syntax
OutlineParagraphNumber (Level: numeric)
Parameters
Level
numeric (optional) Value: 1-8.
See Also
OutlineParagraphNumberInsert
OutlineParagraphNumberInsert
Purpose
Insert a paragraph number code [Para Num] in the current document at the insertion point.
Syntax
OutlineParagraphNumberInsert ()
See Also
OutlineParagraphNumber, OutlineSetParagraphNumber
OutlineParagraphPromote
Purpose
Promote the current outline item one level.
Syntax
OutlineParagraphPromote ()
See Also
OutlineParagraphDemote, OutlineParagraphSelect
OutlineParagraphSelect
Purpose
Select the current outline item or paragraph of body text.
Syntax
OutlineParagraphSelect ()
See Also
OutlineFamilySelect
OutlineRight
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the next outline item before the indent and number codes.
Syntax
OutlineRight ()
See Also
OutlineFamilyRight, OutlineUp
OutlineSetParagraphNumber
Purpose
Set the number for an outline item.
Syntax
OutlineSetParagraphNumber (WordString: string)
Parameters
WordString
string The outline paragraph setting number.
See Also
OutlineParagraphNumber, OutlineParagraphNumberInsert
OutlineShow
Purpose
Specify the lowest outline level to display and whether to show body text.
Syntax
OutlineShow (Level: numeric; State: enumeration)
Parameters
Level
numeric Value: 1-8.
State
enumeration
HideBodyText!
ShowBodyText!
See Also
OutlineBodyText, OutlineHideShowingBodyText
OutlineStyleCopy
Purpose
Copy an outline style.
Syntax
OutlineStyleCopy (Style: any; Source: enumeration; Destination: enumeration; NewName: string)
Parameters
Style
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Source
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
Destination
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
NewName
string (optional)
See Also
OutlineStyleDelete, OutlineStyleRetrieve, OutlineStyleSave, OutlineStyleSelect
OutlineStyleCreate
Purpose
Create, name, and save an outline style.
Syntax
OutlineStyleCreate (Style: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
string
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
OutlineBeginNew, OutlineStyleDelete, OutlineStyleEditEnd
OutlineStyleDelete
Purpose
Delete an outline style. Predefined outline styles cannot be deleted.
Syntax
OutlineStyleDelete (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
OutlineStyleCopy, OutlineStyleRetrieve, OutlineStyleSave, OutlineStyleSelect
OutlineStyleDescription
Purpose
Create an outline style description.
Syntax
OutlineStyleDescription (Description: string)
Parameters
Description
string
See Also
OutlineStyleEditBegin, OutlineStyleEditEnd
OutlineStyleEditBegin
Purpose
Begin editing an outline style.
Syntax
OutlineStyleEditBegin (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
OutlineStyleEditEnd
OutlineStyleEditEnd
Purpose
Save the outline style changes.
Syntax
OutlineStyleEditEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
See Also
OutlineStyleEditBegin
OutlineStyleLevel
Purpose
Specify an outline level and style.
Syntax
OutlineStyleLevel (Level: numeric; Style: any)
Parameters
Level
numeric Value: 1-8.
Style
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
See Also
OutlineStyleEditBegin, OutlineStyleNumberFormat
OutlineStyleNumberFormat
Purpose
Specify the numbering format for each level of a selected outline style.
Syntax
OutlineStyleNumberFormat (Level: numeric; Format: string)
Parameters
Level
numeric Value: 1-8.
Format
string The numbering format for each outline level. Select a system format or type a character expression to specify the format.
See Also
OutlineStyleEditBegin, OutlineStyleNumbersOnly
OutlineStyleNumbersOnly
Purpose
Apply the Numbers Only format to a selected outline.
Syntax
OutlineStyleNumbersOnly (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
OutlineStyleEditBegin, OutlineStyleEditEnd, OutlineStyleNumberFormat
OutlineStyleRename
Purpose
Rename a user-defined outline style.
Syntax
OutlineStyleRename (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string The new name.
See Also
OutlineStyleEditBegin, OutlineStyleEditEnd
OutlineStyleRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve an outline style.
Syntax
OutlineStyleRetrieve (Filename: string; Type: enumeration; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
Type
enumeration
AllStyles!
SystemStyles!
UserStyles!
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
OutlineStyleCopy, OutlineStyleDelete, OutlineStyleSave, OutlineStyleSelect
OutlineStyleSave
Purpose
Save an outline style.
Syntax
OutlineStyleSave (Filename: string; Type: enumeration; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
Type
enumeration
AllStyles!
SystemStyles!
UserStyles!
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
OutlineStyleCopy, OutlineStyleDelete, OutlineStyleRetrieve, OutlineStyleSelect
OutlineStyleSelect
Purpose
Select an outline style.
Syntax
OutlineStyleSelect (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any Use a string to specify a user-defined style.
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
See Also
OutlineStyleCopy, OutlineStyleDelete, OutlineStyleRetrieve, OutlineStyleSave
OutlineUp
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous outline paragraph, before indent and number codes.
Syntax
OutlineUp ()
See Also
OutlineDown
OverstrikeCreate
Purpose
Create an overstrike.
Syntax
OverstrikeCreate (OvrStrkStrg: string)
Parameters
OvrStrkStrg
string Two or more characters.
See Also
?Overstrike, OverstrikeCreateDlg, OverstrikeEdit
OverstrikeCreateDlg
Purpose
Display the Overstrike dialog box.
Syntax
OverstrikeCreateDlg ()
See Also
?Overstrike, OverstrikeCreate, OverstrikeEdit
OverstrikeEdit
Purpose
Replace the first overstrike to the right of the insertion point with the text in the OvrStrkStrg parameter.
Syntax
OverstrikeEdit (OvrStrkStrg: string)
Parameters
OvrStrkStrg
string The new overstrike characters.
See Also
?Overstrike, OverstrikeCreate, OverstrikeCreateDlg
PageBorderDlg
Purpose
Display the Page Border/Fill dialog box.
Syntax
PageBorderDlg ()
See Also
?PageBorder, FancyPageBorder
PageNumber
Purpose
Specify a new page number for the current page.
Syntax
PageNumber (Page: numeric)
Parameters
Page
numeric
See Also
?PageNumberingOn, PageNumberDisplay
PageNumberDecrement
Purpose
Decrease the current page number by one.
Syntax
PageNumberDecrement ()
See Also
PageNumberIncrement
PageNumberDisplay
Purpose
Insert the current page number at the insertion point.
Syntax
PageNumberDisplay ()
See Also
PageNumberDisplayFormat
PageNumberDisplayFormat
Purpose
Display a formatted page number at the insertion point in the current document window.
Syntax
PageNumberDisplayFormat ()
See Also
PageNumberDisplay, PageNumberFormat
PageNumberFormat
Purpose
Specify a page number format including text, page, total page, chapter, volume, or secondary page numbers.
Syntax
PageNumberFormat (Format: string)
Parameters
Format
string Combine macro function codes and text to create a page number format.
See Also
?PageNumberFormat, PageNumberDisplayFormat
PageNumberIncrement
Purpose
Increase the current page number by one.
Syntax
PageNumberIncrement ()
See Also
PageNumberDecrement
PageNumberingAdjustDlg
Purpose
Display the Value/Adjust Number dialog box.
Syntax
PageNumberingAdjustDlg ()
PageNumberingCountDlg
Purpose
Display the Page Count for Total Pages dialog box. Displaying this dialog box also updates the total page count.
Syntax
PageNumberingCountDlg ()
PageNumberingDlg
Purpose
Display the Select Page Numbering Format dialog box.
Syntax
PageNumberingDlg ()
PageNumberingInsertDlg
Purpose
Display the Insert Number in Text dialog box.
Syntax
PageNumberingInsertDlg ()
PageNumberMethod
Purpose
Specify a page numbering method.
Syntax
PageNumberMethod (Method: enumeration)
Parameters
Method
enumeration
LowerLetters!
LowerRoman!
Numbers!
UpperLetters!
UpperRoman!
See Also
?PageNumberMethod, ?ParagraphNumberMethod
PageNumberPosition
Purpose
Specify the position and appearance of page numbering. Use Font, Color, Shade, and Attributes parameters only if the Default parameter is DontUseDefaultValues!.
Syntax
PageNumberPosition (Position: enumeration; Default: enumeration; Font: string; FontSize: measurement; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; Shade: numeric; {Attributes: enumeration; })
Parameters
Position
enumeration
BottomAlternating!
BottomCenter!
BottomLeft!
BottomRight!
InsideTopAlternating!
None!
OutsideBottomAlternating!
TopAlternating!
TopCenter!
TopLeft!
TopRight!
Default
enumeration
DontUseDefaultValues!
UseDefaultValues!
Font
string (optional)
FontSize
measurement (optional)
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Shade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
Attributes
enumeration (optional)
|
Bold! |
Shadow! |
|
DoubleUnderline! |
Small! |
|
Every! |
SmallCaps! |
|
ExtraLarge! |
Strikeout! |
|
Fine! |
Subscript! |
|
Italics! |
Superscript! |
|
Large! |
Underline! |
|
Outline! |
VeryLarge! |
|
Redline! |
See Also
?PageNumberPosition
PageNumberSettingsDlg
Purpose
Display the Numbering Value dialog box.
Syntax
PageNumberSettingsDlg ()
PageSetupDlg
Purpose
Display the Page Setup dialog box.
Syntax
PageSetupDlg ()
PageSuppressDlg
Purpose
Display the Suppress dialog box.
Syntax
PageSuppressDlg ()
See Also
?PageSuppress
PageZoomFull
Purpose
Display Page view, then zoom the current page to Full Page.
Syntax
PageZoomFull ()
See Also
DisplayZoom, ZoomToFullPage
PaneNext
Purpose
Move the focus to the next pane in the Equation Editor.
Syntax
PaneNext ()
See Also
PanePrevious
PanePrevious
Purpose
Move the focus to the previous pane in the Equation Editor.
Syntax
PanePrevious ()
See Also
PaneNext
PaperSizeAdd
Purpose
Create a page definition for the Page Size dialog box. Use address position parameters if the Type parameter is Envelope!.
Syntax
PaperSizeAdd (Name: string; Width: measurement; Length: measurement; WidthAdjust: measurement; LengthAdjust: measurement; Flags: enumeration; Location: enumeration; Type: enumeration; Use: enumeration; ReturnAddressHoriz: measurement; ReturnAddressVert: measurement; MailingAddressHoriz: measurement; MailingAddressVert: measurement)
Parameters
Name
string Use if the Type parameter is Other!.
Width
measurement
Length
measurement
WidthAdjust
measurement Move the page contents left (positive value) or right (negative value).
LengthAdjust
measurement Move the page contents up (positive value) or down (negative value).
Flags
enumeration
FormCurrentlyLoaded!
Landscape!
LandscapeLoaded!
LandscapePrimaryLoaded!
Portrait!
PortraitLoaded!
PortraitPrimaryLoaded!
PrimaryForm!
Location
enumeration The printer paper feed.
Continuous!
Manual!
Type
enumeration
AllOthers!
Bond!
CardStock!
ClayBased!
Envelope!
Glossy!
Labels!
Letterhead!
Other!
Standard!
Transparency!
Use
enumeration (optional)
Europe!
Japan!
Latin_America!
None!
US!
ReturnAddressHoriz
measurement (optional)
ReturnAddressVert
measurement (optional)
MailingAddressHoriz
measurement (optional)
MailingAddressVert
measurement (optional)
See Also
?PaperSizeType, Binding, LabelsDefine, PaperSizeDelete, PaperSizeResave, PaperSizeSelect
PaperSizeDelete
Purpose
Delete a page definition.
Syntax
PaperSizeDelete (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string
See Also
?CurrentPaperName, PaperSizeAdd, PaperSizeDlg
PaperSizeDlg
Purpose
Display the Page Size dialog box.
Syntax
PaperSizeDlg ()
See Also
?CurrentPaperName, ?PaperSizeType, PaperSizeAdd, PaperSizeDelete, PaperSizeResave
PaperSizeResave
Purpose
Edit and save a page definition from the Page Size dialog box. Use address position parameters if the Type parameter is Envelope!.
Syntax
PaperSizeResave (OldName: string; NewName: string; Width: measurement; Length: measurement; WidthAdjustment: measurement; LengthAdjustment: measurement; Flags: enumeration; Location: enumeration; Type: enumeration; Use: enumeration; ReturnAddressHoriz: measurement; ReturnAddressVert: measurement; MailingAddressHoriz: measurement; MailingAddressVert: measurement)
Parameters
OldName
string
NewName
string
Width
measurement
Length
measurement
WidthAdjustment
measurement Move the page contents right (positive value) or left (negative value).
LengthAdjustment
measurement Move the page contents up (positive value) or down (negative value).
Flags
enumeration Specify the orientation.
FormCurrentlyLoaded!
Landscape!
LandscapeLoaded!
LandscapePrimaryLoaded!
Portrait!
PortraitLoaded!
PortraitPrimaryLoaded!
PrimaryForm!
Location
enumeration The printer paper feed.
Continuous!
Manual!
Type
enumeration
AllOthers!
Bond!
CardStock!
ClayBased!
Envelope!
Glossy!
Labels!
Letterhead!
Other!
Standard!
Transparency!
Use
enumeration
Europe!
Japan!
Latin_America!
None!
US!
ReturnAddressHoriz
measurement
ReturnAddressVert
measurement
MailingAddressHoriz
measurement
MailingAddressVert
measurement
See Also
?CurrentPaperName, PaperSizeAdd, PaperSizeDelete
PaperSizeSelect
Purpose
Specify a page size for the current document.
Syntax
PaperSizeSelect (Name: string; Width: measurement; Height: measurement; Type: enumeration)
Parameters
Name
string The name of a paper definition.
Width
measurement (optional)
Height
measurement (optional)
Type
enumeration (optional)
Bond!
Cardstock!
ClayBased!
Envelope!
Glossy!
Labels!
Letterhead!
Other!
Standard!
Transparency!
See Also
?CurrentPaperName, PaperSizeAdd, PaperSizeDelete, PaperSizeResave
ParagraphBorderDlg
Purpose
Display the Paragraph Border/Fill dialog box.
Syntax
ParagraphBorderDlg ()
See Also
?ParagraphBorder
ParagraphBreakShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro PARABRK.WCM to display the Paragraph Breaks dialog box, where graphical paragraph break markers can be edited and selected to insert after the next [HRt]. PARABRK.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
ParagraphBreakShippingMacro ()
ParagraphDown
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the next paragraph (after [HRt] or [HRt]). Recordable substitute: PosParagraphNext.
Syntax
ParagraphDown ()
See Also
ParagraphUp, PosParagraphNext
ParagraphFormatDlg
Purpose
Display the Paragraph Format dialog box.
Syntax
ParagraphFormatDlg ()
ParagraphHangingIndent
Purpose
Align the first line of a paragraph with the left margin and indent the remaining lines to the next tab stop.
Syntax
ParagraphHangingIndent ()
ParagraphNumberDefDlg
Purpose
Display the Change Outline Level dialog box.
Syntax
ParagraphNumberDefDlg ()
See Also
?ParagraphNumber, ?ParagraphNumberMethod
ParagraphSetNumber
Purpose
Specify the level and starting value for paragraph numbering.
Syntax
ParagraphSetNumber (Level: numeric; StartValue: numeric)
Parameters
Level
numeric
StartValue
numeric
See Also
?ParagraphNumber, ?ParagraphNumberMethod
ParagraphSpacing
Purpose
Specify the spacing between paragraphs. Default: font point size plus two points.
Syntax
ParagraphSpacing (AmtSpc: numeric)
Parameters
AmtSpc
numeric Default: 1.0.
See Also
?SpacingBelowPar
ParagraphUp
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous paragraph. Recordable substitute: PosParagraphPrevious.
Syntax
ParagraphUp ()
See Also
ParagraphDown, PosParagraphPrevious
Paste
Purpose
Paste the Clipboard contents at the insertion point.
Syntax
Paste ()
See Also
Copy, CopyAndPaste, Cut
PasteLink
Purpose
Insert an object from the Clipboard into the current document, thus creating a link with the server application that created the object.
Syntax
PasteLink (FormatName: string; FormatId: numeric; LinkType: enumeration)
Parameters
FormatName
string The format of the linked object. Consult your server application's documentation for a valid format name.
FormatId
numeric The identification number of the format of the linked object. Consult your server application's documentation for a valid format ID.
LinkType
enumeration
Dde!
Ole!
See Also
Paste
PauseCommand
Purpose
Pause a macro until a specified macro command is executed. For example, Enter executes the HardReturn command. PauseCommand does not prompt the user to press a key, so it is often used with PROMPT.
Syntax
PauseCommand (Token: command name)
Parameters
Token
command name
See Also
MacroPause, PauseKey
PauseKey
Purpose
Pause a macro until a specified key or character is pressed.
Syntax
PauseKey (Key: enumeration; Character: string)
Parameters
Key
enumeration The key to resume macro execution. Default: Enter!. Any! resumes when any key is pressed, including Backspace, Delete, and Ctrl+Enter.
Any!
Cancel!
Character!
Close!
Enter!
Character
string (optional) The case-sensitive character that resumes macro execution when pressed. Use if the Key parameter is Character!.
See Also
?PauseKey, MacroPause, PauseCommand
PauseSet
Purpose
Specify a command to replace a [HRt] that ends a PAUSE command.
Syntax
PauseSet (Token: command name)
Parameters
Token
command name A command to resume a paused macro. Usually represents a keystroke.
See Also
MacroPause, PauseKey, PauseSet
PerfectExpert
Purpose
Open the User Assistant.
Syntax
PerfectExpert ()
PersonalInfoDlg
Purpose
Display the Corel Address Book with the personal information record selected. If the personal information has not been previously specified, the first record in the current address book is selected.
Syntax
boolean := PersonalInfoDlg ()
See Also
AddressBookDlg
PersonalInfoFormatAddr
Purpose
Return the personal information stored in the address book using the specified format.
Syntax
string := PersonalInfoFormatAddr (Format: string)
Parameters
Format
string The format specification used when returning the personal information. Use AddressBookFormatGetFormat or AddressBookFormatGetCurrent to retrieve an address format specification.
See Also
PersonalInfoDlg, AddressBookSelectionFormatAddr, AddressBookFormatAdd, AddressBookFormatGetFormat, AddressBookFormatGetCurrent
PersonalInfoGetField
Purpose
Return the value of a field from the current personal information stored in the address book.
Syntax
string := PersonalInfoGetField (Field: any)
Parameters
Field
any If this parameter is a number, the command will try to return the value of the field with that code number. If this parameter is a string, the command will try to return the value of the field with that name.
See Also
AddressBookSelectionGetField
PlayClipBoardShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro READCLP.WCM to speak Clipboard text. READCLP.WCM must be installed. ProVoice or Monologue text-to-speech software is required.
Syntax
PlayClipBoardShippingMacro ()
PlayFileShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro READFILE.WCM to speak a text file or play a .WAV, .AVI, or .MID file. READFILE.WCM must be installed. ProVoice or Monologue text-to-speech software is required.
Syntax
PlayFileShippingMacro ()
PlaySelectionShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro READSEL.WCM to speak selected text. Not recordable. READSEL.WCM must be installed. ProVoice or Monologue text-to-speech software is required.
Syntax
PlaySelectionShippingMacro ()
PleadingShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro PLEADING.WCM to display the Pleading Paper dialog box, in which you specify and generate pleading options. PLEADING.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
PleadingShippingMacro ()
PosBlockBeg
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the selected text, then deselect the text. Included for DOS compatibility. Windows equivalent: PosSelectTop.
Syntax
PosBlockBeg ()
See Also
PosBlockBottom, PosBlockTop, PosSelectTop
PosBlockBottom
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the bottom of the selected text. Included for DOS compatibility. Windows equivalent: PosSelectBottom.
Syntax
PosBlockBottom ()
See Also
PosBlockBeg, PosBlockTop, PosSelectBottom
PosBlockTop
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the top of the selected text. Included for DOS compatibility. Windows equivalent: PosSelectTop.
Syntax
PosBlockTop ()
See Also
PosBlockBeg, PosBlockBottom, PosSelectTop
PosCellDown
Purpose
Move the insertion point down one row. Recordable equivalent: PosTableCellDown.
Syntax
PosCellDown ()
See Also
PosTableCellDown
PosCellNext
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the next cell in the current table. If the insertion point is in the last cell of a table, the insertion point is moved to the beginning of that cell. Recordable equivalent: PosTableTopCellNext.
Syntax
PosCellNext ()
See Also
PosTableCellNext
PosCellPrevious
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous cell in the current table. If the insertion point is in the first cell of a table, the insertion point is moved to the beginning of that cell. Recordable equivalent: PosTableCellPrevious.
Syntax
PosCellPrevious ()
See Also
PosTableCellPrevious
PosCellUp
Purpose
Move the insertion point up one cell. Recordable equivalent: PosTableCellUp.
Syntax
PosCellUp ()
See Also
PosTableCellUp
PosCharacter
Purpose
Move the insertion point forward to a specified character. Maximum forward movement is 2,000 characters. Case sensitive. If the specified character is not found, this command does nothing. Not recordable.
Syntax
PosCharacter (CharToMoveTo: string)
Parameters
CharToMoveTo
string The single search character.
See Also
PosCharNext, PosCharPrevious
PosCharNext
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the next character to the right.
Syntax
PosCharNext ()
See Also
PosCharacter, PosCharPrevious
PosCharPrevious
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the previous character.
Syntax
PosCharPrevious ()
See Also
PosCharacter, PosCharNext
PosColBottom
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the last line before a page break. Move to the end of the document if there is no page breaks. In columns, move the insertion point to the beginning of the last line of the column. In tables, move to the beginning of the last line of the last cell in the current column that contains data.
Syntax
PosColBottom ()
See Also
PosColTop
PosColFirst
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the line. In columns, move the insertion point to the beginning of the line in the first column. In tables, no effect.
Syntax
PosColFirst ()
See Also
PosColLast
PosColLast
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the current line. In columns, move the insertion point to the beginning of the current line in the last column. In tables, this command has no effect.
Syntax
PosColLast ()
See Also
PosColFirst
PosColNext
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the current line in the next column or to the current line in the current row of the next table column.
Syntax
PosColNext ()
See Also
PosColPrevious
PosColPrevious
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the current line in the previous column or to the beginning of the current row and line in the previous table column.
Syntax
PosColPrevious ()
See Also
PosColNext
PosColTop
Purpose
In columns, move the insertion point to the beginning of the current column. In tables, move to the beginning of the current row in the previous column. If there are multiple lines in the current cell, move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous line in the current cell. In regular (non-column) text, move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous line.
Syntax
PosColTop ()
See Also
PosColBottom
PosDocBottom
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the end of the document, after all codes.
Syntax
PosDocBottom ()
See Also
PosDocTop
PosDocTop
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the document, after any initial codes.
Syntax
PosDocTop ()
See Also
PosDocBottom, PosDocVeryTop
PosDocVeryTop
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of a document, before any codes.
Syntax
PosDocVeryTop ()
See Also
PosDocTop
PosFunction
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the right of the next occurrence of the code specified in the Function parameter.
Syntax
PosFunction (Function: enumeration)
Parameters
Function
enumeration
CancelHyphenation!
HardEndOfLine!
HardHyphen!
HardSpace!
SoftEndOfLine!
Tab!
See Also
PosCharacter
PosGoPrevious
Purpose
Move the insertion point to its previous position.
Syntax
PosGoPrevious ()
See Also
PosGoToDlg
PosGoToDlg
Purpose
Display the Go To dialog box.
Syntax
PosGoToDlg ()
See Also
PosGoPrevious
PosLineBeg
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the current line.
Syntax
PosLineBeg ()
See Also
?Position, PosLineDown, PosLineEnd, PosLineUp, PosLineVeryBeg, PosLineVeryEnd
PosLineDown
Purpose
Move the insertion point down one line.
Syntax
PosLineDown ()
See Also
?Position, PosLineBeg, PosLineEnd, PosLineUp, PosLineVeryBeg, PosLineVeryEnd
PosLineEnd
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the end of the current line.
Syntax
PosLineEnd ()
See Also
?Position, PosLineBeg, PosLineDown, PosLineUp, PosLineVeryBeg, PosLineVeryEnd
PosLineUp
Purpose
Move the insertion point up one line.
Syntax
PosLineUp ()
See Also
?Position, PosLineBeg, PosLineDown, PosLineEnd, PosLineVeryBeg, PosLineVeryEnd
PosLineVeryBeg
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of a line, before codes.
Syntax
PosLineVeryBeg ()
See Also
?Position, PosLineBeg, PosLineDown, PosLineEnd, PosLineUp, PosLineVeryEnd
PosLineVeryEnd
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the end of the current line after codes, except [HRt] and [SRt].
Syntax
PosLineVeryEnd ()
See Also
?Position, PosLineBeg, PosLineDown, PosLineEnd, PosLineUp, PosLineVeryBeg
PosPage
Purpose
Move the insertion point to a specified page.
Syntax
PosPage (Volume: enumeration; Chapter: enumeration; Page: enumeration; Direction: enumeration)
Parameters
Volume
enumeration
NoneSpecified!
Chapter
enumeration
NoneSpecified!
Page
enumeration
NoneSpecified!
Direction
enumeration (optional)
Down!
Up!
See Also
PosGoToDlg
PosPageBottom
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the last line on the current page. On the last page of a document, move to the end of the last line.
Syntax
PosPageBottom ()
See Also
PosPageNext, PosPagePrevious, PosPageTop
PosPageNext
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the next page. On the last page of the document, move to the end.
Syntax
PosPageNext ()
See Also
PosPageBottom, PosPagePrevious, PosPageTop
PosPagePrevious
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous page. On the first page of the document, move to the top of the page.
Syntax
PosPagePrevious ()
See Also
PosPageBottom, PosPageNext, PosPageTop
PosPageTop
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the current page. In columns, move to the beginning of the current column.
Syntax
PosPageTop ()
See Also
PosPageBottom, PosPageNext, PosPagePrevious
PosParagraphNext
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the next paragraph. In the last paragraph of a document, move to the end.
Syntax
PosParagraphNext ()
See Also
PosParagraphPrevious
PosParagraphPrevious
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the current paragraph. At the beginning of a paragraph, move to the beginning of the previous paragraph.
Syntax
PosParagraphPrevious ()
See Also
PosParagraphNext
PosScreenDown
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the bottom of the screen, then down one screen at a time with each repetition of the command.
Syntax
PosScreenDown ()
See Also
PosScreenLeft, PosScreenRight, PosScreenUp, SelectScreenDown
PosScreenLeft
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the left edge of the screen, then left one screen at a time with each repetition of the command.
Syntax
PosScreenLeft ()
See Also
PosScreenDown, PosScreenRight, PosScreenUp, SelectScreenLeft
PosScreenRight
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the right edge of the screen, then right one screen at a time with each repetition of the command.
Syntax
PosScreenRight ()
See Also
PosScreenDown, PosScreenLeft, PosScreenUp, SelectScreenRight
PosScreenUp
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the top of the screen, then up one screen at a time with each repetition of the command.
Syntax
PosScreenUp ()
See Also
PosScreenDown, PosScreenLeft, PosScreenRight, SelectScreenUp
PosSelectBottom
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the end of the selected text.
Syntax
PosSelectBottom ()
See Also
PosSelectTop
PosSelectTop
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of selected text.
Syntax
PosSelectTop ()
See Also
PosSelectBottom
PosTableBegin
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the first cell of a table.
Syntax
PosTableBegin ()
See Also
PosTableEnd, PosTableRowBegin
PosTableBlockBeg
Purpose
Deselect all selected table cells except the first cell in the selection.
Syntax
PosTableBlockBeg ()
See Also
PosTableEnd
PosTableCell
Purpose
Move the insertion point to a specified cell.
Syntax
PosTableCell (Cell: string)
Parameters
Cell
string
PosTableCellBottom
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the last line in a cell.
Syntax
PosTableCellBottom ()
See Also
PosTableCellTop
PosTableCellDown
Purpose
Move the insertion point down one table row to the beginning of the first line in the cell.
Syntax
PosTableCellDown ()
See Also
PosTableCellUp
PosTableCellNext
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the next cell.
Syntax
PosTableCellNext ()
See Also
PosTableCellPrevious
PosTableCellPrevious
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous cell. If there are two or more lines in the current cell but only one line in the previous cell, move to the beginning of the previous cell. If there are one or more lines in both the current and previous cells, move to the beginning of the current line in the previous cell.
Syntax
PosTableCellPrevious ()
See Also
PosTableCellNext
PosTableCellTop
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the cell.
Syntax
PosTableCellTop ()
See Also
PosTableCellBottom
PosTableCellUp
Purpose
Move the insertion point up one table cell.
Syntax
PosTableCellUp ()
See Also
PosTableCellDown
PosTableColBottom
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the last cell in the current column. If select mode is on, the selection is extended.
Syntax
PosTableColBottom ()
See Also
PosTableColumnBottom
PosTableColumnBottom
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the last cell in the current column. If select mode is on, select mode is turned off before the insertion point moves.
Syntax
PosTableColumnBottom ()
See Also
PosTableColumnTop
PosTableColumnTop
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the table column.
Syntax
PosTableColumnTop ()
See Also
PosTableColumnBottom
PosTableEnd
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the last table cell.
Syntax
PosTableEnd ()
See Also
PosTableBegin, PosTableRowBegin, PosTableRowEnd
PosTableGoPrevious
Purpose
Return the insertion point to its previous position in a table.
Syntax
PosTableGoPrevious ()
PosTableRowBegin
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the current row.
Syntax
PosTableRowBegin ()
See Also
PosTableBegin, PosTableRowEnd
PosTableRowEnd
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the last cell in the row.
Syntax
PosTableRowEnd ()
See Also
PosTableEnd, PosTableRowBegin
PosTableScreenDown
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the last complete cell of the current column in the current screen, and down one screen with each repetition of the command.
Syntax
PosTableScreenDown ()
See Also
PosTableScreenLeft, PosTableScreenRight, PosTableScreenUp
PosTableScreenLeft
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the first complete cell in the row, and left one screen at a time with each repetition.
Syntax
PosTableScreenLeft ()
See Also
PosTableScreenDown, PosTableScreenRight, PosTableScreenUp
PosTableScreenRight
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the last complete table cell of the row in the current screen, and right one screen at a time with each repetition.
Syntax
PosTableScreenRight ()
See Also
PosTableScreenDown, PosTableScreenLeft, PosTableScreenUp
PosTableScreenUp
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of first table cell of the screen in a table, and up one screen with each repetition.
Syntax
PosTableScreenUp ()
See Also
PosTableScreenDown, PosTableScreenLeft, PosTableScreenRight
PosTableTopCellNext
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the next cell. If the cells contain two or more lines, move to the beginning of the current line in the next cell. If the insertion point is in the last cell of a table, a new table row is created at the bottom of the table.
Syntax
PosTableTopCellNext ()
See Also
PosTableTopCellPrevious
PosTableTopCellPrevious
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the top of the previous table cell.
Syntax
PosTableTopCellPrevious ()
See Also
PosTableTopCellNext
PosWordNext
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the next word. Words separated by two hyphens or an em dash are treated as one word.
Syntax
PosWordNext ()
See Also
PosCellNext, PosColNext, PosPageNext, PosWordPrevious
PosWordPrevious
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous word. If the insertion point is located within a word, the insertion point is moved to the beginning of the current word. Words separated by two hyphens or an em dash are treated as one word.
Syntax
PosWordPrevious ()
See Also
PosCellPrevious, PosColPrevious, PosPagePrevious, PosWordNext
PowerBarEditDlg
Purpose
Display the Toolbar Editor - Power Bar dialog box.
Syntax
PowerBarEditDlg ()
See Also
ButtonBarEditDlg, PrefPowerBarEdit
PowerBarOptionsDlg
Purpose
Display the Power Bar Options dialog box.
Syntax
PowerBarOptionsDlg ()
See Also
ButtonBarOptionsDlg, PrefPowerBar, PrefPowerBarEdit
PowerBarShow
Purpose
Display (On!) or hide (Off!) the Power Bar. If no parameter is specified, this command toggles the Power Bar display.
Syntax
PowerBarShow (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
See Also
?PowerBarActive, ViewToolbarsDlg
PowerTableNumericFormat
Purpose
Change the number format of a cell.
Syntax
PowerTableNumericFormat ()
See Also
TableNumberFormat
PrefApplicationBarEdit
Purpose
Edit the Application Bar by adding or removing items.
Syntax
PrefApplicationBarEdit (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
PrefBackupPath
Purpose
Specify the document backup directory and whether to update the QuickList.
Syntax
PrefBackupPath (BackupDir: string; UpdateQuickList: enumeration)
Parameters
BackupDir
string (optional)
UpdateQuickList
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
PrefBeep
Purpose
Specify when to turn Beep on or off.
Syntax
PrefBeep (Error: enumeration; Hyphenation: enumeration; SearchFailure: enumeration)
Parameters
Error
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
Hyphenation
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
SearchFailure
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
See Also
PrefEnvSettingsDlg, PrefSave
PrefButtonBar
Purpose
Display the Toolbar Settings dialog box.
Syntax
PrefButtonBar ()
PrefDisplayDlg
Purpose
Display the Display Settings dialog box.
Syntax
PrefDisplayDlg ()
PrefDisplaySet
Purpose
Specify how to display features.
Syntax
PrefDisplaySet (DefaultView: enumeration; ShowTableGridLines: enumeration; ShowComments: enumeration; ShowGraphics: enumeration; TextInSystemColors: enumeration; ShowHiddenText: enumeration; SculpturedDialogs: enumeration; VerticalScrollBar: enumeration; HorizontalScrollBar: enumeration; ShowHotSpots: enumeration; ShowShadowCursor: enumeration; ShowTabBarIcons: enumeration)
Parameters
DefaultView
enumeration (optional)
ViewDraft!
ViewPage!
ViewTwoPage!
ShowTableGridLines
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
ShowComments
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
ShowGraphics
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
TextInSystemColors
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
ShowHiddenText
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
SculpturedDialogs
enumeration (optional) No effect in version 7.
No!
Yes!
VerticalScrollBar
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
HorizontalScrollBar
enumeration (optional)
Hide!
Show!
WhenRequired!
ShowHotSpots
enumeration (optional) Set the QuickSpot display state.
No!
Yes!
ShowShadowCursor
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
ShowTabBarIcons
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
CommentsDisplaySetup, QuickSpotsShow, ShadowCursorShow, TabBarIconShow
PrefDocSummary
Purpose
Specify subject search text and default descriptive type for a document summary, and whether to create the summary automatically when saving a document.
Syntax
PrefDocSummary (SubjectSearchText: string; DefaultDescriptiveType: string; CreateOnExit: enumeration; UseDescrOnOpen: enumeration; MakeFilenameDescrOnSaveAs: enumeration)
Parameters
SubjectSearchText
string (optional) The text before the subject line.
DefaultDescriptiveType
string (optional)
CreateOnExit
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
UseDescrOnOpen
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
MakeFilenameDescrOnSaveAs
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
?SaveDocumentSummaryOnExit, PrefDocSummaryDlg, PrefSave
PrefDocSummaryDlg
Purpose
Display the Document Summary Settings dialog box.
Syntax
PrefDocSummaryDlg ()
See Also
PrefDocSummary
PrefEnvironment
Purpose
Specify environment Settings.
Syntax
PrefEnvironment (UserName: string; UserInitials: string; UserColorRed: numeric; UserColorGreen: numeric; UserColorBlue: numeric; ConfirmCodeDeletion: enumeration; ConfirmTableFormulaDeletion: enumeration; SetQuickMarkOnSave: enumeration; ActivateHypertext: enumeration; FormatForDefaultPrinter: enumeration; SaveWorkSpace: enumeration; AutoWordSelect: enumeration; GoToQuickMarkOnOpen: enumeration)
Parameters
UserName
string (optional)
UserInitials
string (optional) The user ID.
UserColorRed
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
UserColorGreen
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
UserColorBlue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
ConfirmCodeDeletion
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
ConfirmTableFormulaDeletion
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
SetQuickMarkOnSave
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
ActivateHypertext
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
FormatForDefaultPrinter
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
SaveWorkSpace
enumeration (optional) Save the current WorkSpace on exit.
Always!
Never!
PromptOnExit!
AutoWordSelect
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
GoToQuickMarkOnOpen
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
?ActivateHypertext, ?AutoWordSelect
PrefEnvSettingsDlg
Purpose
Display the Environment Settings dialog box.
Syntax
PrefEnvSettingsDlg ()
PrefHyphenation
Purpose
Turn on Hyphenation and specify prompt conditions.
Syntax
PrefHyphenation (Prompt: enumeration)
Parameters
Prompt
enumeration (optional)
Always!
Never!
WhenRequired!
See Also
PrefEnvSettingsDlg, PrefSave
PrefImportDlg
Purpose
Display the Convert Settings dialog box.
Syntax
PrefImportDlg ()
PrefImportOptions
Purpose
Specify how certain characters are interpreted during document imports.
Syntax
PrefImportOptions (FieldDelimiters: string; RecordDelimiters: string; StripCharacter: string; EncapsulationCharacter: string)
Parameters
FieldDelimiters
string (optional)
RecordDelimiters
string (optional)
StripCharacter
string (optional)
EncapsulationCharacter
string (optional)
PrefLanguageSet
Purpose
Specify a language.
Syntax
PrefLanguageSet (LanguageCode: string)
Parameters
LanguageCode
string
PrefLiteCodes
Purpose
Display document symbols in new and current document windows.
Syntax
PrefLiteCodes (Show: enumeration; Space: enumeration; HardReturn: enumeration; Tab: enumeration; Indent: enumeration; SoftHyphen: enumeration; Advance: enumeration; Center: enumeration; CenterPage: enumeration; FlushRight: enumeration)
Parameters
Show
enumeration (optional) Display document symbols.
No!
Yes!
Space
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
HardReturn
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
Tab
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
Indent
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
SoftHyphen
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
Advance
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
Center
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
CenterPage
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
FlushRight
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
PrefLocationDlg
Purpose
Display the File Settings dialog box.
Syntax
PrefLocationDlg ()
PrefLocationOfDocuments
Purpose
Specify the location of document and backup files and the default file format.
Syntax
PrefLocationOfDocuments (Path: string; UseDefExt: enumeration; DefExt: string; UpdateQuickList: enumeration; DefFormat: string; UseExplorerStyleFileDialogs: enumeration)
Parameters
Path
string (optional)
UseDefExt
enumeration (optional) Use the default extension on Open and Save.
No!
Yes!
DefExt
string (optional) The default filename extension.
UpdateQuickList
enumeration (optional) Update the QuickList with changes.
No!
Yes!
DefFormat
string (optional) The default document file format.
UseExplorerStyleFileDialogs
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
PrefLocationOfGraphicsFiles
Purpose
Specify the location of graphics files.
Syntax
PrefLocationOfGraphicsFiles (GraphicsDir: string; GraphicsSupplDir: string; UpdateQuickList: enumeration; GraphicsFancyBordersDir: string)
Parameters
GraphicsDir
string (optional)
GraphicsSupplDir
string (optional) The graphics supplemental directory.
UpdateQuickList
enumeration (optional) Update the QuickList with changes.
No!
Yes!
GraphicsFancyBordersDir
string (optional)
PrefLocationOfMacroFiles
Purpose
Specify the location of macro files.
Syntax
PrefLocationOfMacroFiles (MacroDir: string; MacroSupplDir: string; UpdateQuickList: enumeration)
Parameters
MacroDir
string (optional)
MacroSupplDir
string (optional) The macro supplemental directory.
UpdateQuickList
enumeration (optional) Update the QuickList with changes.
No!
Yes!
PrefLocationOfPrinterFiles
Purpose
Specify the location of label files and set related options.
Syntax
PrefLocationOfPrinterFiles (PrinterDir: string; PrinterSupplDir: string; LabelFile: string; LabelsDisplay: enumeration; UpdateQuickList: enumeration)
Parameters
PrinterDir
string (optional) Formerly, the Printer directory was used to store
Corel WordPerfect printer driver and label files. Corel WordPerfect printer driver files were not used in Corel WordPerfect 8 and 7. Therefore, this directory is used for label files only.
PrinterSupplDir
string (optional) This parameter is obsolete.
LabelFile
string (optional) The label filename, including the full path.
LabelsDisplay
enumeration (optional)
DisplayBoth!
DisplayLaser!
DisplayTractorFed!
UpdateQuickList
enumeration (optional) Update the QuickList with changes.
No!
Yes!
See Also
?PathLabels, ?PathPrinters
PrefLocationOfSpreadsheetFiles
Purpose
Specify the location of spreadsheet and database files.
Syntax
PrefLocationOfSpreadsheetFiles (SpreadsheetDir: string; SpreadsheetSupplDir: string; DatabaseDir: string; DatabaseSupplDir: string; UpdateQuickList: enumeration)
Parameters
SpreadsheetDir
string (optional)
SpreadsheetSupplDir
string (optional) The supplemental spreadsheet directory.
DatabaseDir
string (optional)
DatabaseSupplDir
string (optional) The supplemental database directory.
UpdateQuickList
enumeration (optional) Update the QuickList with changes.
No!
Yes!
PrefLocationOfTemplates
Purpose
Specify the location of template files.
Syntax
PrefLocationOfTemplates (TemplateDir: string; TemplateSupplPath: string; File: string; SupplFile: string; DefExt: string; UpdateQuickList: enumeration; UpdateDefaultTemplate: enumeration)
Parameters
TemplateDir
string (optional)
TemplateSupplPath
string (optional) The supplemental directory.
File
string (optional) The templates filename.
SupplFile
string (optional) The supplemental filename.
DefExt
string (optional) The default filename extension.
UpdateQuickList
enumeration (optional) Update the QuickList with changes.
No!
Yes!
UpdateDefaultTemplate
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
PrefMenu
Purpose
Display Quick Tips, shortcut keys next to menu items, and the most recently opened documents at the bottom of the File menu.
Syntax
PrefMenu (DisplayShortcuts: enumeration; DisplayLastOpened: enumeration; DisplayHelpPrompts: enumeration)
Parameters
DisplayShortcuts
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
DisplayLastOpened
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
DisplayHelpPrompts
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
PrefEnvSettingsDlg, PrefSave
PrefMergeCodes
Purpose
Change how merge codes appear in the document.
Syntax
PrefMergeCodes (Show: enumeration)
Parameters
Show
enumeration
Hide!
Show!
ShowAsBars!
ShowAsMarkers!
PrefMergeExtensions
Purpose
Specify merge form and data file extension options.
Syntax
PrefMergeExtensions (UseDefaultFormExt: enumeration; FormFileExt: string; UseDefaultDataExt: enumeration; DataFileExt: string)
Parameters
UseDefaultFormExt
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
FormFileExt
string (optional)
UseDefaultDataExt
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
DataFileExt
string (optional)
See Also
MergeFileType, PrefSave
PrefMetafileOptions
Purpose
Specify what format to use for imported graphics files.
Syntax
PrefMetafileOptions (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration Convert to Corel WordPerfect (.WPG) format, retain both formats, or retain Metafile (.WMF) format.
ConvertToWPG!
RetainWindowsAndWPG!
RetainWindowsFormat!
PrefPowerBar
Purpose
Specify how the Power Bar looks.
Syntax
PrefPowerBar (Font: string; Size: numeric; Style: enumeration; ShowQuickTips: enumeration)
Parameters
Font
string (optional) The font face.
Size
numeric (optional) The font size.
Style
enumeration (optional) A button style.
Picture!
PictureAndText!
Text!
ShowQuickTips
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
PrefPowerBarEdit
Purpose
Open and close the Power Bar Settings dialog box.
Syntax
PrefPowerBarEdit (Action: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration (optional)
Enter!
Exit!
PrefPrintEnvironment
Purpose
Turn Reformat documents for the WordPerfect default printer on open on or off.
Syntax
PrefPrintEnvironment (FormatForDefaultPrinter: enumeration)
Parameters
FormatForDefaultPrinter
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?FormatForDefaultPrinter
PrefPrintRedline
Purpose
Specify the default method and character of redlined text for new documents. Follow this command with PrefSave to save the setting for future Corel WordPerfect sessions. Use RedlineMethod and RedlineCharacter to change the redline method and/or character of the current document.
Syntax
PrefPrintRedline (Method: enumeration; Character: string)
Parameters
Method
enumeration (optional) Accept the printer setting, or specify a column of characters down the right, left, or alternating sides of redlined text.
Alternating!
Left!
PrinterDependent!
Right!
Character
string (optional) The character to display down the side of redlined text. Omit if Method parameter is PrinterDependent!.
See Also
PrefSave, RedlineCharacter, RedlineMethod
PrefPrintSizeRatio
Purpose
Specify the size for each font attribute as a percent of the selected font size.
Syntax
PrefPrintSizeRatio (Fine: numeric; Small: numeric; Large: numeric; VeryLarge: numeric; ExtraLarge: numeric; SuperSubscript: numeric)
Parameters
Fine
numeric (optional) Value: 1-100.
Small
numeric (optional) Value: 1-100.
Large
numeric (optional) Value: 1-100.
VeryLarge
numeric (optional) Value: 1-100.
ExtraLarge
numeric (optional) Value: 1-100.
SuperSubscript
numeric (optional) Value: 1-100.
See Also
PrefSave
PrefRevealCodes
Purpose
Specify Reveal Code Settings.
Syntax
PrefRevealCodes (FontFace: string; FontSize: numeric; WindowSize: numeric; ShowOnNew: enumeration; ShowSpacesAsBullets: enumeration; WrapAtWindow: enumeration; ShowInDetail: enumeration; Sculptured: enumeration; ForeColorRed: numeric; ForeColorGreen: numeric; ForeColorBlue: numeric; BackColorRed: numeric; BackColorGreen: numeric; BackColorBlue: numeric; ShowHelpPrompts: enumeration; UseSystemColors: enumeration)
Parameters
FontFace
string (optional)
FontSize
numeric (optional)
WindowSize
numeric (optional) A percent of the screen.
ShowOnNew
enumeration (optional) Display the codes in current and new documents.
No!
Yes!
ShowSpacesAsBullets
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
WrapAtWindow
enumeration (optional) Wrap the lines at the window edge.
No!
Yes!
ShowInDetail
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
Sculptured
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
ForeColorRed
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
ForeColorGreen
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
ForeColorBlue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
BackColorRed
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
BackColorGreen
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
BackColorBlue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
ShowHelpPrompts
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
UseSystemColors
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
PrefRevealCodesDlg
PrefRevealCodesDlg
Purpose
Display the Display Settings dialog box with Reveal Codes selected.
Syntax
PrefRevealCodesDlg ()
See Also
PrefRevealCodes
PrefRuler
Purpose
Specify how the Ruler looks.
Syntax
PrefRuler (RulerOnNew: enumeration; TabsToGrid: enumeration; ShowRulerGuides: enumeration; SculpturedRuler: enumeration)
Parameters
RulerOnNew
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
TabsToGrid
enumeration (optional) Tabs “snap” to invisible grid lines every 1/16th of an inch or 1/5th of a centimeter.
No!
Yes!
ShowRulerGuides
enumeration (optional) Display a Ruler Bar guide when tab stops move.
No!
Yes!
SculpturedRuler
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
PrefEnvSettingsDlg, PrefSave
PrefSave
Purpose
Save preference command changes as defaults for future sessions.
Syntax
PrefSave ()
See Also
PrefPrintRedline
PrefStatusBar
Purpose
Specify default status bar items, their position, and their width. Precede and follow with PrefStatusBarEdit.
Syntax
PrefStatusBar ({Box: enumeration; Position: numeric; Width: numeric; })
Parameters
Box
enumeration (optional) Specify an item to display or hide on the status bar. Repeat Box, Position, and Width parameters for each item. Enclose repeated parameters in braces ({}) separated by semicolons.
|
AlignChar! |
Outline! |
|
CapsLockState! |
Page! |
|
CombinedAbsPosition! |
Position! |
|
CombinedPosition! |
Printer! |
|
Date! |
ScrollLockState! |
|
Font! |
Select! |
|
GeneralStatus! |
Time! |
|
InsertMode! |
Time12! |
|
Keyboard! |
Time24! |
|
Line! |
Zoom! |
|
NumLockState! |
Position
numeric (optional)
Width
numeric (optional)
PrefStatusBarEdit
Purpose
Edit the default status bar. Precede with PrefStatusBar. Default: toggle.
Syntax
PrefStatusBarEdit (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
PrefStatusBarOptions
Purpose
Specify the size and font of the status bar text.
Syntax
PrefStatusBarOptions (FontFace: string; FontSize: numeric; Bold: enumeration; BoxStyle: enumeration; EvenSpaced: enumeration)
Parameters
FontFace
string (optional)
FontSize
numeric (optional)
Bold
enumeration (optional) Bold status bar font.
No!
Yes!
BoxStyle
enumeration (optional)
Flat!
Inset!
Raised!
EvenSpaced
enumeration (optional) Space items evenly.
No!
Yes!
See Also
PrefStatusBarEdit
PrefStatusBarOptionsDlg
Purpose
Display the Status Bar Options dialog box.
Syntax
PrefStatusBarOptionsDlg ()
See Also
PrefStatusBar
PrefTaskBar
Purpose
Specify the items for the Application Bar, and their position and width.
Syntax
PrefTaskBar ({Box: enumeration; Width: numeric; TextOrIcon: numeric; })
Parameters
Box
enumeration (optional)
|
AlignChar! |
Keyboard! |
|
CapsLockState! |
LGCName! |
|
CombinedAbsPosition! |
NumLockState! |
|
CombinedPosition! |
Printer! |
|
CurrentTag! |
ScrollLockState! |
|
Date! |
Select! |
|
Font! |
Time! |
|
GeneralStatus! |
Zoom! |
|
InsertMode! |
Width
numeric (optional)
TextOrIcon
numeric (optional)
PrefTOA
Purpose
Specify a table of authorities format.
Syntax
PrefTOA (Underlining: enumeration; Runs: enumeration)
Parameters
Underlining
enumeration (optional) Allow underlining in the full form.
Allowed!
NotAllowed!
Runs
enumeration (optional)
Allowed!
NotAllowed!
PrefUnitsOfMeasure
Purpose
Specify the unit of measure settings.
Syntax
PrefUnitsOfMeasure (DisplayUnits: enumeration; StatusBarUnits: enumeration)
Parameters
DisplayUnits
enumeration (optional)
Centimeters!
InchesI!
InchesQuote!
Millimeter!
Point!
Wpu!
StatusBarUnits
enumeration (optional) The unit of measure for the status bar and Ruler.
Centimeters!
InchesI!
InchesQuote!
Millimeter!
Point!
Wpu!
PrefZoom
Purpose
Specify the document window view.
Syntax
PrefZoom (Type: enumeration; Percent: numeric)
Parameters
Type
enumeration
FixedPercent!
FullPage!
MarginWidth!
PageWidth!
Percent
numeric (optional) Normal: 100.
See Also
DraftZoom100
Purpose
Print according to specified options. If no print-time commands are used prior to this command, the document will be printed according to the current default settings. If the Action parameter is left blank, the document will be printed using the current print action.
Syntax
Print (Action: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration (optional)
AdvancedMultiplePages!
CurrentPage!
DocumentOnDisk!
DocumentSummary!
FullDocument!
MultiplePages!
SelectedText! Print selected text. If nothing is selected, the command does nothing. If a partial line of text is selected, the entire line prints.
See Also
DocSummaryPrint, PrintAction
PrintAction
Purpose
Specify a print action and return the current print action.
Syntax
numeric := PrintAction (Action: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration (optional)
AdvancedMultiplePages!
CurrentPage!
DocumentOnDisk!
DocumentSummary!
FullDocument!
MultiplePages!
SelectedText!
See Also
PrintAdvancedRangeData
Purpose
Specify the pages to print. Follow this command with Print(AdvancedMultiplePages!).The following rules apply to all PrintAdvancedRangeData parameter specifications:1. To specify all Pages, Secondary Pages, Chapters, or Volumes use (“all”).2. Use the same numbering method as the document uses. For example, if the current Page number method is (A,B,C,...) and you want to print the first three pages, use (“A-C”) in the Pages parameter, not (“1-3").3. If you do not wish to specify a range or value for a parameter, use a null string (”").
Syntax
PrintAdvancedRangeData (Pages: string; SecondaryPages: string; Chapters: string; Volumes: string)
Parameters
Pages
string
SecondaryPages
string
Chapters
string
Volumes
string
See Also
PrintBooklet
Purpose
Turn booklet printing on or off.
Syntax
numeric := PrintBooklet (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
False!
True!
See Also
PrintCopies
Purpose
Specify the number of copies to print.
Syntax
numeric := PrintCopies (NumberOfCopies: numeric)
Parameters
NumberOfCopies
numeric
See Also
PrintDestination
Purpose
Specify to print to a printer, file, or printer port.
Syntax
any := PrintDestination (Destination: any)
Parameters
Destination
any (optional) Use a string specifying a path and filename to print to a file. Use a string specifying the name of a printer to print to a specific printer. Use PromptForFilename! to prompt the user for a filename to print to. Use DriverPort! to print to the current printer port.
DriverPort!
PromptForFilename!
See Also
?CurrentPrinterPort, Print
PrintDlg
Purpose
Display the Print dialog box.
Syntax
PrintDlg ()
See Also
BindingOptionsDlg, Print
PrinterCommand
Purpose
Insert a [Ptr Cmnd] code at the insertion point.
Syntax
PrinterCommand (Flag: enumeration; Command: string)
Parameters
Flag
enumeration Specify whether the Command parameter contains a printer command or filename.
Command!
File!
Command
string The printer command or name of a file that contains one or more printer commands.
See Also
PrinterCommandDlg, Print
PrinterCommandDlg
Purpose
Display the Printer Command dialog box.
Syntax
PrinterCommandDlg ()
See Also
PrinterCommand, Print
PrinterPause
Purpose
Insert a [Pause Ptr] code at the insertion point, in order to pause the current print job.
Syntax
PrinterPause ()
See Also
PrinterSelectByName
Purpose
Specify a printer to print to.
Syntax
string := PrinterSelectByName (PrinterName: any)
Parameters
PrinterName
any (optional) The name of the printer to print to. For a list of valid names for the current computer, see the Name drop-down list in the Printer dialog tab of the Print dialog box. This list will probably vary from one computer to another.
Default!
See Also
Print, PrinterSelectDlg
PrinterSelectDlg
Purpose
Display the Print to dialog box with the Printer tab selected.
Syntax
PrinterSelectDlg ()
See Also
Print, PrinterSelectByName
PrintGraphically
Purpose
Turn the Print graphically option on or off.
Syntax
boolean := PrintGraphically (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
False!
True!
See Also
PrintGraphics
Purpose
Turn graphics printing on or off.
Syntax
boolean := PrintGraphics (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
False!
True!
See Also
PrintHistoryDlg
Purpose
Display the Print Status and History dialog box.
Syntax
PrintHistoryDlg ()
See Also
PrintImageBinding
Purpose
Specify the binding edge. Use this command with PrintImageOffset and PrintTwoSided. This is a print-time option and does not insert a code in the document.
Syntax
numeric := PrintImageBinding (Edge: enumeration)
Parameters
Edge
enumeration (optional)
BottomEdge!
InsideEdge!
LeftEdge!
OutsideEdge!
RightEdge!
TopEdge!
See Also
PrintTwoSided, PrintUseTwoSidedDocCodes, PrintImageOffset, Print
PrintImageOffset
Purpose
Specify the binding edge offset. Use this command with PrintImageBinding. This is a print-time option and does not insert a code in the document.
Syntax
measurement := PrintImageOffset (Offset: measurement)
Parameters
Offset
measurement (optional) The distance to shift a page image. WordPerfect Units (1/1200 in) are assumed unless the DefaultUnits command precedes this command, or the units of the parameter are specified. To specify units for this parameter, include a unit indicator following the value. For example, PrintImageOffset(Offset: 1") specifies the value 1 as inches.
See Also
PrintImageBinding, Print
PrintInColor
Purpose
Turn color printing on or off. This is a print-time option and does not insert a code in the document. PrintInColor takes effect only when the current printer is capable of color printing, regardless of the value returned.
Syntax
boolean := PrintInColor (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
False!
True!
See Also
PrintInReverseOrder
Purpose
Turn reverse order printing on or off. This is a print-time option and does not insert a code in the document.
Syntax
boolean := PrintInReverseOrder (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
False!
True!
See Also
PrintRangeFrom
Purpose
Specify the first page in the print range. This is a print-time option and does not insert a code in the document. Use this command with PrintRangeTo and Print(Action: MultiplePages!).
Syntax
numeric := PrintRangeFrom (Page: numeric)
Parameters
Page
numeric (optional)
See Also
Print, PrintRangeTo
PrintRangeTo
Purpose
Specify the last page in the print range. This is a print-time option and does not insert a code in the document. Use this command with PrintRangeFrom and Print(Action: MultiplePages!).
Syntax
numeric := PrintRangeTo (Page: numeric)
Parameters
Page
numeric (optional) If this parameter equals zero, print to the end of the document.
See Also
Print, PrintRangeFrom
PrintResolution
Purpose
Specify the print resolution (quality).
Syntax
numeric := PrintResolution (Quality: enumeration)
Parameters
Quality
enumeration (optional) The print quality. Some printers allow more levels of print quality. To specify print quality on those printers, use 0-10. Refer to the specific printer documentation for print quality levels.
High!
Low!
Medium!
See Also
Print, PrintResolutionDpiY, PrintResolutionDpiX
PrintResolutionDpiX
Purpose
Specify the horizontal dots per inch (DPI) for a print job. The direction is relative to the printer, not the page. Always use this command together with PrintResolutionDPIY. PrintResolutionDPIX and PrintResolutionDPIY will always override the PrintResolution command unless the value specified in the DPI parameter is not valid for the printer used. See your printer documentation for valid DPI values.
Syntax
numeric := PrintResolutionDpiX (DPI: numeric)
Parameters
DPI
numeric (optional)
See Also
Print, PrintResolution, PrintResolutionDpiY
PrintResolutionDpiY
Purpose
Specify the vertical dots per inch (DPI) for a print job. The direction is relative to the printer, not the page. Always use this command together with PrintResolutionDPIX. PrintResolutionDPIX and PrintResolutionDPIY will always override the PrintResolution command unless the value specified in the DPI parameter is not valid for the printer used. See your printer documentation for valid DPI values.
Syntax
numeric := PrintResolutionDpiY (DPI: numeric)
Parameters
DPI
numeric (optional)
See Also
Print, PrintResolution, PrintResolutionDpiX
PrintSettings
Purpose
Add, delete, update, and use printer named settings. Use other print option commands to set current options. Then use this command to save those options as a named setting.
Syntax
PrintSettings (Action: enumeration; SettingName: any)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
Add!
Delete!
Update!
Use!
SettingName
any (optional) The name of the driver Named Setting. To apply the action specified in the Action parameter to the default setting, use Default!.
Default!
DriverSettings!
See Also
PrintSortOrder
Purpose
Specify how to sort the pages of multiple-copy print jobs.
Syntax
numeric := PrintSortOrder (Order: enumeration)
Parameters
Order
enumeration (optional)
Collate!
Group!
See Also
PrintSourceFileName
Purpose
Specify a document on disk to print.
Syntax
string := PrintSourceFileName (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string (optional)
See Also
PrintTwoSided, PrintAdvancedRangeData, PrintBooklet, PrintWithDocumentSummary, PrintUseTwoSidedDocCodes, Print, PrintInReverseOrder
PrintTo
Purpose
Print a specified file on disk to a specified printer.
Syntax
PrintTo (Filename: string; PrinterName: string; PrinterDevice: string; PrinterPort: string)
Parameters
Filename
string The path and filename of the file to print.
PrinterName
string The name of the printer to print to. For a list of valid names for the current computer, see the Name drop-down list in the Printer dialog tab of the Print dialog box. This list will probably vary from one computer to another.
PrinterDevice
string Not used.
PrinterPort
string Not used.
See Also
PrintDestination, Print
PrintTwoSided
Purpose
Turn two-sided printing on or off and specify options. Use PrintTwoSided with PrintUseTwoSidedDocCodes(State: False!) to ensure predictable results. This is a print-time option and does not insert a code in the document.
Syntax
numeric := PrintTwoSided (Option: enumeration)
Parameters
Option
enumeration (optional)
EvenOnly!
LongEdge!
None!
OddOnly!
ShortEdge!
See Also
Binding, DoubleSidedPrint, PrintTwoSidedDocCodesDlg, PrintUseTwoSidedDocCodes, PrintImageBinding, Print
PrintTwoSidedDocCodesDlg
Purpose
Display the Two-Sided Document Settings dialog box.
Syntax
PrintTwoSidedDocCodesDlg ()
See Also
Binding, DoubleSidedPrint, PrintTwoSided, Print
PrintUseTwoSidedDocCodes
Purpose
Turn Use two-sided document settings on or off.
Syntax
boolean := PrintUseTwoSidedDocCodes (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
False!
True!
See Also
?Binding, Binding, DoubleSidedPrint, PrintTwoSided, PrintTwoSidedDocCodesDlg, PrintImageBinding
PrintWithDocumentSummary
Purpose
Turn document summary printing on or off.
Syntax
boolean := PrintWithDocumentSummary (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
False!
True!
See Also
ProofReadAsYouGoOff
Purpose
Turn off Spell-As-You-Go and Grammar-As-You-Go.
Syntax
ProofReadAsYouGoOff ()
See Also
ProofReadGrammar
ProofReadGrammar
Purpose
Mark and correct grammar errors as you type.
Syntax
ProofReadGrammar ()
See Also
ProofReadAsYouGoOff
PublishToBaristaDlg
Purpose
Display the Publish to Barista dialog box and specify a filename.
Syntax
PublishToBaristaDlg (FileName: string)
Parameters
FileName
string
PublishToEnvoyDlg
Purpose
Publish the current document to the Envoy viewer and display it in Envoy.
Syntax
PublishToEnvoyDlg ()
QuattroPro
Purpose
Insert a Corel Quattro Pro OLE object file in the current document.
Syntax
QuattroPro ()
See Also
OLEInsertObject
QuickCorrect
Purpose
Specify whether QuickCorrect will replace words as you type.
Syntax
QuickCorrect (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectAddItem, QuickCorrectDeleteItem, QuickCorrectDlg, QuickCorrectReplaceWord
QuickCorrectAddItem
Purpose
Add a QuickCorrect entry.
Syntax
QuickCorrectAddItem (Item: string; Replacement: string; Type: enumeration)
Parameters
Item
string
Replacement
string
Type
enumeration
QCException!
QuickCorrect!
QuickLink!
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectDeleteItem, QuickCorrectDlg, QuickCorrectReplaceWord
QuickCorrectAutoCreateException
Purpose
Turns the QuickCorrect Create Auto Exception List on or off.
Syntax
QuickCorrectAutoCreateException (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
QuickCorrect
QuickCorrectCapsFixQry
Purpose
Return True if the QuickCorrect CapsFix option is on, False if not.
Syntax
boolean := QuickCorrectCapsFixQry ()
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectCapsFixSet
QuickCorrectCapsFixSet
Purpose
Turn the QuickCorrect CapsFix option on or off.
Syntax
QuickCorrectCapsFixSet (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectCapsFixQry
QuickCorrectDeleteItem
Purpose
Delete a QuickCorrect entry.
Syntax
QuickCorrectDeleteItem (Item: string)
Parameters
Item
string
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectAddItem, QuickCorrectDlg, QuickCorrectReplaceWord
QuickCorrectDlg
Purpose
Display the QuickCorrect dialog box.
Syntax
QuickCorrectDlg ()
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectAddItem, QuickCorrectDeleteItem, QuickCorrectReplaceWord
QuickCorrectOtherWords
Purpose
Turn Correct other mis-typed words when possible on or off.
Syntax
QuickCorrectOtherWords (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
QuickCorrect
QuickCorrectQuickBulletsQry
Purpose
Return True if the QuickCorrect QuickBullets option is on, False if not.
Syntax
boolean := QuickCorrectQuickBulletsQry ()
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectQuickBulletsSet
QuickCorrectQuickBulletsSet
Purpose
Turn the QuickCorrect QuickBullets option on or off.
Syntax
QuickCorrectQuickBulletsSet (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectQuickBulletsQry
QuickCorrectQuickIndentQry
Purpose
Return True if the QuickCorrect QuickIndent option is on, False if not.
Syntax
boolean := QuickCorrectQuickIndentQry ()
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectQuickIndentSet
QuickCorrectQuickIndentSet
Purpose
Turn the QuickCorrect QuickIndent option on or off.
Syntax
QuickCorrectQuickIndentSet (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
QuickCorrect, TabForced, QuickCorrectQuickIndentQry
QuickCorrectQuickLinesQry
Purpose
Return True if the QuickCorrect QuickLines option is on, False if not.
Syntax
boolean := QuickCorrectQuickLinesQry ()
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectQuickIndentSet
QuickCorrectQuickLinesSet
Purpose
Turn the QuickCorrect QuickLines option on or off. QuickLines replace character lines with graphic lines.
Syntax
QuickCorrectQuickLinesSet (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectQuickLinesQry
QuickCorrectQuickOrdinalsQry
Purpose
Return True if the QuickCorrect QuickOrdinals option is on, False if not. QuickOrdinals superscripts ordinal text.
Syntax
boolean := QuickCorrectQuickOrdinalsQry ()
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectQuickOrdinalsSet
QuickCorrectQuickOrdinalsSet
Purpose
Turn the QuickCorrect QuickOrdinals option on or off.
Syntax
QuickCorrectQuickOrdinalsSet (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectQuickOrdinalsQry
QuickCorrectQuickSymbolsSet
Purpose
Turn the QuickSymbols option on or off.
Syntax
QuickCorrectQuickSymbolsSet (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
QuickCorrect
QuickCorrectReplaceWord
Purpose
Replace the current word in the document with specified text. The Insertion point must be in the word to be replaced. The specified text must correspond to a QuickCorrect entry.
Syntax
QuickCorrectReplaceWord (String: string)
Parameters
String
string
See Also
QuickCorrect, QuickCorrectAddItem, QuickCorrectDeleteItem, QuickCorrectDlg
QuickFontEx
Purpose
Insert a QuickFont into the document.
Syntax
QuickFontEx (FontFace: string; FontSize: measurement; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; FontType: enumeration; {Attributes: enumeration; })
Parameters
FontFace
string
FontSize
measurement
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
FontType
enumeration (optional)
Intellifont!
Speedo!
TrueType!
Type1!
Attributes
enumeration (optional)
Bold!
DoubleUnderline!
Every!
Italics!
Outline!
Redline!
Shadow!
SmallCaps!
Strikeout!
Underline!
See Also
Font
QuickFormat
Purpose
Format text based on selected fonts and attributes, or paragraph styles, or both.
Syntax
QuickFormat (Format: enumeration)
Parameters
Format
enumeration
Attributes!
CharacterStyle!
Graphics!
Off!
Styles!
StylesAndAttributes!
TableCells!
TableStruct!
See Also
QuickFormatDiscontinue, QuickFormatDlg, QuickFormatToggle
QuickFormatDiscontinue
Purpose
Turn off the QuickFormat link for all paragraphs with the associated heading.
Syntax
QuickFormatDiscontinue (AllParagraphs: enumeration)
Parameters
AllParagraphs
enumeration
False!
True!
See Also
QuickFormat, QuickFormatDlg, QuickFormatToggle
QuickFormatDlg
Purpose
Display the QuickFormat dialog box.
Syntax
QuickFormatDlg ()
See Also
QuickFormat, QuickFormatDiscontinue, QuickFormatToggle
QuickFormatToggle
Purpose
Display the QuickFormat dialog box.
Syntax
QuickFormatToggle ()
See Also
QuickFormat, QuickFormatDiscontinue, QuickFormatDlg
QuickLink
Purpose
Turn QuickLink on or off.
Syntax
QuickLink (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
QuickmarkFind
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the first character after a QuickMark.
Syntax
QuickmarkFind ()
See Also
QuickmarkSet
QuickmarkSet
Purpose
Place a unique bookmark, or QuickMark, in a document at the insertion point. If Set QuickMark in Document on Save is on, the QuickMark moves to the insertion point when the document is saved.
Syntax
QuickmarkSet ()
See Also
QuickmarkFind, TotalPages
QuickSpotsShow
Purpose
Turn QuickSpots on or off for the current session and return the current state. To return the current state without changing the setting, omit the parameter. This command does not change display settings for QuickSpots.
Syntax
boolean := QuickSpotsShow (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
PrefDisplaySet
QuickWords
Purpose
Turn Expand QuickWords when you type them on or off.
Syntax
QuickWords (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
QuickWordsDlg
QuickWordsDlg
Purpose
Display the QuickCorrect dialog box with the QuickWords tab displayed.
Syntax
QuickWordsDlg ()
See Also
QuickWords
Redisplay
Purpose
Rewrite the screen contents without moving the insertion point.
Syntax
Redisplay ()
RedlineCharacter
Purpose
Specify a character to redline text.
Syntax
RedlineCharacter (Character: string)
Parameters
Character
string
See Also
?RedlineCharacter, PrefPrintRedline, RedlineMethod
RedlineMethod
Purpose
Specify a redline method.
Syntax
RedlineMethod (RedlineMethod: enumeration)
Parameters
RedlineMethod
enumeration
Alternating!
LeftMargin!
PrinterDependent!
RightMargin!
See Also
?RedlineMethod, PrefPrintRedline, RedlineCharacter
Redo
Purpose
Reverse the last Undo made to the document or reverse the specified Undo.
Syntax
Redo (Number: numeric)
Parameters
Number
numeric (optional) The number of redo levels.
See Also
Undo
RepeatDlg
Purpose
Display the Repeat dialog box.
Syntax
RepeatDlg ()
See Also
RepeatValue
RepeatSet
Purpose
Specify the Repeat default number.
Syntax
RepeatSet (Value: numeric)
Parameters
Value
numeric
See Also
RepeatValue
RepeatValue
Purpose
Specify the number of times to repeat an action.
Syntax
RepeatValue (Value: numeric)
Parameters
Value
numeric (optional)
See Also
RepeatDlg
ReplaceAll
Purpose
Replace all occurrences of a matched word, code, or phrase. Precede with commands such as SearchString, ReplaceString, and SearchNext.
Syntax
ReplaceAll (SearchMode: enumeration)
Parameters
SearchMode
enumeration (optional) An extended search includes substructures such as headers and footnotes.
Extended!
Regular!
See Also
ReplaceString, SearchNext, SearchPrevious, SearchString
ReplaceBackward
Purpose
Replace specified text or codes from the current insertion point to the beginning of the document. Precede with other commands such as SearchString and ReplaceString.
Syntax
ReplaceBackward (SearchMode: enumeration)
Parameters
SearchMode
enumeration (optional) An extended search includes substructures such as headers and footnotes.
Extended!
Regular!
See Also
ReplaceCurrent, ReplaceForward, ReplaceString, SearchPrevious, SearchString
ReplaceConfirm
Purpose
Specify whether Find and Replace Text prompts the user to confirm replacement in Corel WordPerfect for DOS. Included for DOS compatibility. No effect in Corel WordPerfect for Windows. Use ReplaceAll or ReplaceCurrent.
Syntax
ReplaceConfirm (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration Prompt for confirmation before replacing text.
No!
Yes!
See Also
ReplaceDlg
ReplaceCurrent
Purpose
Replace a matched word, code, or phrase. Precede with commands such as SearchString, and SearchNext.
Syntax
ReplaceCurrent ()
See Also
ReplaceString, ReplaceWithAttributes, SearchNext, SearchString
ReplaceDlg
Purpose
Display the Find and Replace Text dialog box.
Syntax
ReplaceDlg ()
See Also
FindDlg
ReplaceForward
Purpose
Replace the specified text or codes from the insertion point to the end of the document. Precede with other commands such as SearchString or ReplaceString.
Syntax
ReplaceForward (SearchMode: enumeration)
Parameters
SearchMode
enumeration (optional) An extended search includes substructures such as headers and footnotes.
Extended!
Regular!
See Also
ReplaceBackward, ReplaceString, SearchString
ReplaceString
Purpose
Specify the search text or codes.
Syntax
ReplaceString (RplcStrg: string)
Parameters
RplcStrg
string
See Also
SearchString, SelectedReplaceString
ReplaceWithAttributes
Purpose
Specify the font attributes and/or relative font size for the replacement text.
Syntax
ReplaceWithAttributes (State: enumeration; Attribute: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
Attribute
enumeration (optional)
|
Bold! |
Shadow! |
|
DoubleUnderline! |
Small! |
|
Every! |
SmallCaps! |
|
ExtraLarge! |
Strikeout! |
|
Fine! |
Subscript! |
|
Italics! |
Superscript! |
|
Large! |
Underline! |
|
Outline! |
VeryLarge! |
|
Redline! |
See Also
ReplaceCurrent, ReplaceString, SearchNext, SearchPrevious, SearchString
ReplaceWithCase
Purpose
Specify the case(s) of the replacement text.
Syntax
ReplaceWithCase (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
ReplaceWithFont
Purpose
Specify the font and font style of the replacement text.
Syntax
ReplaceWithFont (State: enumeration; Name: string; Family: enumeration; Attributes: enumeration; Weight: enumeration; Width: enumeration; Source: enumeration; Type: enumeration; CharacterSet: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
Name
string (optional) The font name.
Family
enumeration (optional)
|
FamilyAestheticOrnamented! |
FamilyITCZapfDingbats! |
|
FamilyAlbertus! |
FamilyLetterGothic! |
|
FamilyBodoni! |
FamilyMadrone! |
|
FamilyBroadway! |
FamilyMicrostyle! |
|
FamilyBrush! |
FamilyOldEnglish! |
|
FamilyCenturySchoolbook! |
FamilyOptima! |
|
FamilyComputer! |
FamilyParkAvenue! |
|
FamilyCourier! |
FamilyPonderosa! |
|
FamilyHelvetica! |
FamilyPTBarnum! |
|
FamilyHobo! |
FamilyRevue! |
|
FamilyITCBenguiat! |
FamilySignetRoundhand! |
|
FamilyITCGaramond! |
FamilyTekton! |
|
FamilyITCLubalinGraph! |
FamilyTimesRoman! |
|
FamilyITCRonda! |
FamilyUncial! |
Attributes
enumeration (optional)
FontMatchItalic!
FontMatchNormal!
FontMatchOutline!
FontMatchShadow!
FontMatchSmallCaps!
Weight
enumeration (optional)
|
WeightBlack! |
WeightMaximum! |
|
WeightBold! |
WeightMedium! |
|
WeightBook! |
WeightRegular! |
|
WeightDemiBold! |
WeightRoman! |
|
WeightDemiLight! |
WeightSemiBold! |
|
WeightExtraBlack! |
WeightSemiLight! |
|
WeightExtraBold! |
WeightThin! |
|
WeightExtraHeavy! |
WeightUltraBlack! |
|
WeightExtraLight! |
WeightUltraHeavy! |
|
WeightExtraThin! |
WeightUltraLight! |
|
WeightHeavy! |
WeightUltraThin! |
|
WeightLight! |
WeightUnknown! |
Width
enumeration (optional)
|
WidthCompressed! |
WidthSemiCondensed! |
|
WidthCondensed! |
WidthSemiExpanded! |
|
WidthDoubleWide! |
WidthTripleWide! |
|
WidthExpanded! |
WidthUltraCompressed! |
|
WidthExtraCondensed! |
WidthUltraCondensed! |
|
WidthExtraExpanded! |
WidthUltraExpanded! |
|
WidthNormal! |
WidthUnknown! |
Source
enumeration (optional)
DRSFile!
PRSFile!
Type
enumeration (optional)
Intellifont!
Speedo!
TrueType!
Type1!
CharacterSet
enumeration (optional)
FontMatchArabic!
FontMatchArabicScript!
FontMatchASCII!
FontMatchBoxDrawing!
FontMatchCyrillic!
FontMatchGreek!
FontMatchHebrew!
FontMatchIconicSymbols!
FontMatchJapaneseKana!
FontMatchMath!
FontMatchMathExtension!
FontMatchMultinational1!
FontMatchMultinational2!
FontMatchTypographicSymbols!
FontMatchUserDefined!
ReplaceWithFontSize
Purpose
Specify the font size of the replacement text.
Syntax
ReplaceWithFontSize (State: enumeration; FontSize: measurement)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
FontSize
measurement (optional)
ReselectLastBlock
Purpose
Select the last selected text. Recordable substitute: ReselectLastSelection.
Syntax
ReselectLastBlock ()
ReselectLastSelection
Purpose
Select the last selected text.
Syntax
ReselectLastSelection ()
ResetKeyboardMenu
Purpose
Reset the keyboard and menus to the Corel WordPerfect default settings.
Syntax
ResetKeyboardMenu ()
RevealCodes
Purpose
Turn Reveal Codes on or off.
Syntax
RevealCodes (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional) Default: toggle.
Off!
On!
ReverseShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro REVERSE.WCM to reverse the foreground and background colors in selected text and cells. REVERSE.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
ReverseShippingMacro ()
ReviewDocAnnotationAccept
Purpose
Incorporate the selected annotation into the current document and select the next annotation. If an annotation is not currently selected, the next annotation is selected. If there are no annotations following the insertion point, a not found condition is returned. Use this command in Review Document Author mode. If Review Document Author mode is not active, this command fails unless display is on; in which case, the user is prompted to activate Author mode before proceeding.
Syntax
ReviewDocAnnotationAccept ()
See Also
ReviewDocAnnotationAcceptAll, ReviewDocAnnotationRejectAll, ReviewDocAnnotationReject
ReviewDocAnnotationAcceptAll
Purpose
Incorporate all annotations into the current document. If the current document contains no annotations, a not found condition is returned. Substructures like Headers and Footers are treated independently. Use this command in Review Document Author mode. If Review Document Author mode is not active, this command fails unless display is on; in which case, the user is prompted to activate Author mode before proceeding.
Syntax
ReviewDocAnnotationAcceptAll ()
See Also
ReviewDocAnnotationAccept, ReviewDocAnnotationRejectAll, ReviewDocAnnotationReject
ReviewDocAnnotationFirst
Purpose
Select the first annotation in the current document. If the current document contains no annotations, a not found condition is returned. Use this command in Review Document Author mode. If Review Document Author mode is not active, this command fails unless display is on; in which case, the user is prompted to activate Author mode before proceeding.
Syntax
ReviewDocAnnotationFirst ()
See Also
ReviewDocAnnotationNext, ReviewDocAnnotationPrev
ReviewDocAnnotationNext
Purpose
Select the next annotation in the current document. If there are no annotations following the insertion point, a not found condition is returned. Use this command in Review Document Author mode. If Review Document Author mode is not active, this command fails unless display is on; in which case, the user is prompted to activate Author mode before proceeding.
Syntax
ReviewDocAnnotationNext ()
See Also
ReviewDocAnnotationFirst, ReviewDocAnnotationPrev
ReviewDocAnnotationPrev
Purpose
Select the previous annotation in the current document. If there are no annotations before the insertion point, a not found condition is returned. Use this command in Review Document Author mode. If Review Document Author mode is not active, this command fails unless display is on; in which case, the user is prompted to activate Author mode before proceeding.
Syntax
ReviewDocAnnotationPrev ()
See Also
ReviewDocAnnotationFirst, ReviewDocAnnotationNext
ReviewDocAnnotationReject
Purpose
Delete the selected annotation and select the next annotation. If an annotation is not currently selected, the next annotation is selected. If there are no annotations following the insertion point, a not found condition is returned. Use this command in Review Document Author mode. If Review Document Author mode is not active, this command fails unless display is on; in which case, the user is prompted to activate Author mode before proceeding.
Syntax
ReviewDocAnnotationReject ()
See Also
ReviewDocAnnotationAcceptAll, ReviewDocAnnotationAccept, ReviewDocAnnotationRejectAll
ReviewDocAnnotationRejectAll
Purpose
Delete all annotations in the current document. If the current document contains no annotations, a not found condition is returned. Substructures like Headers and Footers are treated independently. Use this command in Review Document Author mode. If Review Document Author mode is not active, this command fails unless display is on; in which case, the user is prompted to activate Author mode before proceeding.
Syntax
ReviewDocAnnotationRejectAll ()
See Also
ReviewDocAnnotationAcceptAll, ReviewDocAnnotationAccept, ReviewDocAnnotationReject
ReviewDocAuthorDlg
Purpose
Display the Review Document Author Mode dialog box and activate Author mode.
Syntax
ReviewDocAuthorDlg ()
See Also
ZZZ Don't Delete This Record!!!, ReviewDocReviewerDlg, ReviewDocDlg
ReviewDocDisplayModeToggle
Purpose
Turn annotation display on or off.
Syntax
ReviewDocDisplayModeToggle ()
ReviewDocDlg
Purpose
Display the Review Document dialog box.
Syntax
ReviewDocDlg ()
ReviewDocManualModeToggle
Purpose
Enter or exit the Review Document Author or Reviewer annotation modes. When entering Author mode, this command activates the Author mode and selects the first annotation.
Syntax
ReviewDocManualModeToggle (Mode: enumeration)
Parameters
Mode
enumeration (optional) Specify the annotation mode.
Author!
Off!
Reviewer!
See Also
ReviewDocAuthorDlg, ReviewDocReviewerDlg
ReviewDocReviewerDlg
Purpose
Display the Review Document Reviewer mode dialog box and activate Reviewer mode.
Syntax
ReviewDocReviewerDlg ()
See Also
ReviewDocAuthorDlg, ReviewDocDlg
ReviewDocSetCurrentUserColor
Purpose
Set the annotation color for the current reviewer.
Syntax
ReviewDocSetCurrentUserColor (Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric)
Parameters
Red
numeric Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric Value: 0-255.
See Also
ReviewDocReviewerDlg
RulerBarShow
Purpose
Display (On!) or hide (Off!) the Ruler and save the setting as the new default.
Syntax
RulerBarShow (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional) Default: toggle.
Off!
On!
See Also
?RulerBarActive, ViewToolbarsDlg
SaveAll
Purpose
Save all unsaved documents.
Syntax
SaveAll ()
SaveAllShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro SAVEALL.WCM to display a list of open documents to select for saving. SAVEALL.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
SaveAllShippingMacro ()
SaveToDriveAMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro SAVETOA.WCM to save the current document and make a copy of it on drive A. SAVETOA.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
SaveToDriveAMacro ()
SaveUndoInformation
Purpose
Save Undo and Redo information with the current document. Saving Undo/Redo information increases the document size.
Syntax
SaveUndoInformation (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
SetUndoLevels
ScrollScreenLeft
Purpose
Scroll to the left side of the document window.
Syntax
ScrollScreenLeft ()
See Also
ScrollScreenRight
ScrollScreenRight
Purpose
Scroll to the right side of the document window.
Syntax
ScrollScreenRight ()
See Also
ScrollScreenLeft
SearchCaseSensitive
Purpose
Make Find case-sensitive.
Syntax
SearchCaseSensitive (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
SearchString
SearchFindWholeWordsOnly
Purpose
Specify whether Find matches only a whole word (Yes!) or also matches partial words (No!).
Syntax
SearchFindWholeWordsOnly (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
SearchInSelection
Purpose
Restrict the search to the selected text.
Syntax
SearchInSelection (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
SearchNext
Purpose
Search forward to find the next occurrence of the last search performed.
Syntax
SearchNext (SearchMode: enumeration)
Parameters
SearchMode
enumeration (optional) An extended search includes substructures such as headers and footnotes.
Extended!
Regular!
See Also
SearchPrevious, SearchString
SearchNextCurrentWord
Purpose
Find the next occurrence of the current selection or word.
Syntax
SearchNextCurrentWord (SearchMode: enumeration)
Parameters
SearchMode
enumeration (optional)
Extended!
Regular!
SearchPrevious
Purpose
Search backward to find the previous occurrence of the last search.
Syntax
SearchPrevious (SearchMode: enumeration)
Parameters
SearchMode
enumeration (optional) An extended search includes substructures such as headers and footnotes.
Extended!
Regular!
See Also
SearchNext, SearchString
SearchPreviousCurrentWord
Purpose
Find the previous occurrence of the current selection or word.
Syntax
SearchPreviousCurrentWord (SearchMode: enumeration)
Parameters
SearchMode
enumeration (optional)
Extended!
Regular!
SearchString
Purpose
Specify a search string. Follow with SearchNext or SearchPrevious.
Syntax
SearchString (StrgToLookFor: string)
Parameters
StrgToLookFor
string The text and/or codes to search for.
See Also
SearchNext, SearchPrevious
SearchWordForms
Purpose
Find and/or replace word forms.
Syntax
SearchWordForms (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
SearchWrap
Purpose
Specify whether Find searches from the beginning of a document after it reaches the end of a document.
Syntax
SearchWrap (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
SecondaryPageNumber
Purpose
Specify a secondary page number and insert the code into a document. The code is inserted at the beginning of the page where the insertion point is located.
Syntax
SecondaryPageNumber (Page: numeric)
Parameters
Page
numeric
See Also
?SecondaryPageNumber, PageNumber
SecondaryPageNumberDecrement
Purpose
Decrease the current secondary page number by one.
Syntax
SecondaryPageNumberDecrement ()
SecondaryPageNumberDisplay
Purpose
Insert a code at the insertion point that displays the current secondary page number. The number is updated as the document is modified.
Syntax
SecondaryPageNumberDisplay ()
SecondaryPageNumberIncrement
Purpose
Increase the current secondary page number by one.
Syntax
SecondaryPageNumberIncrement ()
SecondaryPageNumberMethod
Purpose
Specify a numbering method for secondary page numbers.
Syntax
SecondaryPageNumberMethod (NumberingMethod: enumeration)
Parameters
NumberingMethod
enumeration
LowerLetters!
LowerRoman!
Numbers!
UpperLetters!
UpperRoman!
See Also
?SecondaryPageNumberMethod
SelectAll
Purpose
Select all text and graphics in the current document.
Syntax
SelectAll ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectCell
Purpose
Select the current cell. Not valid for floating cells.
Syntax
SelectCell ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectCellDown
Purpose
Select from insertion point down one row. In the bottom row, it does not select text or codes below a table.
Syntax
SelectCellDown ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectCellDownArrow, SelectCellUp
SelectCellDownArrow
Purpose
Select the current cell and one cell down. In the bottom row, it selects the current cell down to the line below the table. Not valid for floating cells.
Syntax
SelectCellDownArrow ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectCellDown, SelectCellUp
SelectCellLeft
Purpose
Select the current cell (cell containing the insertion point) and extend the selection to the previous cell. If the current cell is the first cell in the first row (A1), select the current cell. If the current cell is in the first column (column A) and not in the first row, select the current cell, extend the selection up one row, then continue to extend the selection to the rightmost column. The resulting selection includes the current row and the previous row with the insertion point in the last column of the previous row.
Syntax
SelectCellLeft ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectCellRight
SelectCellRight
Purpose
Select the current cell and the next cell to the right. In the farthest right cell, select the entire current row and the row below.
Syntax
SelectCellRight ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectCellLeft
SelectCellUp
Purpose
Select the current cell and one cell above. In the top row of a table, do not select text or codes above the table.
Syntax
SelectCellUp ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectCellUpArrow
Purpose
Select the current cell and one cell above. In the top row of a table, select from the insertion point to the line above the table.
Syntax
SelectCellUpArrow ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectCellDownArrow, SelectCellUp
SelectCharNext
Purpose
Select the text or code one character position to the right of the insertion point.
Syntax
SelectCharNext ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectCharPrevious
SelectCharPrevious
Purpose
Select the text or code one character position to the left of the insertion point.
Syntax
SelectCharPrevious ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectCharNext
SelectColumnBottom
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the bottom of the current column.
Syntax
SelectColumnBottom ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectColumnTop
SelectColumnNext
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the right one column. In the farthest right column, select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the current line.
Syntax
SelectColumnNext ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectColumnPrevious
SelectColumnPrevious
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the top of the current column and from the bottom up to and including the corresponding line in the column to the left. In the farthest left column, select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the current line.
Syntax
SelectColumnPrevious ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectColumnNext
SelectColumnTop
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the top of the current column.
Syntax
SelectColumnTop ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectColumnBottom
SelectDelete
Purpose
Delete the selected text.
Syntax
SelectDelete ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectDocBottom
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the end of the document.
Syntax
SelectDocBottom ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectDocTop
SelectDocTop
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the document.
Syntax
SelectDocTop ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectDocBottom, SelectDocVeryTop
SelectDocVeryTop
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the very beginning of the document, before all codes.
Syntax
SelectDocVeryTop ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectDocBottom, SelectDocTop
SelectedReplaceString
Purpose
Replace a search string with specified text.
Syntax
SelectedReplaceString (RplcString: string; State: enumeration)
Parameters
RplcString
string
State
enumeration (optional)
UseAlways!
See Also
ReplaceString
SelectLineBegin
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the current line.
Syntax
SelectLineBegin ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectLineEnd
SelectLineDown
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point down one line.
Syntax
SelectLineDown ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectLineUp
SelectLineEnd
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the end of the current line.
Syntax
SelectLineEnd ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectLineBegin
SelectLineUp
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point backward to the corresponding position on the line above.
Syntax
SelectLineUp ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectLineDown
SelectLineVeryBegin
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the current line, before any codes.
Syntax
SelectLineVeryBegin ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, PosLineVeryBeg, SelectLineBegin, SelectLineVeryEnd
SelectLineVeryEnd
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the end of the current line, after all text and codes.
Syntax
SelectLineVeryEnd ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, PosLineVeryEnd, SelectLineBegin, SelectLineEnd, SelectLineVeryBegin
SelectMode
Purpose
Turn Select on or off. Default: toggle. Use the Arrow keys to extend a selection.
Syntax
SelectMode (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectOff
Purpose
Turn off Select.
Syntax
SelectOff ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectOn
Purpose
Turn on Select and specify the mode.
Syntax
SelectOn (SelectMode: enumeration)
Parameters
SelectMode
enumeration
CharMode!
CharNoCellMode!
DocMode!
PageMode!
ParagraphMode!
RectangleMode!
SentenceMode!
TabularColumnsMode!
WordMode!
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectOnEmptyDoc
Purpose
Activate Select and specify a Select mode in an empty document.
Syntax
SelectOnEmptyDoc (SelectMode: enumeration)
Parameters
SelectMode
enumeration
CharMode!
CharNoCellMode!
DocMode!
PageMode!
ParagraphMode!
RectangleMode!
SentenceMode!
TabularColumnsMode!
WordMode!
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectPage
Purpose
Select everything on the current page.
Syntax
SelectPage ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectPageNext
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the next page. On the last page, select text and codes from the insertion point to the end of the document.
Syntax
SelectPageNext ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectPagePrevious
SelectPagePrevious
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the previous page. On the first page, select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the document.
Syntax
SelectPagePrevious ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectPageNext
SelectParagraph
Purpose
Select the current paragraph and the subsequent codes until the text resumes.
Syntax
SelectParagraph ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectParagraphNext
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the next paragraph. In the last paragraph, select the text and codes from the insertion point to the end.
Syntax
SelectParagraphNext ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectParagraphPrevious
SelectParagraphPrevious
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the current paragraph. At the beginning of a paragraph, select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the preceding paragraph.
Syntax
SelectParagraphPrevious ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectParagraphNext
SelectRectangle
Purpose
Select a rectangle. SelectMode must be on (press F8) to record. Use the positioning keys to extend the selection.
Syntax
SelectRectangle ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectSave
Purpose
Save the selected text as a new file.
Syntax
SelectSave (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectScreenDown
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the bottom of the screen. If the insertion point is already at the bottom of the screen, select the text and codes from the insertion point to the bottom of the next screen.
Syntax
SelectScreenDown ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectScreenUp
SelectScreenLeft
Purpose
Select the current line from the insertion point to the left side of the screen. If the insertion point is already at the left side, select the current line from the insertion point to the left side of the next screen, or to the left margin of a document. Not recordable.
Syntax
SelectScreenLeft ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, PosScreenLeft, SelectScreenRight
SelectScreenRight
Purpose
Select the current line from the insertion point to the right side of the screen. If the insertion point is already at the right side, select the current line from the insertion point to the right side of the next screen, or to the right margin of a document. Not recordable.
Syntax
SelectScreenRight ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, PosScreenRight, SelectScreenLeft
SelectScreenUp
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the top of the screen. If the insertion point is already at the top of the screen, select the text and codes from the insertion point to the top of the next screen.
Syntax
SelectScreenUp ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectScreenDown
SelectSentence
Purpose
Select the current sentence.
Syntax
SelectSentence ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectSentenceNext
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the next sentence.
Syntax
SelectSentenceNext ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectSentencePrevious
SelectSentencePrevious
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the end of the previous sentence.
Syntax
SelectSentencePrevious ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectSentenceNext
SelectTable
Purpose
Select all cells in the current table. If the insertion point is not in a table, the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
SelectTable ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectTableColumn, SelectTableRow
SelectTableColumn
Purpose
Select all cells in the current column of a table.
Syntax
SelectTableColumn ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectTable, SelectTableRow
SelectTableColumnExtendLeft
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the current row.
Syntax
SelectTableColumnExtendLeft ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectTableColumnExtendRight
SelectTableColumnExtendRight
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the last column.
Syntax
SelectTableColumnExtendRight ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectTableColumnExtendLeft
SelectTableRow
Purpose
Select all cells in the current row.
Syntax
SelectTableRow ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize, SelectTable, SelectTableColumn
SelectTabularColumn
Purpose
Select one or more tabular columns. SelectMode must be on to record (press F8). Use the positioning keys to extend the selection.
Syntax
SelectTabularColumn ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectToggle
Purpose
Toggle Select mode.
Syntax
SelectToggle ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectWord
Purpose
Select the current word.
Syntax
SelectWord ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectWordNext
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the beginning of the next word.
Syntax
SelectWordNext ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SelectWordPrevious
Purpose
Select the text and codes from the insertion point to the end of the previous word.
Syntax
SelectWordPrevious ()
See Also
?BlockActive, ?SelectedText, ?SelectedTextSize
SetDocumentMapping
Purpose
Specify a character map for one-byte characters, as opposed to extended characters, when additional character maps are installed.
Syntax
SetDocumentMapping (MapName: string; Location: enumeration; Filename: string)
Parameters
MapName
string
Location
enumeration
MapExternal!
MapInternal!
Filename
string (optional)
SettingsDlg
Purpose
Display the Settings dialog box.
Syntax
SettingsDlg ()
SetUndoLevels
Purpose
Specify the number of Undo/Redo items to maintain in the document.
Syntax
SetUndoLevels (Levels: numeric)
Parameters
Levels
numeric Value: 0-300.
See Also
SaveUndoInformation
SGMLAddToAttrList
Purpose
Append a value to an existing attribute value. The attribute named must be present in the previous start tag. The value in the previous start tag is appended with a space followed by the value. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLAddToAttrList (Name: string; Value: string)
Parameters
Name
string
Value
string
See Also
SGMLReplaceAttribute, SGMLBoxAddToAttrList
SGMLBoxAddToAttrList
Purpose
Append a value to an existing graphics box element attribute value. The element and attribute name must be present in the selected graphics box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLBoxAddToAttrList (Element: string; Name: string; Value: string)
Parameters
Element
string
Name
string
Value
string
See Also
SGMLAddToAttrList, SGMLBoxMarkup
SGMLBoxAttribute
Purpose
Set the attribute value of a graphics box element. The element must be present in the selected graphics box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLBoxAttribute (Element: string; Name: string; Value: string)
Parameters
Element
string
Name
string
Value
string
See Also
SGMLNewAttribute, SGMLReplaceAttribute, SGMLBoxMarkup
SGMLBoxDeleteAttribute
Purpose
Delete a graphics box element attribute. The element and named attribute must be present in the selected graphics box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLBoxDeleteAttribute (Element: string; Name: string)
Parameters
Element
string
Name
string
See Also
SGMLDeleteAttribute, SGMLBoxMarkup
SGMLBoxDeleteMarkup
Purpose
Delete an element of the selected graphics box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfet SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLBoxDeleteMarkup (Type: enumeration)
Parameters
Type
enumeration
Box!
Caption!
Content!
See Also
SGMLBoxMarkup
SGMLBoxElementDlg
Purpose
Select SGML elements for the selected graphics box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLBoxElementDlg ()
SGMLBoxMarkup
Purpose
Set the element for a graphics box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLBoxMarkup (Type: enumeration; Name: string)
Parameters
Type
enumeration
Box!
Caption!
Content!
Name
string
See Also
SGMLBoxAddToAttrList, SGMLBoxAttribute, SGMLBoxDeleteAttribute, SGMLBoxDeleteMarkup
SGMLCharRef
Purpose
Insert a character reference. The character needs to be mapped as an 8-bit ASCII character in the document type. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLCharRef (Character: string)
Parameters
Character
string
SGMLContentModelDlg
Purpose
Display the Element Content dialog box, which allows you to view an element's content model. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLContentModelDlg (Element: string)
Parameters
Element
string (optional)
SGMLCreateDocType
Purpose
Create a document type entry. You must include at least a document type name and a logic filename. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLCreateDocType (DocTypeName: string; LogicFile: string; LayoutFile: string; AliasFile: string; OptFile1: string; OptFile2: string; OptFile3: string; OptFile4: string; OptFile5: string; OptFile6: string; OptFile7: string; OptFile8: string; OptFile9: string; OptFile10: string)
Parameters
DocTypeName
string
LogicFile
string
LayoutFile
string (optional)
AliasFile
string (optional)
OptFile1
string (optional)
OptFile2
string (optional)
OptFile3
string (optional)
OptFile4
string (optional)
OptFile5
string (optional)
OptFile6
string (optional)
OptFile7
string (optional)
OptFile8
string (optional)
OptFile9
string (optional)
OptFile10
string (optional)
SGMLDeleteAttribute
Purpose
Delete an attribute. The attribute must be present in the previous start tag. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLDeleteAttribute (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string
See Also
SGMLAddToAttrList, SGMLBoxDeleteAttribute
SGMLDeleteDocType
Purpose
Delete a document type entry. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLDeleteDocType (DocTypeName: string)
Parameters
DocTypeName
string
SGMLDocTypeDlg
Purpose
Display the Document Types dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLDocTypeDlg ()
SGMLEditAttributeDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Attribute dialog box. This command differs from SGMLEditAttributesDlg in that it allows you to edit a specific attribute of an element. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLEditAttributeDlg (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string
See Also
SGMLEditAttributesDlg, SGMLEditBoxAttributeDlg
SGMLEditAttributesDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Attributes dialog box. This command differs from SGMLEditAttributeDlg in that it allows you to edit all the attributes of an element. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLEditAttributesDlg ()
See Also
SGMLEditAttributeDlg, SGMLEditBoxAttributeDlg
SGMLEditBoxAttributeDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Attribute dialog box. This command differs from SGMLEditBoxAttributesDlg in that it allows you to edit a specific attribute of an element of the selected graphics box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLEditBoxAttributeDlg (Element: string; Name: string)
Parameters
Element
string
Name
string
See Also
SGMLEditAttributesDlg, SGMLEditAttributeDlg
SGMLEditBoxAttributesDlg
Purpose
Edit the attributes of a box element.
Syntax
SGMLEditBoxAttributesDlg (Element: string)
Parameters
Element
string
SGMLElementsDlg
Purpose
Display the SGML Elements dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLElementsDlg ()
SGMLEntityRef
Purpose
Insert an entity reference. For text references, entity references must be declared in the document type. For file references, entity references must be user declared or declared in the document type. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLEntityRef (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string
See Also
SGMLFileRefNew
SGMLFileRefDataType
Purpose
Specify the data type of a file reference. Can be used only with user-declared file references. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFileRefDataType (FileRefName: string; DataType: enumeration)
Parameters
FileRefName
string
DataType
enumeration
CDATA!
NDATA!
None!
SDATA!
SUBDOC!
SGMLFileRefDelAttribute
Purpose
Delete a file reference notation attribute. Can be used only if a user-declared file reference exists for the specified FileRefName. An attribute of the specified Name must already exist for the file reference. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFileRefDelAttribute (FileRefName: string; Name: string)
Parameters
FileRefName
string
Name
string
SGMLFileRefDelete
Purpose
Delete a file reference declaration and all entity references that use the file reference declaration. Only user-declared file references can be deleted. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFileRefDelete (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string
SGMLFileRefDlg
Purpose
Display the File References dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFileRefDlg ()
SGMLFileRefFilePath
Purpose
Specify the file path of a file reference. Can be used only with user-declared file references. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFileRefFilePath (FileRefName: string; FilePath: string)
Parameters
FileRefName
string
FilePath
string
SGMLFileRefNew
Purpose
Create a file reference declaration. A file reference of the Name cannot already exist. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFileRefNew (Name: string; PublicID: string; FilePath: string; DataType: enumeration; NotationName: string)
Parameters
Name
string
PublicID
string
FilePath
string (optional)
DataType
enumeration (optional)
CDATA!
NDATA!
None!
SDATA!
SUBDOC!
NotationName
string (optional)
SGMLFileRefNewAttribute
Purpose
Create a file reference notation attribute. Can be used only if a user-declared file reference exists for the specified FileRefName. An attribute of the specified Name cannot already exist for the file reference. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFileRefNewAttribute (FileRefName: string; Name: string; Value: string)
Parameters
FileRefName
string
Name
string
Value
string
SGMLFileRefNotation
Purpose
Specify the notation for a file reference. Can be used only with user-declared file references. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFileRefNotation (FileRefName: string; Notation: string)
Parameters
FileRefName
string
Notation
string
SGMLFileRefPubID
Purpose
Specify the public identifier for a file reference. Can be used only with user-declared file references. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFileRefPubID (FileRefName: string; PublicID: string)
Parameters
FileRefName
string
PublicID
string
SGMLFileRefRename
Purpose
Change the name of a file reference. Can be used only with user-declared file references. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFileRefRename (OldName: string; NewName: string)
Parameters
OldName
string
NewName
string
SGMLFindElementEnd
Purpose
Position the insertion point after the current element's end tag. If the element is defined by the layout file to be a Corel WordPerfect type (for example, a header, footer, or image), and the element's end is located at the end of the WordPerfect type, the type is also exited. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFindElementEnd ()
SGMLFindElementStart
Purpose
Position the insertion point at the beginning of the current element. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFindElementStart (CursorPos: enumeration)
Parameters
CursorPos
enumeration (optional)
After!
Before!
SGMLFindNextTable
Purpose
Position the insertion point in the next table. Can be used only with a document type that allows table tagging. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFindNextTable ()
SGMLFindStartTag
Purpose
Find the start of an element. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLFindStartTag (Name: string; Direction: enumeration; AttributeEditFind: enumeration)
Parameters
Name
string (optional)
Direction
enumeration (optional)
Either! Searches backward first, then forward for the start tag.
Next!
Previous!
AttributeEditFind
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes! Limits the find to start tags with attributes present or start tags with attributes declared in the document type.
SGMLGetAttributeData
Purpose
Assign information to a variable about the attributes of the current element. The macro uses the variable with other commands to retrieve information or to determine whether to perform specified actions. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLGetAttributeData (Variable: variable; Item: enumeration; Type: enumeration; Element: enumeration; ItemNum: numeric)
Parameters
Variable
variable
Item
enumeration
Count! Returns a count of all the attributes of a given type.
DefaultValue! Returns the default value for the attribute specified in the document type. The string returned can be CONREF, CURRENT, IMPLIED, REQUIRED, or a string up to 1000 characters.
ErrorType! Returns one of the following values, representing the type of error for the attribute:
0 No error
1 Unknown attribute
2 Invalid character in NAME attribute
3 Invalid character in NMTOKEN attribute
4 Invalid character in NUMBER attribute
5 Invalid character in NUTOKEN attribute
6 An attribute value exceeds NAMELEN
7 Only one value is allowed
8 Attribute length exceeds LITLEN
9 No mapping for an attribute extended character
10 Attribute has no value assigned
11 Entity open (&...) in the attribute is not validated
12 Char Ref (&#...) in the attribute is not validated
13 An attribute value is not in the declared list
14 Attribute is not the declared FIXED value
15 Attribute is not a declared entity
16 Attribute is not a data or SUBDOC entity
17 More than one attribute has the same name
Name! Returns the name of the attribute specified by ItemNum.
Status! Returns one of the following values, representing the statue of the attribute:
0 Does not have a value currently specified
1 Has a value
2 Has a value but is in error
Type! Returns one of the following values:
0 Unknown
1 FIXED
2 The declared type was a list
3 CDATA
4 ENTITIES
5 ENTITY
6 ID
7 IDREF
8 IDREFS
9 NAME
10 NAMES
11 NMTOKEN
12 NMTOKENS
13 NOTATION
14 NUMBER
15 NUMBERS
16 NUTOKEN
17 NUTOKENS
Value! Returns the value of an attribute specified in the tag. (Value! always returns an error if the attribute has not been given a value.)
Type
enumeration Specify the type of attribute a variable belongs to.
All! Returns information about all attributes available in the open or previous element, relative to the insertion point.
InTag! Returns information about the attributes that have been given a value in the open or previous element, relative to the insertion point.
Invalid! Returns information about the attributes that have been given an invalid value in the open or previous element, relative to the insertion point.
NotInTag! Returns information about the attributes that have not been given a value in the open or previous element, relative to the insertion point.
Element
enumeration Specify which element to act on. Previous elements are used for empty elements.
Open!
Previous!
ItemNum
numeric (optional) Specify the number of the item from which the Item parameter extracts information.
SGMLGetElementData
Purpose
Assign information to a variable about the elements available in a Corel WordPerfect document. The macro uses the variable with other commands to retrieve information or to determine whether to perform specified actions. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLGetElementData (Variable: variable; Item: enumeration; Type: enumeration; ItemNum: numeric)
Parameters
Variable
variable
Item
enumeration
Count! Returns a count of all the elements of a given type.
LSIType! Returns one of the following values:
0 Watermark B
1 Endnote
2 Header A
3 Header B
4 Footer A
5 Footer B
6 Footnote
7 Image Box
8 Watermark A
9 Table
10 Text Box
11 Equation Box
12 Normal (unspecified)
Name! Returns the name of the element specified by ItemNum.
Type
enumeration
All! Returns information about all elements available in the document.
Open! Returns information about all elements that are open at the insertion point.
Previous!
Valid! Returns information about elements that are valid to insert at the insertion point (with the exception of inclusions).
ItemNum
numeric (optional) Specify the number of the item from which the Item parameter extracts information.
SGMLGetFileRefData
Purpose
Assign information to a variable about the external file references available in a Corel WordPerfect document. The macro uses the variable with other commands to retrieve information or to determine whether to perform specified actions. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLGetFileRefData (Variable: variable; Item: enumeration; Type: enumeration; ItemNum: numeric)
Parameters
Variable
variable
Item
enumeration
Count! Returns a count of all the file references of a given type.
DataType! Returns one of the following values:
0 None
1 CDATA
2 NDATA
3 SDATA
4 SUBDOC
FilePath! Returns the file path of the file reference.
Name! Returns the name of the file reference.
Notation! Returns the notation type of the file reference.
PublicID! Returns the public identifier of the file reference.
Type
enumeration
DTD! Returns information about all file references declared in the document type.
User! Returns information about all file references the user has defined in the document.
ItemNum
numeric (optional) Specify the number of the item from which the Item parameter extracts information.
SGMLIDIDREFListDlg
Purpose
Display the list of ID and IDREF attributes. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLIDIDREFListDlg ()
SGMLIgnore
Purpose
Insert SGML IGNORE codes. If you insert IGNORE codes around selected text that includes start and end tags, other SGML IGNORE codes, or subdocument marker codes, be sure the selection includes both the beginning and end tag or code. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLIgnore ()
SGMLInsertElement
Purpose
Insert an element. If you insert an element around selected text that includes start and end tags, SGML IGNORE codes, or subdocument marker codes, be sure the selection includes both the beginning and end tag or code. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLInsertElement (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string
SGMLLoadDocType
Purpose
Select a document type for the current document. The document type includes at least a document type name and logic file (.LGC), but may also include a layout file (.LSI) and an alias file (.LNM). This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLLoadDocType (DocTypeName: string)
Parameters
DocTypeName
string
SGMLLogicErrorDlg
Purpose
Display the Logic Errors dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLLogicErrorDlg ()
SGMLNewAttribute
Purpose
Create an attribute value. The name of the attribute must be different from any attribute in the previous start tag. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLNewAttribute (Name: string; Value: string)
Parameters
Name
string
Value
string
See Also
SGMLReplaceAttribute, SGMLBoxAttribute
SGMLOpenFileDlg
Purpose
Display the Open SGML File dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLOpenFileDlg ()
See Also
SGMLOpenFileOptions
SGMLOpenFileOptions
Purpose
Specify the document type and options for retrieving an SGML document. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLOpenFileOptions (WhiteSpaceConvert: enumeration; OmitTags: enumeration; DocTypeName: string)
Parameters
WhiteSpaceConvert
enumeration (optional) This parameter is obsolete, but it has been left in the program for compatibility with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect.
No!
Yes!
OmitTags
enumeration
No!
Yes!
DocTypeName
string
See Also
SGMLOpenFileDlg
SGMLPrefDlg
Purpose
Display the SGML Settings dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLPrefDlg ()
SGMLPreferences
Purpose
Specify a default directory for the document type files and the display settings for tags in the document and in Reveal Codes. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLPreferences (DocTypeDir: string; Show: enumeration; RevealCode: enumeration; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; FontSize: measurement)
Parameters
DocTypeDir
string (optional)
Show
enumeration (optional)
Hide!
Show!
ShowAsMarkers!
RevealCode
enumeration (optional)
ShowAttributes!
ShowLayout!
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
FontSize
measurement (optional)
SGMLRenameElement
Purpose
Rename the element previous to the insertion point. Does not change the element attributes. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed. Not recordable.
Syntax
SGMLRenameElement (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string
SGMLReplaceAttribute
Purpose
Replace the current attribute value. The attribute must be present in the previous start tag. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLReplaceAttribute (Name: string; Value: string)
Parameters
Name
string
Value
string
See Also
SGMLAddToAttrList, SGMLNewAttribute, SGMLBoxAttribute
SGMLRootElement
Purpose
Change the root element of the current document type. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLRootElement (Element: string)
Parameters
Element
string
SGMLRootElementDlg
Purpose
Display the Select Root Element dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLRootElementDlg ()
SGMLSaveAsOptions
Purpose
Set options for saving a document in SGML format. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLSaveAsOptions (DocTypeDeclaration: enumeration; SGMLDeclaration: enumeration; ConvertSRT: enumeration)
Parameters
DocTypeDeclaration
enumeration Include the Document Type Declaration in the saved SGML document. Default: Yes!
No!
Yes!
SGMLDeclarationIenumeration (optional) Include the SGML declaration at the beginning of the file. Default: No!
No!
Yes!
ConvertSRT
enumeration (optional) Convert soft returns in the document to hard returns in the saved SGML document. This command is obsolete in version 8; it has been left in the program for backwards compatibility.
No!
Yes!
SGMLSelectElement
Purpose
Select the open element at the insertion point. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLSelectElement ()
SGMLSelectLayout
Purpose
Change the layout of the SGML elements. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLSelectLayout (LayoutFile: string)
Parameters
LayoutFile
string (optional)
See Also
SGMLSelectLayoutDlg
SGMLSelectLayoutDlg
Purpose
Display the Select Layouts dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLSelectLayoutDlg ()
See Also
SGMLSelectLayout
SGMLSetValidation
Purpose
Specify the types of errors to find during validation. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLSetValidation ({Options: enumeration; })
Parameters
Options
enumeration (optional)
CharMap!
Entity!
EntityDecl!
IdIdref!
Logic!
TextSeq!
SGMLSplitElement
Purpose
Split the current SGML element into two separate elements of the same type. The attribute values will be duplicated for each element created. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLSplitElement ()
SGMLTagAllTables
Purpose
Tag all tables in a document. Can be used only with a document type that allows table tagging. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLTagAllTables ()
SGMLTagBox
Purpose
Tag the selected box based on the mappings specified in the layout (.LSI) file. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLTagBox ()
SGMLTagCurrentTable
Purpose
Tag the current table. Your document type must use one of the table methods supported by the SGML edition of Corel WordPerfect. For more information about the supported table methods, see Tag Tables in the main Help file. Any elements that are not part of the basic table structure (see below) must start and end within a single table cell. Any elements that are part of the basic table structure must start within the table.
Basic Table Structure:
For CALS: colspec, entry, row, spanspec, table, tbody, tgroup, thead, and title.
For AAP: ctbf, ctbl, ctby, ctc, cte, cth, cthd, cthr, ctr, ctsb1, ctsb2, ctsb3, ctsb4, and ctsh.
For HTML: table, tr, td, th.For WP6: table, cell, colinf, and row.
For WP6MIN: table, cell, and row.
For WP: wpcell, wprow, and wptable.
This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLTagCurrentTable ()
SGMLTagTablesDlg
Purpose
Display the Tag Tables dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLTagTablesDlg ()
SGMLTextRefDlg
Purpose
Display the Text References dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed. Not recordable.
Syntax
SGMLTextRefDlg ()
SGMLUnloadDocType
Purpose
Deselect a document type for the current document. The document type includes at least a document type name and logic file (.LGC), but may also include a layout file (.LSI) and an alias file (.LNM). This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLUnloadDocType ()
SGMLValidate
Purpose
Find the next validation error. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLValidate ()
SGMLValidationDlg
Purpose
Display the Validation dialog box. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
SGMLValidationDlg ()
ShadowCursorOptions
Purpose
Set the shape, type, and color of the shadow cursor.
Syntax
ShadowCursorOptions (State: enumeration; Snap: enumeration; Shape: enumeration; ColorRed: numeric; ColorGreen: numeric; ColorBlue: numeric)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Text!
TextAndWhiteSpace!
WhiteSpace!
Snap
enumeration (optional)
Indents!
Margins!
Spaces!
Tabs!
Shape
enumeration (optional)
Arrows!
BottomArrow!
BrokenCaret!
Caret!
DottedCaret!
IBeam!
ColorRed
numeric (optional)
ColorGreen
numeric (optional)
ColorBlue
numeric (optional)
ShadowCursorShow
Purpose
Turn the shadow cursor on or off. Omitting the parameter toggles the state. This command also changes the display settings for the shadow cursor.
Syntax
boolean := ShadowCursorShow (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
See Also
PrefDisplaySet
ShiftTabKey
Purpose
Insert a [Hd Back Tab] code at the insertion point. If the insertion point is in a table, it will go to the previous table cell. If the insertion point is in an outline, it will go to the previous outline level.
Syntax
ShiftTabKey ()
ShowBoxes
Purpose
Display graphics boxes.
Syntax
ShowBoxes (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?ShowBoxes
ShowGraphics
Purpose
Toggle Graphics.
Syntax
ShowGraphics ()
ShowHiddenText
Purpose
Toggle Hidden Text.
Syntax
ShowHiddenText ()
ShowSGMLTree
Purpose
Display or hide the SGML Tree. The tree will be displayed only if an SGML document is being edited. Switching to a non-SGML document does not close the tree. As soon as all SGML documents are closed, the tree will be hidden. This command is valid only if the Corel WordPerfect SGML program component is installed.
Syntax
ShowSGMLTree (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
ShowSymbols
Purpose
Toggle display of document symbols for codes such as [HRt], [Indent], and [Tab].
Syntax
ShowSymbols ()
SingleSmartQuote
Purpose
Turn Single SmartQuotes on or off and specify a quote character.
Syntax
SingleSmartQuote (State: enumeration; OpenSingleQuote: numeric; CloseSingleQuote: numeric)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
OpenSingleQuote
numeric (optional) The numeric equivalent of the quote character.
CloseSingleQuote
numeric (optional) The numeric equivalent of the quote character.
See Also
DoubleSmartQuote, UseRegQuotesWithNumbers
SingleSpaceInSentence
Purpose
Change double spaces in a sentence to single spaces.
Syntax
SingleSpaceInSentence (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
SoftHyphen
Purpose
Insert a soft hyphen at the insertion point. If the word needs to be hyphenated, it will break at the soft hyphen.
Syntax
SoftHyphen ()
SoftSpace
Purpose
Insert a space at the insertion point.
Syntax
SoftSpace ()
See Also
HardSpace
Sort
Purpose
Specify a file to sort and a file to which the changes are written.
Syntax
Sort (InFile: string; OutFile: string; State: enumeration)
Parameters
InFile
string (optional) Default: current document.
OutFile
string (optional) Default: current document.
State
enumeration (optional)
NoUndo!
Undo!
See Also
SortAction, SortCaseOrder, SortDlg, SortKeys, SortSelectString, SortType, SortUndo
SortAction
Purpose
Sort a file or selected records.
Syntax
SortAction (SortAction: enumeration)
Parameters
SortAction
enumeration
SelectOnly!
Sort!
See Also
?SortGetAction, ?SortGetCase, Sort, SortCaseOrder, SortKeys, SortSelectString, SortType, SortUndo
SortCaseOrder
Purpose
Specify the case priority in a sort.
Syntax
SortCaseOrder (Case: enumeration)
Parameters
Case
enumeration
LowercaseFirst!
UppercaseFirst!
See Also
?SortGetAction, ?SortGetCase, Sort, SortAction, SortKeys, SortType
SortDlg
Purpose
Display the Sort (Source and Destination) dialog box.
Syntax
SortDlg ()
SortKeys
Purpose
Specify the sort key options.
Syntax
SortKeys ({Field: numeric; Line: numeric; Word: numeric; SortType: enumeration; SortOrder: enumeration; })
Parameters
Field
numeric (optional)
Line
numeric (optional) The line to sort within a specified field. This parameter is always 1 if the sort type is Line.
Word
numeric (optional) The word to sort within a specified line and field.
SortType
enumeration (optional)
Alphanumeric!
Numeric!
SortOrder
enumeration (optional) Specify an ascending (a-z and 0-9) or descending (z-a and 9-0) sort.
Ascending!
Descending!
See Also
Sort, SortCaseOrder
SortSelectString
Purpose
Insert a character string into the Select Records text box of the Sort dialog box.
Syntax
SortSelectString (SelectString: string)
Parameters
SelectString
string
See Also
Sort
SortType
Purpose
Specify a source file format. ParagraphSort! sorts files leaving paragraphs intact. ColumnSort! sorts parallel columns. TableSort! sorts tables (rows = lines, cells = fields). MergeSort! sorts data files.
Syntax
SortType (SortType: enumeration)
Parameters
SortType
enumeration
ColumnSort!
LineSort!
MergeSort!
ParagraphSort!
TableSort!
See Also
Sort
SortUndo
Purpose
Enable or disable Undo in Sort.
Syntax
SortUndo (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
NoUndo!
Undo!
See Also
?SortGetUndo, Sort, SortAction
SoundClipAddInstance
Purpose
Add another reference to a sound clip already in the document.
Syntax
SoundClipAddInstance (Description: string)
Parameters
Description
string The sound clip name.
SoundClipCreate
Purpose
Insert a sound clip from a file into the Sound Clips in the Document dialog box.
Syntax
SoundClipCreate (Description: string; Filename: string; SoundFileType: enumeration; ClipType: enumeration; LeftVolume: numeric; RightVolume: numeric)
Parameters
Description
string
Filename
string
SoundFileType
enumeration
InDoc!
OnDisk!
ClipType
enumeration
DigitalAudio!
MIDI!
LeftVolume
numeric
RightVolume
numeric
SoundClipDelete
Purpose
Delete a sound clip.
Syntax
SoundClipDelete (Description: string)
Parameters
Description
string
SoundClipDlg
Purpose
Display the Sound Clips dialog box.
Syntax
SoundClipDlg ()
SoundClipPlayNext
Purpose
Play the next sound clip in the document.
Syntax
SoundClipPlayNext (Description: string; StartPos: numeric; EndPos: numeric)
Parameters
Description
string (optional)
StartPos
numeric (optional) The sound clip starting point in seconds.
EndPos
numeric (optional) The sound clip ending point in seconds.
SoundClipSetAttributes
Purpose
Specify sound clip attributes.
Syntax
SoundClipSetAttributes (Description: string; Type: enumeration; LeftVolume: numeric; RightVolume: numeric)
Parameters
Description
string
Type
enumeration
DigitalAudio!
MIDI!
LeftVolume
numeric (optional)
RightVolume
numeric (optional)
SoundClipSetDescription
Purpose
Assign a new description to a sound clip.
Syntax
SoundClipSetDescription (OldDescription: string; NewDescription: string)
Parameters
OldDescription
string
NewDescription
string
SoundClipSetFilename
Purpose
Change a sound clip to point to a different sound file on disk.
Syntax
SoundClipSetFilename (Description: string; Filename: string; Location: enumeration)
Parameters
Description
string
Filename
string
Location
enumeration
InDoc!
OnDisk!
SpecificDeleteStringBegin
Purpose
Delete specific codes. Follow with a command that specifies the specific code to delete, then SpecificStringEnd. Use with commands such as ReplaceBackward and ReplaceForward.
Syntax
SpecificDeleteStringBegin ()
See Also
MatchSelection, ReplaceBackward, ReplaceForward, SpecificReplaceStringBegin, SpecificSearchStringBegin, SpecificStringEnd
SpecificReplaceStringBegin
Purpose
Specify a specific code replacement. Follow with a command corresponding to a specific replacement code. Use with commands such as ReplaceBackward, ReplaceForward, SpecificSearchStringBegin, and SpecificStringEnd.
Syntax
SpecificReplaceStringBegin ()
See Also
ReplaceBackward, ReplaceForward, SpecificSearchStringBegin, SpecificStringEnd
SpecificSearchStringBegin
Purpose
Find a specific code. Follow with the macro command corresponding to the specific code to be found. Use with SpecificStringEnd.
Syntax
SpecificSearchStringBegin ()
See Also
SearchNext, SearchPrevious, SpecificDeleteStringBegin, SpecificReplaceStringBegin, SpecificStringEnd
SpecificStringEnd
Purpose
End a specific code search. Precede with SpecificSearchStringBegin, SpecificReplaceStringBegin, or SpecificDeleteStringBegin, and a command which specifies the specific code to search.
Syntax
SpecificStringEnd ()
See Also
SpecificDeleteStringBegin, SpecificReplaceStringBegin, SpecificSearchStringBegin
SpellAsYouGo
Purpose
Turn or toggle Spell-As-You-Go on or off, and return the original state. If the macro toolbar is active in the current document, this command causes a run-time error.
Syntax
boolean := SpellAsYouGo (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional) Omitting this parameter toggles Spell-As-You-Go on or off.
Off!
On!
See Also
IsTokenValid
SpreadsheetShowLinkCode
Purpose
Display or hide spreadsheet link codes.
Syntax
SpreadsheetShowLinkCode (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
ImportOptionsDlg
SpreadsheetUpdateOnRetrieve
Purpose
Turn the Update on retrieve option on or off for spreadsheet/database links.
Syntax
SpreadsheetUpdateOnRetrieve (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?AutoUpdate, ImportOptionsDlg
StatusBarShow
Purpose
Display or hide the status bar.
Syntax
StatusBarShow (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional) Default: toggle.
Off!
On!
See Also
?StatusBarActive, ViewToolbarsDlg
StyleCodes
Purpose
Edit style codes. Use with commands such as StyleEditBegin, StyleEditEnd, and SubstructureExit.
Syntax
StyleCodes (State: enumeration; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional) Include codes that take effect when the style is off.
WithOffCodes!
WithoutOffCodes!
Library
enumeration (optional) The styles codes location.
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
StyleEditBegin, StyleEditEnd
StyleCopy
Purpose
Copy a style between the current document, the personal library, and the shared library.
Syntax
StyleCopy (Style: any; FromLibrary: enumeration; ToLibrary: enumeration; NewName: string)
Parameters
Style
any Use a string to specify a user-defined style.
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
FromLibrary
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
ToLibrary
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
NewName
string (optional) The new style name.
See Also
StyleCreate, StyleDelete
StyleCreate
Purpose
Create a style.
Syntax
StyleCreate (Name: string; Type: enumeration; CreateFlag: enumeration; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Name
string
Type
enumeration
AutoCharacterStyle!
AutoParagraphStyle!
CharacterStyle!
NewBulletStyle!
OpenStyle!
ParagraphStyle!
CreateFlag
enumeration (optional) The pattern to base a style on.
CreateBulletStyle!
CreateFromCurrent!
CreateFromCurrentHS!
CreateNumberStyle!
CreateOutlineStyle!
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
StyleEditBegin, StyleEditEnd
StyleDelete
Purpose
Delete a style.
Syntax
StyleDelete (Style: any; Codes: enumeration; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any Use a string to specify a user-defined style.
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Codes
enumeration Delete or leave style codes.
IncludingCodes!
LeavingCodes!
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
StyleCopy, StyleCreate
StyleDescription
Purpose
Change a style description. Use with commands such as StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd.
Syntax
StyleDescription (Description: string)
Parameters
Description
string
See Also
StyleCreate, StyleEditBegin, StyleEditEnd
StyleEditBegin
Purpose
Begin editing a style. End with StyleEditEnd. Use with StyleCodes.
Syntax
StyleEditBegin (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any Use a string to specify a user-defined style.
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
StyleEditEnd
StyleEditEnd
Purpose
Save or cancel style changes. Use with StyleEditBegin and StyleCodes.
Syntax
StyleEditEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
See Also
StyleEditBegin
StyleEnterKeySetting
Purpose
Specify the effect of pressing Enter when a style is on. Use with commands such as StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd.
Syntax
StyleEnterKeySetting (Action: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
HardReturn!
StyleOff!
StyleOffOn!
See Also
StyleEditBegin, StyleEditEnd, StyleLinkTo
StyleLinkTo
Purpose
Specify a style to turn on when Enter is pressed. Use with commands such as StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd.
Syntax
StyleLinkTo (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any Use a string to specify a user-defined style.
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
See Also
StyleEditBegin, StyleEditEnd, StyleEnterKeySetting
StyleOff
Purpose
Turn off a style. Begin with StyleOn.
Syntax
StyleOff (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any (optional) Use a string to specify a user-defined style.
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
See Also
StyleOn
StyleOn
Purpose
Turn on a style. Recordable replacement: StyleSystemOn.
Syntax
StyleOn (Style: any; Action: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any Use a string to specify a user-defined style.
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Action
enumeration (optional)
SkipEmptyParagraphs!
See Also
StyleOff, StyleSystemOn
StylePersonalLibrary
Purpose
Specify a DOS Personal Library style file for the current document. Included for DOS compatibility. Use StyleSave or StyleCopy to place a style in a style file.
Syntax
StylePersonalLibrary (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
StyleRename
Purpose
Rename a style. Use with commands such StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd.
Syntax
StyleRename (Name: string)
Parameters
Name
string The new name.
See Also
StyleEditBegin, StyleEditEnd
StyleRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve the styles in a style file.
Syntax
StyleRetrieve (File: string; Styles: enumeration; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
File
string
Styles
enumeration
AllStyles!
SystemStyles!
UserStyles!
Library
enumeration (optional) The destination library.
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
StyleSave
StyleSave
Purpose
Save styles from a library to a style file.
Syntax
StyleSave (Filename: string; StyleType: enumeration; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
StyleType
enumeration
AllStyles!
SystemStyles!
UserStyles!
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
StyleRetrieve
StyleSharedLibrary
Purpose
Specify a DOS shared library style file for the current document. Included for DOS compatibility. StyleSave or StyleCopy places a style in a style file.
Syntax
StyleSharedLibrary (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
StylesListDlg
Purpose
Display the Style List dialog box.
Syntax
StylesListDlg ()
StyleSystemOn
Purpose
Turn on a Corel WordPerfect or user-defined style.
Syntax
StyleSystemOn (Style: any; Action: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Action
enumeration (optional)
SkipEmptyParagraphs!
StyleType
Purpose
Specify a style type. Use with commands such as StyleEditBegin and StyleEditEnd.
Syntax
StyleType (Type: enumeration)
Parameters
Type
enumeration
AutoCharacterStyle!
AutoParagraphStyle!
CharacterStyle!
NewBulletStyle!
OpenStyle!
ParagraphStyle!
See Also
StyleEditBegin, StyleEditEnd
StyleUpdate
Purpose
Update all styles in the current document.
Syntax
StyleUpdate ()
SubdividePage
Purpose
Divide a physical page into logical pages.
Syntax
SubdividePage (Columns: numeric; Rows: numeric)
Parameters
Columns
numeric The number of logical page columns on a physical page.
Rows
numeric The number of logical page rows on a physical page.
SubdividePageDlg
Purpose
Display the Divide Page tab of the Page Setup dialog box.
Syntax
SubdividePageDlg ()
SubdividePageOff
Purpose
Turn off Subdivide Page.
Syntax
SubdividePageOff ()
See Also
SubdividePage
SubdocInclude
Purpose
Insert a document into the current document as a subdocument.
Syntax
SubdocInclude (DocumentName: string)
Parameters
DocumentName
string The file to insert.
SubstructureExit
Purpose
Close the current substructure and optionally open an existing substructure of the same type.
Syntax
SubstructureExit (Action: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration (optional)
Next!
Previous!
Suppress
Purpose
Turn off the specified page formatting items for the current page.
Syntax
Suppress ({Item: enumeration; })
Parameters
Item
enumeration
FooterA!
FooterB!
HeaderA!
HeaderB!
PageNumberBottomCenter!
PageNumbering!
WatermarkA!
WatermarkB!
SwitchDoc
Purpose
Specify a document to switch to.
Syntax
SwitchDoc (DocNum: numeric)
Parameters
DocNum
numeric
Tab
Purpose
Insert a tab.
Syntax
Tab ()
See Also
TabKey, TabSet
TabAdd
Purpose
Add one or more tab sets to the current tab setting. If the parameter SpaceBetweenTabs is included, all tabs following an added tab reset to the new type and spacing.
Syntax
TabAdd (Position: measurement; Type: enumeration; SpaceBetweenTabs: measurement)
Parameters
Position
measurement The tab position relative to left edge of the page.
Type
enumeration
TabCenter!
TabCenterDot!
TabDecimal!
TabDecimalDot!
TabLeft!
TabLeftDot!
TabRight!
TabRightDot!
SpaceBetweenTabs
measurement (optional)
See Also
Tab, TabSet
TabBarIconShow
Purpose
Turn Tab Bar Icons on or off for the current session and return the current state. This command does not change display settings for Tab Bar Icons.
Syntax
boolean := TabBarIconShow (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
PrefDisplaySet
TabCenter
Purpose
Insert a Hard Centered Tab code.
Syntax
TabCenter (Type: enumeration)
Parameters
Type
enumeration (optional)
DotLeader!
Normal!
See Also
TabDecimal, TabLeft, TabRight
TabCenterDot
Purpose
Insert a Hard Centered Tab code with a dot leader. Recordable substitute: TabCenter.
Syntax
TabCenterDot ()
TabClearAll
Purpose
Clear all tab settings.
Syntax
TabClearAll ()
TabDecimal
Purpose
Insert a hard decimal-aligned tab.
Syntax
TabDecimal (Type: enumeration)
Parameters
Type
enumeration (optional)
DotLeader!
Normal!
See Also
TabCenter, TabLeft, TabRight
TabDecimalDot
Purpose
Insert a Hard Decimal Tab code with a dot leader. Recordable substitute: TabDecimal.
Syntax
TabDecimalDot ()
TabDelete
Purpose
Delete one tab setting without affecting any other tab settings.
Syntax
TabDelete (Position: measurement)
Parameters
Position
measurement
See Also
Tab, TabAdd, TabSet
TabForced
Purpose
Insert a forced tab. Forced tabs cannot be replaced by the QuickIndent feature. Recordable substitute: TabInsert.
Syntax
TabForced ()
See Also
TabInsert, QuickCorrectQuickIndentSet
TabInsert
Purpose
Insert a tab into the document.
Syntax
TabInsert ()
See Also
TabForced
TabKey
Purpose
Perform the functions of Tab: insert a tab, go to the next table cell, or go to the next outline level, depending on the location of the insertion point.
Syntax
TabKey ()
See Also
Tab
TableAdjustBegin
Purpose
Begin table adjustments from the Ruler. Follow with commands such as TableAdjustColumnWidth and TableAdjustPosition, and end with TableAdjustEnd.
Syntax
TableAdjustBegin ()
See Also
TableAdjustEnd, TableAdjustPosition
TableAdjustColumnWidth
Purpose
Specify a column width in WordPerfect units when adjusting columns from the Ruler. Use with TableAdjustBegin and TableAdjustEnd.
Syntax
TableAdjustColumnWidth (Column: numeric; Width: measurement)
Parameters
Column
numeric The leftmost column is 0.
Width
measurement
See Also
TableAdjustBegin, TableAdjustEnd
TableAdjustEnd
Purpose
End table adjustments from the Ruler. Precede with TableAdjustBegin and commands such as TableAdjustColumnWidth and TableAdjustPosition.
Syntax
TableAdjustEnd ()
See Also
TableAdjustBegin, TableAdjustColumnWidth, TableAdjustPosition
TableAdjustPosition
Purpose
Specify the number of WordPerfect units from the left margin to the left edge of a table when adjusting table position from the Ruler.
Syntax
TableAdjustPosition (Position: measurement)
Parameters
Position
measurement
See Also
TableAdjustBegin, TableAdjustEnd, TableMarginLeft
TableAlternateFillSet
Purpose
Specify the type of alternating table fill and the cell range to which the fill is applied.
Syntax
TableAlternateFillSet (State: enumeration; Span: numeric; AlternateSpan: numeric)
Parameters
State
enumeration
CheckerBoard!
Column!
Off!
Row!
Span
numeric (optional)
AlternateSpan
numeric (optional)
See Also
TableFill, TableSecondFill
TableAppendRow
Purpose
Insert a new row below the current row.
Syntax
TableAppendRow ()
See Also
TableInsertRow
TableApplyStyle
Purpose
Apply a table style using Table SpeedFormat.
Syntax
TableApplyStyle (Style: any; ResetAttributes: enumeration; ShowIn60: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any
|
NoTableStyle! |
TableStyle28! |
|
TableStyle1! |
TableStyle29! |
|
TableStyle10! |
TableStyle3! |
|
TableStyle11! |
TableStyle30! |
|
TableStyle12! |
TableStyle31! |
|
TableStyle13! |
TableStyle32! |
|
TableStyle14! |
TableStyle33! |
|
TableStyle15! |
TableStyle34! |
|
TableStyle16! |
TableStyle35! |
|
TableStyle17! |
TableStyle36! |
|
TableStyle18! |
TableStyle37! |
|
TableStyle19! |
TableStyle38! |
|
TableStyle2! |
TableStyle39! |
|
TableStyle20! |
TableStyle4! |
|
TableStyle21! |
TableStyle40! |
|
TableStyle22! |
TableStyle5! |
|
TableStyle23! |
TableStyle6! |
|
TableStyle24! |
TableStyle7! |
|
TableStyle25! |
TableStyle8! |
|
TableStyle26! |
TableStyle9! |
|
TableStyle27! |
ResetAttributes
enumeration (optional) Clear the current table settings.
No!
Yes!
ShowIn60
enumeration (optional) Apply a style on a cell-by-cell basis.
No!
Yes!
TableAttributeOff
Purpose
Turn off the specified font attributes and relative font size attributes in a table.
Syntax
TableAttributeOff ({Attribute: enumeration; })
Parameters
Attribute
enumeration (optional)
|
Bold! |
Shadow! |
|
DoubleUnderline! |
Small! |
|
Every! |
SmallCaps! |
|
ExtraLarge! |
Strikeout! |
|
Fine! |
Subscript! |
|
Italics! |
Superscript! |
|
Large! |
Underline! |
|
Outline! |
VeryLarge! |
|
Redline! |
See Also
TableAttributeOn
TableAttributeOn
Purpose
Turn on the specified character attributes in a table.
Syntax
TableAttributeOn ({Attribute: enumeration; })
Parameters
Attribute
enumeration (optional)
|
Bold! |
Shadow! |
|
DoubleUnderline! |
Small! |
|
Every! |
SmallCaps! |
|
ExtraLarge! |
Strikeout! |
|
Fine! |
Subscript! |
|
Italics! |
Superscript! |
|
Large! |
Underline! |
|
Outline! |
VeryLarge! |
|
Redline! |
See Also
TableAttributeOff
TableAutoCalc
Purpose
Specify automatic calculation for tables.
Syntax
TableAutoCalc (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
AutoDoc!
AutoTbl!
Off!
See Also
TableCalculate, TableCalculateAll, TableCalculateDlg, TableUpdateAssociatedCharts
TableAutoFill
Purpose
Use TableDataFill to increment values across a row or down a column.
Syntax
TableAutoFill ()
TableBlockOff
Purpose
Turn off Select in a table.
Syntax
TableBlockOff ()
TableBlockOn
Purpose
Turn on Select in a table.
Syntax
TableBlockOn ()
TableBorder
Purpose
Specify a table border type. Use with commands such as TableBorderEditBegin and TableBorderEditEnd.
Syntax
TableBorder (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any
|
ButtonBorder! |
HeavySingleBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderAll! |
NoBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderBetween! |
SingleBorder! |
|
DashedBorder! |
SpacingOnly! |
|
DottedBorder! |
ThickBorder! |
|
DoubleBorder! |
ThickThinBorder! |
|
ExtraThickBorder! |
ThickTopBottomBorder! |
|
HeavyDoubleBorder! |
ThinThickBorder! |
See Also
TableBorderEditBegin, TableBorderEditEnd
TableBorderEditBegin
Purpose
Begin table border editing. Follow with editing commands and TableBorderEditEnd.
Syntax
TableBorderEditBegin ()
See Also
TableBorderEditEnd
TableBorderEditEnd
Purpose
Save table border editing changes. Precede with TableBorderEditBegin and editing commands.
Syntax
TableBorderEditEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
See Also
TableBorderEditBegin
TableCalculate
Purpose
Calculate the formula values in the current table or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCalculate ()
See Also
TableCalculateAll, TableFormula
TableCalculateAll
Purpose
Calculate the formula values for all tables and floating cells in the current document.
Syntax
TableCalculateAll ()
See Also
TableCalculate
TableCalculateDlg
Purpose
Display the Calculate dialog box.
Syntax
TableCalculateDlg ()
See Also
TableCalculate
TableCellAttributeOff
Purpose
Turn off the specified font appearance, position, and relative size attributes in the selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellAttributeOff ({Attribute: enumeration; })
Parameters
Attribute
enumeration (optional)
|
Bold! |
Shadow! |
|
DoubleUnderline! |
Small! |
|
Every! |
SmallCaps! |
|
ExtraLarge! |
Strikeout! |
|
Fine! |
Subscript! |
|
Italics! |
Superscript! |
|
Large! |
Underline! |
|
Outline! |
VeryLarge! |
|
Redline! |
See Also
TableCellAttributeOn
TableCellAttributeOn
Purpose
Apply the specified font appearance, position, and relative size attributes of the selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellAttributeOn ({Attribute: enumeration; })
Parameters
Attribute
enumeration (optional)
|
Bold! |
Shadow! |
|
DoubleUnderline! |
Small! |
|
Every! |
SmallCaps! |
|
ExtraLarge! |
Strikeout! |
|
Fine! |
Subscript! |
|
Italics! |
Superscript! |
|
Large! |
Underline! |
|
Outline! |
VeryLarge! |
|
Redline! |
See Also
TableCellAttributeOff
TableCellCopy
Purpose
Copy the content of the specified cell(s) to the Clipboard, and paste it in the cell(s) specified by the CopyType parameter.
Syntax
TableCellCopy (CopyType: enumeration; Count: numeric)
Parameters
CopyType
enumeration
Cell!
Down!
Right!
Count
numeric (optional) The number of cells to paste the copied cell into. Use when the CopyType parameter is Down! or Right!.
See Also
EditCopy, EditPaste
TableCellDiagonalLine
Purpose
Add diagonal lines to a table cell.
Syntax
TableCellDiagonalLine (Diagonal: enumeration)
Parameters
Diagonal
enumeration
BotLeftToTopRight!
None!
TopLeftToBotRight!
TwoDiagonals!
TableCellDiagonalLineQry
Purpose
Return the diagonal lines options to active in the current table selection.
Syntax
numeric := TableCellDiagonalLineQry ()
See Also
TableCellDiagonalLine
TableCellFillColors
Purpose
Specify the foreground and background colors for the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellFillColors (ForeColorName: string; ForeColorRed: numeric; ForeColorGreen: numeric; ForeColorBlue: numeric; ForeColorShade: numeric; BackColorName: string; BackColorRed: numeric; BackColorGreen: numeric; BackColorBlue: numeric; BackColorShade: numeric)
Parameters
ForeColorName
string (optional)
ForeColorRed
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
ForeColorGreen
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
ForeColorBlue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
ForeColorShade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
BackColorName
string (optional)
BackColorRed
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
BackColorGreen
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
BackColorBlue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
BackColorShade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
See Also
FillColors, TableCellFillStyle
TableCellFillStyle
Purpose
Specify a shading style for the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellFillStyle (FillPattern: any)
Parameters
FillPattern
any
|
Fill10! |
Fill60! |
|
Fill100! |
Fill70! |
|
Fill20! |
Fill80! |
|
Fill30! |
Fill90! |
|
Fill40! |
FillButton! |
|
Fill5! |
NoFill! |
|
Fill50! |
See Also
TableCellFillColors
TableCellIgnoreCalculation
Purpose
Specify one or more selected cells to ignore when calculating formulas.
Syntax
TableCellIgnoreCalculation (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableCalculate
TableCellJustification
Purpose
Justify the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellJustification (Mode: enumeration)
Parameters
Mode
enumeration
Center!
DecAlign!
Full!
FullAll!
Left!
Right!
See Also
?CellJustification, ?CellSpecificJustification, TableColumnJustification, TableFormatJustification
TableCellLine
Purpose
Change the specified lines around a cell or selected cells, or between selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellLine (Position: enumeration; Style: any)
Parameters
Position
enumeration
Bottom!
Inside!
Left!
Outside!
Right!
Top!
Style
any
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
See Also
TableCellLineColor
TableCellLineColor
Purpose
Specify the line color of the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellLineColor (ColorName: string; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; Shade: numeric)
Parameters
ColorName
string (optional) This parameter has been left in for backward compatability with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect. To specify a color in Corel WordPerfect 8, use the Red, Green, and Blue parameters.
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Shade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
See Also
TableCellLine
TableCellLock
Purpose
Lock the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellLock (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumerationMacro List Text = No!
Yes!
TableCellNumberAlignCurrency
Purpose
Align the currency symbols in the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellNumberAlignCurrency (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableCellNumberSelectCurrency
TableCellNumberDateFormat
Purpose
Specify a date format for one or more selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellNumberDateFormat (DateFormatNumber: numeric)
Parameters
DateFormatNumber
numeric 1 July 5, 1959
2 7/5/59
3 Jul 5, 1959
4 5 July 1959
5 Sunday, July 5, 1959
6 12:00 pm
7 05Jul59
8 July 5, 1959 (12:00pm)
9 1959-07-05
10 7/5
11 Jul 5
12 12:00:00
See Also
TableCellNumberFormat
TableCellNumberDecimalDigits
Purpose
Specify how many digits appear after the decimal. Use when the FormatType parameter of TableCellNumberFormat is Fixed2!.
Syntax
TableCellNumberDecimalDigits (NumDigits: numeric)
Parameters
NumDigits
numeric
See Also
TableCellNumberFormat
TableCellNumberFormat
Purpose
Specify a number format for the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellNumberFormat (FormatType: enumeration)
Parameters
FormatType
enumeration
|
Accounting! |
General! |
|
Commas! |
Integer! |
|
Currency! |
Percent! |
|
DateFormat! |
Scientific! |
|
Fixed2! |
TextOnly! |
See Also
TableCellNumberAlignCurrency, TableCellNumberDateFormat, TableCellNumberDecimalDigits, TableCellNumberRound, TableCellNumberSelectCurrency
TableCellNumberNegativeNumber
Purpose
Specify how to display negative numbers in the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellNumberNegativeNumber (NegDisplayType: enumeration)
Parameters
NegDisplayType
enumeration
CRDR!
Minus!
Parentheses!
TableCellNumberRound
Purpose
Convert round numbers entered as decimals to integers. Use when the FormatType parameter of TableCellNumberFormat is Integer!.
Syntax
TableCellNumberRound (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableCellNumberFormat
TableCellNumberSelectCurrency
Purpose
Specify an international currency type for the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellNumberSelectCurrency (IntlCurrency: enumeration)
Parameters
IntlCurrency
enumeration
|
Austria! |
Israel! |
|
Belgium! |
Italy! |
|
BelgiumFrench! |
Japan! |
|
Brazil! |
Korea! |
|
Canada! |
Netherlands! |
|
China! |
Norway! |
|
Croatia! |
NorwayIntl! |
|
CzechRepublic! |
Paraguay! |
|
DefaultCurrency! |
Peseta! |
|
Denmark! |
Peso! |
|
Dollar! |
Poland! |
|
Ecuador! |
Portugal! |
|
ElSalvador! |
Ruble! |
|
Finland! |
RussianRuble! |
|
FinlandIntl! |
Singapore! |
|
France! |
SlovakRepublic! |
|
FrenchCanada! |
Slovenia! |
|
Germany! |
SouthAfrica! |
|
Greece! |
Sweden! |
|
Guatemala! |
Switzerland! |
|
Honduras! |
Taiwan! |
|
HongKong! |
Turkey! |
|
Hungary! |
UnitedKingdom! |
|
Iceland! |
Venezuela! |
See Also
TableCellNumberAlignCurrency, TableCellNumberFormat
TableCellNumberUseCommas
Purpose
Display commas in numbers with more than three digits to the left of the decimal.
Syntax
TableCellNumberUseCommas (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableCellNumberFormat
TableCellNumberUseCurrency
Purpose
Display a currency symbol with numbers.
Syntax
TableCellNumberUseCurrency (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableCellNumberFormat
TableCellRotateContents
Purpose
Rotate the contents of the selected table cell(s).
Syntax
TableCellRotateContents (Angle: enumeration)
Parameters
Angle
enumeration
Degrees180!
Degrees270!
Degrees90!
None!
TableCellsJoin
Purpose
Join the selected table cells to form one cell. Recordable substitute: TableJoinCells.
Syntax
TableCellsJoin ()
TableCellUseColumnAttribute
Purpose
Apply a specified column attribute to the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellUseColumnAttribute (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableCellUseColumnJust
TableCellUseColumnJust
Purpose
Turn column justification on or off in the current cell.
Syntax
TableCellUseColumnJust (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableCellUseColumnAttribute, TableCellUseColumnNumberType
TableCellUseColumnNumberType
Purpose
Turn the current column number type on or off in the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellUseColumnNumberType (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableCellUseColumnAttribute, TableCellUseColumnJust
TableCellUseLineColor
Purpose
Turn on table line color for the current cell or selected cells.
Syntax
TableCellUseLineColor ()
See Also
LineStyleEdit, TableCellLineColor
TableCellVerticalAlignment
Purpose
Align the current cell or selected cells vertically.
Syntax
TableCellVerticalAlignment (Alignment: enumeration)
Parameters
Alignment
enumeration
Bottom!
Center!
Top!
See Also
TableCellJustification
TableColumnAttributeOff
Purpose
Turn off the specified character attributes in a table column. Not recordable.
Syntax
TableColumnAttributeOff ({Attribute: enumeration; })
Parameters
Attribute
enumeration (optional)
|
Bold! |
Shadow! |
|
DoubleUnderline! |
Small! |
|
Every! |
SmallCaps! |
|
ExtraLarge! |
Strikeout! |
|
Fine! |
Subscript! |
|
Italics! |
Superscript! |
|
Large! |
Underline! |
|
Outline! |
VeryLarge! |
|
Redline! |
See Also
TableColumnAttributeOn
TableColumnAttributeOn
Purpose
Turn on the specified character attributes in a table column. Not recordable.
Syntax
TableColumnAttributeOn ({Attribute: enumeration; })
Parameters
Attribute
enumeration (optional)
|
Bold! |
Shadow! |
|
DoubleUnderline! |
Small! |
|
Every! |
SmallCaps! |
|
ExtraLarge! |
Strikeout! |
|
Fine! |
Subscript! |
|
Italics! |
Superscript! |
|
Large! |
Underline! |
|
Outline! |
VeryLarge! |
|
Redline! |
See Also
TableColumnAttributeOff
TableColumnDecimalAlignDigits
Purpose
Specify the number of digits to display between the decimal point and the right edge of cells with decimal align justification in the current column.
Syntax
TableColumnDecimalAlignDigits (Digits: numeric)
Parameters
Digits
numeric
See Also
TableCellJustification, TableColumnDecimalAlignDist, TableColumnJustification, TableFormatJustification
TableColumnDecimalAlignDist
Purpose
Specify the distance between the decimal and the right edge of cells with decimal align justification in the current column.
Syntax
TableColumnDecimalAlignDist (Distance: measurement)
Parameters
Distance
measurement
See Also
TableCellJustification, TableColumnDecimalAlignDigits, TableColumnJustification, TableFormatJustification
TableColumnFixedWidth
Purpose
Specify a fixed column width.
Syntax
TableColumnFixedWidth (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableColumnWidth, TableColumnsFixedWidth
TableColumnJustification
Purpose
Specify column justification.
Syntax
TableColumnJustification (Mode: enumeration)
Parameters
Mode
enumeration
Center!
DecAlign!
Full!
FullAll!
Left!
Right!
See Also
?CellJustification, TableCellJustification, TableFormatJustification
TableColumnMarginLeft
Purpose
Specify the distance between the left edge of a column and the text in the column.
Syntax
TableColumnMarginLeft (Margin: measurement)
Parameters
Margin
measurement
See Also
TableColumnMarginRight, TableMarginLeft, TableMarginRight
TableColumnMarginRight
Purpose
Specify the distance between the right edge of a column and the text in the column.
Syntax
TableColumnMarginRight (Margin: measurement)
Parameters
Margin
measurement
See Also
TableColumnMarginLeft, TableMarginLeft, TableMarginRight
TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency
Purpose
Align the currency symbols in a column.
Syntax
TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableColumnNumberSelCurrency
TableColumnNumberDateFormat
Purpose
Specify a date format for the current column.
Syntax
TableColumnNumberDateFormat (DateFmtNum: numeric)
Parameters
DateFmtNum
numeric 1 July 5, 1959
2 7/5/59
3 Jul 5, 1959
4 5 July 1959
5 Sunday, July 5, 1959
6 12:00 pm
7 5Jul59
8 July 5, 1959 (12:00pm)
9 1959-07-05
10 7/5
11 Jul 5
12 15:02:02
See Also
TableColumnNumberFormat
TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits
Purpose
Specify the number of digits after the decimal when TableColumnNumberFormat is Fixed2!. Precede with TableColumnNumberFormat.
Syntax
TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits (NumDigits: numeric)
Parameters
NumDigits
numeric
See Also
TableColumnNumberFormat
TableColumnNumberFormat
Purpose
Specify a number format for the current column.
Syntax
TableColumnNumberFormat (FormatType: enumeration)
Parameters
FormatType
enumeration
|
Accounting! |
General! |
|
Commas! |
Integer! |
|
Currency! |
Percent! |
|
DateFormat! |
Scientific! |
|
Fixed2! |
TextOnly! |
See Also
TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency, TableColumnNumberDateFormat, TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits, TableColumnNumberRound, TableColumnNumberSelCurrency
TableColumnNumberNegNumber
Purpose
Specify how to display negative numbers in the current column.
Syntax
TableColumnNumberNegNumber (NegDisplayType: enumeration)
Parameters
NegDisplayType
enumeration
CRDR!
Minus!
Parentheses!
TableColumnNumberRound
Purpose
Round numbers entered as decimals to integers in the current column when TableColumnNumberFormat is set to Integer!.
Syntax
TableColumnNumberRound (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableColumnNumberFormat
TableColumnNumberSelCurrency
Purpose
Specify a currency type for the current column.
Syntax
TableColumnNumberSelCurrency (IntlCurrency: enumeration)
Parameters
IntlCurrency
enumeration
|
Austria! |
Israel! |
|
Belgium! |
Italy! |
|
BelgiumFrench! |
Japan! |
|
Brazil! |
Korea! |
|
Canada! |
Netherlands! |
|
China! |
Norway! |
|
Croatia! |
NorwayIntl! |
|
CzechRepublic! |
Paraguay! |
|
DefaultCurrency! |
Peseta! |
|
Denmark! |
Peso! |
|
Dollar! |
Poland! |
|
Ecuador! |
Portugal! |
|
ElSalvador! |
Ruble! |
|
Finland! |
RussianRuble! |
|
FinlandIntl! |
Singapore! |
|
France! |
SlovakRepublic! |
|
FrenchCanada! |
Slovenia! |
|
Germany! |
SouthAfrica! |
|
Greece! |
Sweden! |
|
Guatemala! |
Switzerland! |
|
Honduras! |
Taiwan! |
|
HongKong! |
Turkey! |
|
Hungary! |
UnitedKingdom! |
|
Iceland! |
Venezuela! |
See Also
TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency, TableColumnNumberFormat
TableColumnNumberUseCommas
Purpose
Display commas in numbers with three or more digits to the left of the decimal.
Syntax
TableColumnNumberUseCommas (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableColumnNumberFormat
TableColumnNumberUseCurrency
Purpose
Display a currency symbol with numbers.
Syntax
TableColumnNumberUseCurrency (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableColumnNumberFormat
TableColumnsFixedWidth
Purpose
Turn on the Fixed width option for all columns in the current table.
Syntax
TableColumnsFixedWidth (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableColumnFixedWidth
TableColumnSize2Fit
Purpose
Adjust the table column width to the width of a selected cell or to fit data.
Syntax
TableColumnSize2Fit ()
TableColumnWidth
Purpose
Specify the width of the current column.
Syntax
TableColumnWidth (ColumnWidth: measurement)
Parameters
ColumnWidth
measurement
See Also
TableColumnFixedWidth, TableFormatWidths
TableColumnWidthEqualize
Purpose
Make the widths of all the selected columns equal. This command sums the widths of the selected columns, finds the average, and applies it to each of the selected columns.
Syntax
TableColumnWidthEqualize ()
See Also
TableAdjustColumnWidth
TableColumnWidthGrow
Purpose
Increase the width of a table column.
Syntax
TableColumnWidthGrow ()
TableColumnWidthShrink
Purpose
Decrease the width of a table column.
Syntax
TableColumnWidthShrink ()
TableConvertDlg
Purpose
Display the Convert Table dialog box. If no text is selected, the macro ends or goes to the ONERROR label.
Syntax
TableConvertDlg ()
TableConvertFrom
Purpose
Convert the selected text in tabular or parallel columns to a table.
Syntax
TableConvertFrom (Type: enumeration)
Parameters
Type
enumeration
ParallelColumns!
TabularColumns!
See Also
TableCreate
TableCopy
Purpose
Copy the contents of the selected cells to the current column or the current row using (Block!). TableMoveModeEnd inserts selected cells into the table. To record, first select two or more cells.
Syntax
TableCopy (Copy: enumeration)
Parameters
Copy
enumeration
Block!
Column!
Row!
See Also
TableMove
TableCopyFormula
Purpose
Copy a formula from the current cell to another cell.
Syntax
TableCopyFormula (CellIDCntToCell: enumeration; Where: any)
Parameters
CellIDCntToCell
enumeration
Cell!
Down!
Right!
Where
any (optional) The cell address if CellIDCntToCell is Cell! or Right!
TableCreate
Purpose
Create a table.
Syntax
TableCreate (Columns: numeric; Rows: numeric)
Parameters
Columns
numeric
Rows
numeric
See Also
?BetweenTableCodes, ?TableInTable, TableConvertFrom, TableJoin, TableSplit
TableCreateDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Table dialog box.
Syntax
TableCreateDlg ()
See Also
TableCreate
TableCreateNewDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Table dialog box. Recordable equivalent: TableCreateDlg
Syntax
TableCreateNewDlg ()
See Also
TableCreate
TableDataFill
Purpose
Fill a cell with a formula or data. Select at least two cells. The first must contain data or a formula. At least one other selected cell must be empty.
Syntax
TableDataFill ()
TableDecimalAlignmentDigits
Purpose
Specify the number of digits between the decimal point and the right edge of cells.
Syntax
TableDecimalAlignmentDigits (Number: numeric)
Parameters
Number
numeric (optional)
See Also
TableDecimalAlignmentDistance, TableFormatJustification
TableDecimalAlignmentDistance
Purpose
Specify the distance between the decimal and the right edge of cells.
Syntax
TableDecimalAlignmentDistance (Position: measurement)
Parameters
Position
measurement (optional)
See Also
TableDecimalAlignmentDigits, TableFormatJustification
TableDefaultLine
Purpose
Specify the default line style of a table.
Syntax
TableDefaultLine (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any Enclose user-defined graphics line styles in quotation marks.
|
ButtonBottomRightLine! |
HeavySingleLine! |
|
ButtonTopLeftLine! |
NoLine! |
|
DashedLine! |
SingleLine! |
|
DottedLine! |
TableDefaultLine! |
|
DoubleLine! |
ThickLine! |
|
ExtraThickLine! |
ThickThinLine! |
|
HeavyDoubleLine! |
ThinThickLine! |
See Also
TableCellLine
TableDefaultLineColor
Purpose
Specify the default line color for a table.
Syntax
TableDefaultLineColor (ColorName: string; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric; Shade: numeric)
Parameters
ColorName
string (optional) This parameter has been left in for backward compatability with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect. To specify a color in Corel WordPerfect 8, use the Red, Green, and Blue parameters.
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Shade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
See Also
TableCellLineColor
TableDeleteBlock
Purpose
Delete the contents of selected cells.
Syntax
TableDeleteBlock ()
See Also
TableDeleteColumn, TableDeleteRow, TableUndelete
TableDeleteCellFormula
Purpose
Delete the formulas in the current cell.
Syntax
TableDeleteCellFormula ()
TableDeleteColumn
Purpose
Delete table columns.
Syntax
TableDeleteColumn (Number: numeric)
Parameters
Number
numeric The number of columns to delete, beginning with the current column and moving left. Default: current column or selected columns.
See Also
TableDeleteBlock, TableDeleteRow, TableUndelete
TableDeleteDlg
Purpose
Display the Delete dialog box.
Syntax
TableDeleteDlg ()
See Also
TableDeleteColumn, TableDeleteRow
TableDeleteRow
Purpose
Delete table rows.
Syntax
TableDeleteRow (Number: numeric)
Parameters
Number
numeric (optional) The number of rows to delete, beginning with the current row and moving down.
See Also
TableDeleteColumn, TableDeleteDlg
TableDeleteTable
Purpose
Delete a table and/or its contents, or convert the table data to tabbed text or merge fields.
Syntax
TableDeleteTable (DelWhat: enumeration)
Parameters
DelWhat
enumeration
ConvertOnly! Deletes table contents only.
ConvertToMerge! Converts cells of each row to ENDFIELD codes.
ConvertToMergeNames! Converts first row cells to FIELDNAMES, and cells in remaining rows to ENDFIELD codes.
ConvertToTabs! Deletes table structure and converts contents to tabbed text.
EntireTable!
TableDeleteTableDlg
Purpose
Display the Delete Table dialog box.
Syntax
TableDeleteTableDlg ()
TableDisableCellLocks
Purpose
Turn off cell locks.
Syntax
TableDisableCellLocks (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
TableDragToCreate
Purpose
Turn the Drag to Create Tables option on or off.
Syntax
TableDragToCreate (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
TableEdit
Purpose
Begin a table editing command sequence. If not in a table, the macro searches backward for a table to edit. If no table is found, it searches forward.
Syntax
TableEdit ()
See Also
TableCreate
TableExpertDlg
Purpose
Display the Table SpeedFormat dialog box.
Syntax
TableExpertDlg ()
TableFill
Purpose
Specify a table fill pattern. Precede with TableBorderEditBegin and follow TableBorderEditEnd.
Syntax
TableFill (Pattern: any)
Parameters
Pattern
any
|
Fill10! |
Fill60! |
|
Fill100! |
Fill70! |
|
Fill20! |
Fill80! |
|
Fill30! |
Fill90! |
|
Fill40! |
FillButton! |
|
Fill5! |
NoFill! |
|
Fill50! |
See Also
TableAlternateFillSet, TableBorderEditBegin, TableBorderEditEnd, TableCellFillStyle, TableSecondFill
TableFormatDlg
Purpose
Display the Properties for Table Format tab.
Syntax
TableFormatDlg ()
TableFormatJustification
Purpose
Specify table justification.
Syntax
TableFormatJustification (Justification: enumeration)
Parameters
Justification
enumeration
Center!
DecAlign!
Full!
FullAll!
Left!
Right!
See Also
?CellJustification, Justification, TableCellJustification, TableColumnJustification
TableFormatWidths
Purpose
Set table column width.
Syntax
TableFormatWidths (Width: measurement)
Parameters
Width
measurement
TableFormula
Purpose
Specify a formula for the current cell.
Syntax
TableFormula (Formula: string)
Parameters
Formula
string
See Also
TableNameAdd
TableFormulaCBar
Purpose
Display the Table Formula feature bar, which helps you view and edit formulas in a table.
Syntax
TableFormulaCBar ()
TabLeft
Purpose
Insert a Hard Left Tab with or without a dot leader.
Syntax
TabLeft (Type: enumeration)
Parameters
Type
enumeration (optional)
DotLeader!
Normal!
See Also
TabCenter, TabDecimal, TabRight
TabLeftDot
Purpose
Insert a Hard Left Tab code with a dot leader. Recordable substitute: TabLeft.
Syntax
TabLeftDot ()
TableGridLinesToggle
Purpose
Display or hide table grid lines.
Syntax
TableGridLinesToggle ()
TableGuides
Purpose
Turn Table Guides on or off.
Syntax
TableGuides (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?TableGuides
TableHardColumnBreak
Purpose
Insert a column break and continue the table in the next column. Cannot be in the first row. In the last column, the table continues on the next page.
Syntax
TableHardColumnBreak ()
See Also
PosTableRowBegin, TableHardRow
TableHardRow
Purpose
Insert a page break and continue the table on the next page.
Syntax
TableHardRow ()
See Also
PosTableRowBegin, TableHardColumnBreak
TableHeader
Purpose
Specify the current row as a header row.
Syntax
TableHeader (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
TableInsertAutoRow
Purpose
Turn Auto Row Insert on or off.
Syntax
TableInsertAutoRow (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
TableInsertColumn
Purpose
Insert table columns before or after the insertion point.
Syntax
TableInsertColumn (Number: numeric; InsertPos: enumeration; PreserveWidths: enumeration)
Parameters
Number
numeric
InsertPos
enumeration
After!
Before!
PreserveWidths
enumeration (optional)
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableInsertRow
TableInsertDlg
Purpose
Display the Insert Columns/Rows dialog box.
Syntax
TableInsertDlg ()
See Also
TableInsertColumn, TableInsertRow
TableInsertOneRow
Purpose
Insert a new row above the current row.
Syntax
TableInsertOneRow ()
TableInsertRow
Purpose
Insert rows before or after the insertion point.
Syntax
TableInsertRow (NumberOfRows: numeric; InsertPosition: enumeration)
Parameters
NumberOfRows
numeric
InsertPosition
enumeration
After!
Before!
See Also
TableAppendRow, TableInsertColumn, TableInsertDlg
TableJoin
Purpose
Join the current and following tables. The tables must have the same number of columns.
Syntax
TableJoin ()
See Also
TableSplit
TableJoinCells
Purpose
Join the selected table cells.
Syntax
TableJoinCells ()
TableJoinCellTool
Purpose
Turn on or off the join cells tools.
Syntax
TableJoinCellTool ()
TableLineFillDlg
Purpose
Display the Table Lines/Fill dialog box. The insertion point must be in a table.
Syntax
TableLineFillDlg ()
TableMarginLeft
Purpose
Specify the distance from the left edge of all cells in a table to the cell text.
Syntax
TableMarginLeft (Margin: measurement)
Parameters
Margin
measurement
See Also
TableColumnMarginLeft, TableColumnMarginRight, TableMarginRight
TableMarginRight
Purpose
Specify the distance from the right edge of all cells in a table to the cell text.
Syntax
TableMarginRight (Margin: measurement)
Parameters
Margin
measurement
See Also
TableColumnMarginLeft, TableColumnMarginRight, TableMarginLeft
TableMove
Purpose
Move the contents of the current cell, selected cells, current column, or current row. At least two cells must be selected. Follow with TableMoveModeEnd to insert contents.
Syntax
TableMove (Move: enumeration)
Parameters
Move
enumeration
Block!
Cell!
Column!
Row!
See Also
TableCopy
TableMoveCopyDlg
Purpose
Display the Copy Formula dialog box.
Syntax
TableMoveCopyDlg ()
See Also
TableCopy, TableMove
TableMoveModeCancel
Purpose
Cancel TableMove or TableCopy.
Syntax
TableMoveModeCancel ()
TableMoveModeEnd
Purpose
Paste the contents moved or copied with TableMove or TableCopy into a table at the insertion point.
Syntax
TableMoveModeEnd ()
TableNameAdd
Purpose
Name a cell, block of cells, row, column, or table.
Syntax
TableNameAdd (RefType: enumeration; Name: string)
Parameters
RefType
enumeration
Block!
Cell!
CellsDown!
CellsRight!
Column!
FloatingCell!
Row!
Table!
Name
string (optional)
See Also
TableNameDelete
TableNameChange
Purpose
Rename an existing table.
Syntax
TableNameChange (OldName: string; NewName: string; NewRef: string)
Parameters
OldName
string
NewName
string (optional)
NewRef
string (optional)
TableNameCreateDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Name dialog box.
Syntax
TableNameCreateDlg ()
TableNameDelete
Purpose
Delete a table name.
Syntax
TableNameDelete (TableName: string)
Parameters
TableName
string
See Also
TableNameAdd
TableNameListDlg
Purpose
Display the Table Names in Current Document dialog box.
Syntax
TableNameListDlg ()
See Also
TableNameAdd
TableNumberAlignCurrency
Purpose
Align the currency symbols in a table.
Syntax
TableNumberAlignCurrency (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableNumberSelectCurrency
TableNumberDateFormat
Purpose
Specify a date format for the current table.
Syntax
TableNumberDateFormat (DateFmtNum: numeric)
Parameters
DateFmtNum
numeric 1 July 5, 1959
2 7/5/59
3 Jul 5, 1959
4 5 July 1959
5 Sunday, July 5, 1959
6 12:00 pm
7 05Jul59
8 July 5, 1959 (12:00pm)
See Also
TableNumberFormat
TableNumberDecimalDigits
Purpose
Specify the number of digits after the decimal.
Syntax
TableNumberDecimalDigits (NumDigits: numeric)
Parameters
NumDigits
numeric
See Also
TableNumberFormat
TableNumberFormat
Purpose
Specify a numbering type for the current table.
Syntax
TableNumberFormat (FormatType: enumeration)
Parameters
FormatType
enumeration
|
Accounting! |
General! |
|
Commas! |
Integer! |
|
Currency! |
Percent! |
|
DateFormat! |
Scientific! |
|
Fixed2! |
TextOnly! |
See Also
TableColumnNumberAlignCurrency, TableColumnNumberDateFormat, TableColumnNumberDecimalDigits, TableColumnNumberRound, TableNumberSelectCurrency, PowerTableNumericFormat
TableNumberNegativeNumber
Purpose
Specify the display of negative numbers in the current table.
Syntax
TableNumberNegativeNumber (NegDisplay: enumeration)
Parameters
NegDisplay
enumeration
CRDR!
Minus!
Parentheses!
TableNumberRound
Purpose
Round decimal numbers to integers when the FormatType parameter of TableNumberFormat is Integer!.
Syntax
TableNumberRound (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableNumberFormat
TableNumberSelectCurrency
Purpose
Specify a currency type for the current table.
Syntax
TableNumberSelectCurrency (IntlCurrency: enumeration)
Parameters
IntlCurrency
enumeration
|
Austria! |
Israel! |
|
Belgium! |
Italy! |
|
BelgiumFrench! |
Japan! |
|
Brazil! |
Korea! |
|
Canada! |
Netherlands! |
|
China! |
Norway! |
|
Croatia! |
NorwayIntl! |
|
CzechRepublic! |
Paraguay! |
|
DefaultCurrency! |
Peseta! |
|
Denmark! |
Peso! |
|
Dollar! |
Poland! |
|
Ecuador! |
Portugal! |
|
ElSalvador! |
Ruble! |
|
Finland! |
RussianRuble! |
|
FinlandIntl! |
Singapore! |
|
France! |
SlovakRepublic! |
|
FrenchCanada! |
Slovenia! |
|
Germany! |
SouthAfrica! |
|
Greece! |
Sweden! |
|
Guatemala! |
Switzerland! |
|
Honduras! |
Taiwan! |
|
HongKong! |
Turkey! |
|
Hungary! |
UnitedKingdom! |
|
Iceland! |
Venezuela! |
See Also
TableNumberAlignCurrency
TableNumberTypeDlg
Purpose
Display the Properties for Table Numeric Format tab.
Syntax
TableNumberTypeDlg ()
TableNumberUseCommas
Purpose
Display commas in numbers with more than three digits to the left of the decimal.
Syntax
TableNumberUseCommas (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableNumberFormat
TableNumberUseCurrency
Purpose
Display a currency symbol with numbers.
Syntax
TableNumberUseCurrency (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
TableNumberFormat
TablePointMode
Purpose
Toggle Formula Edit in a table.
Syntax
TablePointMode (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
TablePosition
Purpose
Specify table position.
Syntax
TablePosition (PositionVal: enumeration; SetAbsPos: measurement)
Parameters
PositionVal
enumeration
AlignAbsolute!
AlignCenter!
AlignFull!
AlignLeft!
AlignRight!
SetAbsPos
measurement (optional) The absolute position from the left edge of the paper when PositionVal is AlignAbsolute!.
TablePosNextTable
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the next table.
Syntax
TablePosNextTable ()
See Also
TablePosPreviousTable
TablePosPreviousTable
Purpose
Move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous table.
Syntax
TablePosPreviousTable ()
See Also
TablePosNextTable
TableQuickSum
Purpose
Calculate the sum of cells above the current cell in the current column. Or, if the cell immediately above the current cell is blank, calculates the sum of cells left of the current cell in the current row. Cells above or to the left of a blank cell are not included in the calculation.
Syntax
TableQuickSum ()
TableReformatAll
Purpose
Reformat all tables in the current document. Used particularly to reformat floating cell numbers and currency symbols if the language is changed.
Syntax
TableReformatAll ()
TableRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve the last item moved or copied in a table.
Syntax
TableRetrieve (Reference: enumeration)
Parameters
Reference
enumeration
Block!
Cell!
Column!
Row!
See Also
TableCopy, TableMove
TableRotateCell
Purpose
Rotate the contents of the current cell by 90 degrees.
Syntax
TableRotateCell ()
TableRowCanSpanPages
Purpose
Allow a table row to span two or more pages.
Syntax
TableRowCanSpanPages (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
TableRowColIndicators
Purpose
Turn row and column indicators on or off.
Syntax
TableRowColIndicators ()
TableRowHeight
Purpose
Specify whether row height is automatic or fixed, and if fixed, specify the height.
Syntax
TableRowHeight (RowHeight: enumeration; Amount: measurement)
Parameters
RowHeight
enumeration
Auto!
Fixed!
Amount
measurement (optional) The row height when the Type parameter is Fixed!.
See Also
TableColumnWidth
TableRowMarginBottom
Purpose
Specify the distance between the last line of text and the bottom of the cell.
Syntax
TableRowMarginBottom (Margin: measurement)
Parameters
Margin
measurement
See Also
TableRowMarginTop
TableRowMarginTop
Purpose
Specify the distance between the top of a cell and the first line of text in the cell.
Syntax
TableRowMarginTop (Margin: measurement)
Parameters
Margin
measurement
See Also
TableRowMarginBottom
TableRowNumberOfLines
Purpose
Specify single or multiple lines in the cells of a row.
Syntax
TableRowNumberOfLines (RowLines: enumeration)
Parameters
RowLines
enumeration
Multiple!
Single!
TableSecondFill
Purpose
Specify an alternating fill style for a table.
Syntax
TableSecondFill (FillStyle: any)
Parameters
FillStyle
any
|
Fill10! |
Fill60! |
|
Fill100! |
Fill70! |
|
Fill20! |
Fill80! |
|
Fill30! |
Fill90! |
|
Fill40! |
FillButton! |
|
Fill5! |
NoFill! |
|
Fill50! |
See Also
TableAlternateFillSet, TableFill, TableSecondFillColors
TableSecondFillColors
Purpose
Specify the color of a table alternating fill. Use TableBorderEditBegin before this command and follow with TableBorderEditEnd.
Syntax
TableSecondFillColors (ForeColorName: string; ForeRed: numeric; ForeGreen: numeric; ForeBlue: numeric; ForeShade: numeric; BackColorName: string; BackRed: numeric; BackGreen: numeric; BackBlue: numeric; BackShade: numeric)
Parameters
ForeColorName
string (optional)
ForeRed
numeric (optional) Value: 0-225.
ForeGreen
numeric (optional) Value: 0-225.
ForeBlue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-225.
ForeShade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
BackColorName
string (optional)
BackRed
numeric (optional) Value: 0-225.
BackGreen
numeric (optional) Value: 0-225.
BackBlue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-225.
BackShade
numeric (optional) Percent: 0-100.
See Also
FillColors, TableSecondFill
TableSelectOff
Purpose
Turn off Select.
Syntax
TableSelectOff ()
TableSelectOn
Purpose
Select a row, column, cell, or table.
Syntax
TableSelectOn (SelectionMode: enumeration)
Parameters
SelectionMode
enumeration
Cell!
Column!
Row!
Table!
TableSize
Purpose
Change the number of rows or columns in an existing table. Rows are added or deleted from the bottom of the existing table. Columns are added or deleted from the right of the existing table.
Syntax
TableSize (Rows: numeric; Columns: numeric)
Parameters
Rows
numeric (optional) The number of rows in the resulting table.
Columns
numeric (optional) The number of columns in the resulting table.
See Also
TableCreate
TableSortTable
Purpose
Sort a table by the contents of a selected cell.
Syntax
TableSortTable ({SortType: enumeration; SortOrder: enumeration; })
Parameters
SortType
enumeration (optional)
Alphanumeric!
Numeric!
SortOrder
enumeration (optional)
Ascending!
Descending!
TableSplit
Purpose
Split a table into two tables. A table cannot be split on the first row. The second table begins with the current row.
Syntax
TableSplit ()
See Also
TableJoin
TableSplitCellsDlg
Purpose
Display the Split Cell dialog box.
Syntax
TableSplitCellsDlg ()
TableSplitColumn
Purpose
Split the current cell into multiple columns.
Syntax
TableSplitColumn (ColumnCount: numeric; ColumnPos: measurement)
Parameters
ColumnCount
numeric
ColumnPos
measurement (optional)
See Also
TableSplitRow
TableSplitColumnTool
Purpose
Turn the split column tool on or off.
Syntax
TableSplitColumnTool (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
TableSplitRow
Purpose
Split the current cell into multiple rows.
Syntax
TableSplitRow (RowCount: numeric; RowPos: numeric)
Parameters
RowCount
numeric
RowPos
numeric (optional)
See Also
TableSplitColumn
TableSplitRowTool
Purpose
Turn the split row tool on or off.
Syntax
TableSplitRowTool (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
TableStyleCreate
Purpose
Create a table style.
Syntax
TableStyleCreate (Style: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
string
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
TableStyleDelete
Purpose
Delete a table style.
Syntax
TableStyleDelete (Style: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
string
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
TableStyleEdit
Purpose
Edit a table style. Use with TableStyleName and TableStyleReplace.
Syntax
TableStyleEdit (Style: any; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any
|
NoTableStyle! |
TableStyle28! |
|
TableStyle1! |
TableStyle29! |
|
TableStyle10! |
TableStyle3! |
|
TableStyle11! |
TableStyle30! |
|
TableStyle12! |
TableStyle31! |
|
TableStyle13! |
TableStyle32! |
|
TableStyle14! |
TableStyle33! |
|
TableStyle15! |
TableStyle34! |
|
TableStyle16! |
TableStyle35! |
|
TableStyle17! |
TableStyle36! |
|
TableStyle18! |
TableStyle37! |
|
TableStyle19! |
TableStyle38! |
|
TableStyle2! |
TableStyle39! |
|
TableStyle20! |
TableStyle4! |
|
TableStyle21! |
TableStyle40! |
|
TableStyle22! |
TableStyle5! |
|
TableStyle23! |
TableStyle6! |
|
TableStyle24! |
TableStyle7! |
|
TableStyle25! |
TableStyle8! |
|
TableStyle26! |
TableStyle9! |
|
TableStyle27! |
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
TableStyleEnd
Purpose
Save or cancel table style settings.
Syntax
TableStyleEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
TableStyleName
Purpose
Specify the name of a new table style. Use with TableStyleEdit.
Syntax
TableStyleName (Style: string)
Parameters
Style
string
See Also
TableStyleRetrieve, TableStyleSave
TableStyleReplace
Purpose
Specify a user-defined table style to replace the current table style. Use with TableStyleEdit.
Syntax
TableStyleReplace (Style: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
string
Library
enumeration (optional)
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
TableStyleRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve a table style from the specified style library.
Syntax
TableStyleRetrieve (Filename: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
Library
enumeration
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
TableStyleName
TableStyleSave
Purpose
Save a table style to the specified style library.
Syntax
TableStyleSave (Filename: string; Library: enumeration)
Parameters
Filename
string
Library
enumeration
CurrentDoc!
PersonalLibrary!
SharedLibrary!
See Also
TableStyleName
TableTextBoxCreate
Purpose
Create a table in a text box.
Syntax
TableTextBoxCreate (Columns: numeric; Rows: numeric)
Parameters
Columns
numeric
Rows
numeric
TableTextToFormula
Purpose
Convert the contents of the current cell to a formula. Not recordable.
Syntax
TableTextToFormula ()
See Also
TableFormula
TableToolsDlg
Purpose
Display the Tools dialog box for editing a table. If the insertion point is not in a table when this command is executed, nothing happens.
Syntax
TableToolsDlg ()
TableUndelete
Purpose
Insert the last deleted item. Available only in table editing mode.
Syntax
TableUndelete ()
See Also
TableDeleteBlock, TableDeleteColumn, TableDeleteRow
TableUpdateAssociatedCharts
Purpose
Turn the Update associated charts option on or off.
Syntax
TableUpdateAssociatedCharts (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
TableAutoCalc
TableUseDefaultLinesColor
Purpose
Specify the Line Style line color as the default line color for a table.
Syntax
TableUseDefaultLinesColor ()
See Also
TableDefaultLineColor
TabRight
Purpose
Insert a right aligned tab (with or without a dot leader) at the insertion point.
Syntax
TabRight (Type: enumeration)
Parameters
Type
enumeration (optional)
DotLeader!
Normal!
See Also
TabCenter, TabDecimal, TabLeft
TabRightDot
Purpose
Insert a Hard Right Tab code with a dot leader. Recordable substitute: TabRight.
Syntax
TabRightDot ()
TabSet
Purpose
Specify tab settings.
Syntax
TabSet (Origin: enumeration; {Position: measurement; TabType: enumeration; })
Parameters
Origin
enumeration Set tabs relative to the left edge of the paper (absolute) or the left margin setting (relative).
Absolute!
Relative!
Position
measurement (optional)
TabType
enumeration (optional)
TabCenter!
TabCenterDot!
TabDecimal!
TabDecimalDot!
TabLeft!
TabLeftDot!
TabRight!
TabRightDot!
See Also
?TabSettings, TabAdd, TabSetDlg
TabSetDlg
Purpose
Display the Tab Set dialog box.
Syntax
TabSetDlg ()
See Also
TabSet
TeamLinkEnable
Purpose
Turn TeamLinks electronic mail service on or off. A TeamLinks Integration module must be installed.
Syntax
TeamLinkEnable (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
TemplateCopyObject
Purpose
Copy a template object such as a style or a macro, from one template to another.
Syntax
TemplateCopyObject (CopyFrom: string; ObjectType: enumeration; ObjectName: string)
Parameters
CopyFrom
string
ObjectType
enumeration
Abbreviation!
ButtonBar!
Keyboard!
Macro!
Menu!
QuickWords!
ObjectName
string
TemplateCopyObjectDlg
Purpose
Display the Copy/Remove Template Objects dialog box.
Syntax
TemplateCopyObjectDlg ()
TemplateCreate
Purpose
Create a new template based on an existing template and open the new template in edit mode.
Syntax
TemplateCreate (Filename: string; BasedOn: string)
Parameters
Filename
string The filename of the new template. If a path is not included in this parameter, the new template file is created in the default template folder.
BasedOn
string (optional) The filename of the existing template to base the new template on. If a path is not included in this parameter, the command looks for the existing template in the default template folder.
TemplateDescriptionDlg
Purpose
Display the Template Description dialog box.
Syntax
TemplateDescriptionDlg ()
TemplateDlg
Purpose
Display the Select New Document dialog box.
Syntax
TemplateDlg ()
TemplateEdit
Purpose
Edit a template.
Syntax
TemplateEdit (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string The full path and filename.
TemplateFill
Purpose
Display a dialog box for entering template data. This dialog box varies depending on the fields required for the current template. If the personal information is not specified, this command first prompts the user to specify the personal information regardless of what data the current template requires.
If the current template does not require data beyond the personal information and the personal information has been set, this command updates the personal information in the document without displaying the dialog. If the current document is not based on an automated template and the personal information has been set, this command does nothing.
Syntax
TemplateFill ()
TemplateGetAssociation
Purpose
Return the name of the specified object that is associated in the current template with the specified feature or trigger. If the specified association does not exist in the current template, nothing is returned.
Syntax
string := TemplateGetAssociation (FeatureTrigger: enumeration; Object: enumeration)
Parameters
FeatureTrigger
enumeration
|
BoxSelected! |
PostPrint! |
|
Comment! |
PostStartup! |
|
Endnote! |
PostTables! |
|
EquationEditor! |
PreClose! |
|
Footers! |
PreDocument! |
|
Footnote! |
PreNew! |
|
Headers! |
PreOpen! |
|
Main! |
PrePrint! |
|
Outline! |
PreTables! |
|
PostClose! |
SGML! |
|
PostDocument! |
Tables! |
|
PostNew! |
Watermark! |
|
PostOpen! |
Object
enumeration
ButtonBar!
Keyboard!
Macro!
Menu!
See Also
TemplateSetAssociation
TemplateMacroEditControlBar
Purpose
Display the Template Macro Edit feature bar.
Syntax
TemplateMacroEditControlBar (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration (optional)
Off!
On!
TemplateSelect
Purpose
Select a document template.
Syntax
TemplateSelect (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
TemplateSetAssociation
Purpose
Assign menus, keyboards, and toolbars to selected Corel WordPerfect features or triggers in the current template.
Syntax
TemplateSetAssociation (FeatureTrigger: enumeration; Object: enumeration; ObjectName: string)
Parameters
FeatureTrigger
enumeration
|
BoxSelected! |
PostPrint! |
|
Comment! |
PostStartup! |
|
Endnote! |
PostTables! |
|
EquationEditor! |
PreClose! |
|
Footers! |
PreDocument! |
|
Footnote! |
PreNew! |
|
Headers! |
PreOpen! |
|
Main! |
PrePrint! |
|
Outline! |
PreTables! |
|
PostClose! |
SGML! |
|
PostDocument! |
Tables! |
|
PostNew! |
Watermark! |
|
PostOpen! |
Object
enumeration
ButtonBar!
Keyboard!
Macro!
Menu!
ObjectName
string
See Also
AssociateDlg, MergeFileAssociate, TemplateGetAssociation
TextBorderCreate
Purpose
Create a border for the current paragraph, column, or page. Use with TextBorderEnd.
Syntax
TextBorderCreate (Style: any; FillName: any; BorderFunction: enumeration)
Parameters
Style
any
|
ButtonBorder! |
HeavySingleBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderAll! |
NoBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderBetween! |
SingleBorder! |
|
DashedBorder! |
SpacingOnly! |
|
DottedBorder! |
ThickBorder! |
|
DoubleBorder! |
ThickThinBorder! |
|
ExtraThickBorder! |
ThickTopBottomBorder! |
|
HeavyDoubleBorder! |
ThinThickBorder! |
FillName
any
|
Fill10! |
Fill60! |
|
Fill100! |
Fill70! |
|
Fill20! |
Fill80! |
|
Fill30! |
Fill90! |
|
Fill40! |
FillButton! |
|
Fill5! |
NoFill! |
|
Fill50! |
BorderFunction
enumeration
ColumnBorder!
PageBorder!
ParagraphBorder!
See Also
?Border, ?ColumnBorder, ?PageBorder, ?ParagraphBorder, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd, FancyPageBorder
TextBorderEdit
Purpose
Begin editing changes to the current border.
Syntax
TextBorderEdit (BorderType: enumeration)
Parameters
BorderType
enumeration
column!
page!
paragraph!
See Also
TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEnd
TextBorderEnd
Purpose
End text border creation or editing and save or cancel changes.
Syntax
TextBorderEnd (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Cancel!
Save!
See Also
TextBorderCreate, TextBorderEdit
TextBorderFillStyle
Purpose
Specify a fill style for the current border.
Syntax
TextBorderFillStyle (Fillname: any)
Parameters
Fillname
any
|
Fill10! |
Fill60! |
|
Fill100! |
Fill70! |
|
Fill20! |
Fill80! |
|
Fill30! |
Fill90! |
|
Fill40! |
FillButton! |
|
Fill5! |
NoFill! |
|
Fill50! |
See Also
TextBorderEdit
TextBorderStyle
Purpose
Specify the current border style.
Syntax
TextBorderStyle (Style: any)
Parameters
Style
any
|
ButtonBorder! |
HeavySingleBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderAll! |
NoBorder! |
|
ColumnBorderBetween! |
SingleBorder! |
|
DashedBorder! |
SpacingOnly! |
|
DottedBorder! |
ThickBorder! |
|
DoubleBorder! |
ThickThinBorder! |
|
ExtraThickBorder! |
ThickTopBottomBorder! |
|
HeavyDoubleBorder! |
ThinThickBorder! |
See Also
?Border, TextBorderEdit, TextBorderEnd
TextBoxCreate
Purpose
Create a text box and display the Text Box feature bar.
Syntax
TextBoxCreate ()
See Also
Close
TextColor
Purpose
Specify a text color.
Syntax
TextColor (ColorName: string; Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric)
Parameters
ColorName
string (optional) This parameter has been left in for backward compatability with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect. To specify a color in Corel WordPerfect 8, use the Red, Green, and Blue parameters.
Red
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric (optional) Value: 0-255.
See Also
?TextColorBlue, ?TextColorGreen, ?TextColorRed, ?TextShade, TextShade
TextShade
Purpose
Specify the intensity of a text color.
Syntax
TextShade (ShadingValue: numeric)
Parameters
ShadingValue
numeric Percent. Full intensity: 100%.
See Also
TextColor
ThirdPartyCreate
Purpose
Insert a third party function into a document.
Syntax
ThirdPartyCreate (Id: numeric; Data: raw binary data)
Parameters
Id
numeric
Data
raw binary data
ThirdPartyDelete
Purpose
Delete a third party function from a document.
Syntax
ThirdPartyDelete (Id: numeric; From: enumeration; Direction: enumeration)
Parameters
Id
numeric
From
enumeration
BegOfFile!
CurrentPos!
Direction
enumeration
Backward!
Forward!
ThirdPartyFind
Purpose
Find the third party id of the next or previous third party.
Syntax
numeric := ThirdPartyFind (From: enumeration; Direction: enumeration)
Parameters
From
enumeration
BegOfFile!
CurrentPos!
Direction
enumeration
Backward!
Forward!
ThirdPartyFindByID
Purpose
Get the data from a third party function.
Syntax
raw binary data := ThirdPartyFindByID (Id: numeric; From: enumeration; Direction: enumeration)
Parameters
Id
numeric
From
enumeration
BegOfFile!
CurrentPos!
Direction
enumeration
Backward!
Forward!
ThousandsSeparator
Purpose
Specify a character to separate each three digits. Use when the FormatType parameter of TableCellNumberFormat, TableColumnNumberFormat, or TableNumberFormat is Comma!; or use with TableCellNumberUseCommas, TableColumnNumberUseCommas, or TableNumberUseCommas.
Syntax
ThousandsSeparator (Character: string)
Parameters
Character
string
See Also
?ThousandsSeparatorChar, TableCellNumberFormat, TableCellNumberUseCommas, TableColumnNumberFormat, TableColumnNumberUseCommas, TableNumberFormat, TableNumberUseCommas
TOACreateFullFormDlg
Purpose
Display the Create Full Form dialog box.
Syntax
TOACreateFullFormDlg ()
TOADefineDlg
Purpose
Display the Define Table of Authorities dialog box.
Syntax
TOADefineDlg ()
TOADefinition
Purpose
Specify a section, define format options, and insert a table of authorities definition in the document.
Syntax
TOADefinition (SectionName: string; Style: any; Numbering: enumeration; Underline: enumeration; PageCombine: enumeration; NumberingFormat: string)
Parameters
SectionName
string
Style
any (optional)
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Numbering
enumeration (optional)
DefFlushRight!
DefFollows!
DefLeader!
DefNone!
DefParentheses!
Underline
enumeration (optional)
NoToAUnderline!
ToAUnderline!
PageCombine
enumeration (optional) Combine sequential page numbers.
Combine!
NoCombine!
NumberingFormat
string (optional)
See Also
?TOADefinition, TOADefinitionCreate
TOADefinitionCombine
Purpose
Combine sequential page numbers in a table of authorities section.
Syntax
TOADefinitionCombine (SectionName: string; Combine: enumeration)
Parameters
SectionName
string
Combine
enumeration (optional)
Combine!
NoCombine!
TOADefinitionCreate
Purpose
Create a table of authorities definition.
Syntax
TOADefinitionCreate (SectionName: string; Style: any; Numbering: enumeration; Underline: enumeration; PageCombine: enumeration; NumberingFormat: string)
Parameters
SectionName
string
Style
any (optional)
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Numbering
enumeration (optional)
DefFlushRight!
DefFollows!
DefLeader!
DefNone!
DefParentheses!
Underline
enumeration (optional) Allow underlining.
NoToAUnderline!
ToAUnderline!
PageCombine
enumeration (optional) Combine sequential page numbers.
Combine!
NoCombine!
NumberingFormat
string (optional)
See Also
TOADefinitionDelete
TOADefinitionDelete
Purpose
Delete a table of authorities section definition.
Syntax
TOADefinitionDelete (SectionName: string)
Parameters
SectionName
string
See Also
TOADefinitionCreate
TOADefinitionMode
Purpose
Specify a page numbering mode in a section.
Syntax
TOADefinitionMode (SectionName: string; Numbering: enumeration)
Parameters
SectionName
string
Numbering
enumeration (optional)
DefFlushRight!
DefFollows!
DefFollowsParenthesis!
DefLeaders!
DefNone!
See Also
TOADefinitionCreate
TOADefinitionRename
Purpose
Rename a section.
Syntax
TOADefinitionRename (OldSection: string; NewSection: string)
Parameters
OldSection
string
NewSection
string
See Also
TOADefinitionCreate
TOADefinitionRetrieve
Purpose
Retrieve a section from another document into the current document.
Syntax
TOADefinitionRetrieve (Filename: string; SectionName: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
SectionName
string
See Also
TOADefinitionCreate
TOADefinitionStyle
Purpose
Specify a table of authorities section style.
Syntax
TOADefinitionStyle (SectionName: string; Style: any)
Parameters
SectionName
string
Style
any
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
See Also
TOADefinitionCreate
TOADefinitionUnderline
Purpose
Turn Underlining on or off in a table of authorities section.
Syntax
TOADefinitionUnderline (Section: string; Action: enumeration)
Parameters
Section
string
Action
enumeration (optional)
NoToAUnderline!
ToAUnderline!
TOAEditFullForm
Purpose
Begin editing changes to a full form. SubstructureExit ends editing and saves changes.
Syntax
TOAEditFullForm (ShortForm: string)
Parameters
ShortForm
string
See Also
TOAEditFullFormDlg, TOAMark
TOAEditFullFormCBar
Purpose
Display the Table of Authorities Full Form feature bar.
Syntax
TOAEditFullFormCBar ()
See Also
TOAEditFullForm, TOAEditFullFormDlg
TOAEditFullFormDlg
Purpose
Display the Edit Full Form dialog box.
Syntax
TOAEditFullFormDlg ()
See Also
TOAEditFullForm
TOAEditPageFormat
Purpose
Specify the text for page numbering in a table of authorities.
Syntax
TOAEditPageFormat (Listname: string; NumberFormat: any)
Parameters
Listname
string
NumberFormat
any Use a string to specify a custom format.
DocFormat!
See Also
TOADefinitionCreate
TOAEditSection
Purpose
Rename a section name in the full form of a table of authorities.
Syntax
TOAEditSection (OldName: string; NewName: string)
Parameters
OldName
string
NewName
string
TOAEditShortForm
Purpose
Rename a short form name in the full form of a table of authorities.
Syntax
TOAEditShortForm (OldName: string; NewName: string)
Parameters
OldName
string
NewName
string
See Also
TOAMark
TOAMark
Purpose
Mark the selected text as a table of authorities reference.
Syntax
TOAMark (SectionName: string; ShortForm: string)
Parameters
SectionName
string (optional)
ShortForm
string (optional)
See Also
TOADefinitionCreate
TOAMarkShortForm
Purpose
Mark the current short form citation at the insertion point.
Syntax
TOAMarkShortForm (ShortForm: string)
Parameters
ShortForm
string
See Also
TOAMark
TOCDefine
Purpose
Define a table of contents and insert the definition.
Syntax
TOCDefine (WrapLastLevel: enumeration; NumberingFormat: string; {Style: any; Numbering: enumeration; })
Parameters
WrapLastLevel
enumeration (optional) Wrap the last level.
No!
Yes!
NumberingFormat
string (optional) The page numbering format.
Style
any (optional)
|
AddressStyle! |
Legal4Style! |
|
BoxTextStyle! |
Legal5Style! |
|
BulletsOutlnStyle! |
Legal6Style! |
|
CaptionStyle! |
Legal7Style! |
|
CommentStyle! |
Legal8Style! |
|
CustomHTMLStyle! |
LegalOutlnStyle! |
|
Definition1Style! |
Level1Style! |
|
Definition2Style! |
Level2Style! |
|
Definition3Style! |
Level3Style! |
|
Definition4Style! |
Level4Style! |
|
Definition5Style! |
Level5Style! |
|
Definition6Style! |
Level6Style! |
|
Definition7Style! |
Level7Style! |
|
Definition8Style! |
Level8Style! |
|
DefinitionsOutlnStyle! |
ListStyle! |
|
DocStyle! |
MonospacedStyle! |
|
EndnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
NormalStyle! |
|
EndnoteStyle! |
NumbersOutlnStyle! |
|
EquationNumberStyle! |
OutlineStyle! |
|
FigureNumberStyle! |
ParagraphOutlnStyle! |
|
FooterAStyle! |
PreformattedStyle! |
|
FooterBStyle! |
Quotation1Style! |
|
FootnoteNumberInDocumentStyle! |
Quotation2Style! |
|
FootnoteStyle! |
Quotation3Style! |
|
HeaderAStyle! |
Quotation4Style! |
|
HeaderBStyle! |
Quotation5Style! |
|
Heading1Style! |
Quotation6Style! |
|
Heading2Style! |
Quotation7Style! |
|
Heading3Style! |
Quotation8Style! |
|
Heading4Style! |
QuotationsOutlnStyle! |
|
Heading5Style! |
TableBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading6Style! |
TextBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Heading7Style! |
ToAStyle! |
|
Heading8Style! |
ToC1Style! |
|
HeadingsOutlnStyle! |
ToC2Style! |
|
HypertextStyle! |
ToC3Style! |
|
Index1Style! |
ToC4Style! |
|
Index2Style! |
ToC5Style! |
|
Legal_2OutlnStyle! |
UserBoxNumberStyle! |
|
Legal1Style! |
WatermarkAStyle! |
|
Legal2Style! |
WatermarkBStyle! |
|
Legal3Style! |
Numbering
enumeration (optional) The page numbering mode for references.
DefFlushRight!
DefFollows!
DefLeader!
DefNone!
DefParentheses!
See Also
TOCDefineDlg, TOCMark
TOCDefineDlg
Purpose
Display the Define Table of Contents dialog box.
Syntax
TOCDefineDlg ()
See Also
?TOCDefinition, TOCDefine, TOCMark
TOCMark
Purpose
Mark the selected text for the table of contents.
Syntax
TOCMark (Level: numeric)
Parameters
Level
numeric
See Also
TOCDefine
ToolbarCount
Purpose
Return the number of active toolbars.
Syntax
numeric := ToolbarCount ()
ToolbarName
Purpose
Return the name of an active toolbar.
Syntax
string := ToolbarName (Toolbar: numeric)
Parameters
Toolbar
numeric
TotalPages
Purpose
Return the total number of pages in the current document. Not recordable. If something was added to the middle of a document that increased the total number of pages, TotalPages may not return the current value. Several techniques can be used to make sure this value is current. Moving to the end of the document is one of them. The following is an example of moving to the end of the document before using TotalPages:QuickmarkSet ()PosDocBottom ()QuickMarkFind ()BookmarkDelete (Name: “QuickMark”)vPages := TotalPages ()
Syntax
numeric := TotalPages ()
See Also
?Page, QuickmarkSet
TotalPagesDisplay
Purpose
Insert a code in the text to display the total number of pages.
Syntax
TotalPagesDisplay ()
TotalPagesMethod
Purpose
Specify the page numbering method for the total number of pages.
Syntax
TotalPagesMethod (Method: enumeration)
Parameters
Method
enumeration (optional)
LowerLetters!
LowerRoman!
Numbers!
UpperLetters!
UpperRoman!
See Also
TotalPagesMethodQry
TotalPagesMethodQry
Purpose
Return the current page numbering method for the total number of pages.
Syntax
numeric := TotalPagesMethodQry ()
TransitionAdvisor
Purpose
Open the Upgrade Expert, which helps you move to Corel WordPerfect 8 from another word processor.
Syntax
TransitionAdvisor ()
TwainAcquire
Purpose
Scan an image into Corel WordPerfect. This token is valid only if the optional TWAIN support files were installed using the Corel WordPerfect custom install option and a TWAIN compatible scanning device is installed.
Syntax
TwainAcquire ()
TwainSelectSourceDlg
Purpose
Display the Select Image Source dialog box. This token is valid only if the optional TWAIN support files were installed using the custom install option and a TWAIN compatible scanning device is installed.
Syntax
TwainSelectSourceDlg ()
Type
Purpose
Insert text at the insertion point.
Syntax
Type ({Text: string; })
Parameters
Text
string (optional)
See Also
TypeChar
TypeChar
Purpose
Insert a character from the Corel WordPerfect character sets. Not recordable.
Syntax
TypeChar (CharacterSet: numeric; Offset: numeric)
Parameters
CharacterSet
numeric
Offset
numeric A Corel WordPerfect character.
See Also
Type
Typeover
Purpose
Turn Typeover on or off.
Syntax
Typeover (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?TypeoverActive
TypeoverKey
Purpose
Toggle Typeover. Recordable substitute: Typeover.
Syntax
TypeoverKey ()
See Also
Typeover
TypesetManualKerningDlg
Purpose
Display the Manual Kerning dialog box, which allows you to increase or decrease the space between two characters.
Syntax
TypesetManualKerningDlg ()
See Also
KerningSpacing
Undelete
Purpose
Restore the specified deletion at the insertion point. The first, second, or third most recent deletions can be restored.
Syntax
Undelete (Which: numeric)
Parameters
Which
numeric The level to restore (1-3).
See Also
?UndeleteBuffers, UndeleteDlg, Undo
UndeleteDlg
Purpose
Display the Undelete dialog box, which will allow you to restore one of the last three deletions.
Syntax
UndeleteDlg ()
UnderlineSpaces
Purpose
Underline spaces.
Syntax
UnderlineSpaces (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?UnderlineSpaces, UnderlineTabs
UnderlineTabs
Purpose
Underline tabs.
Syntax
UnderlineTabs (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
No!
Yes!
See Also
?UnderlineTabs, UnderlineSpaces
Undo
Purpose
Restore the last or the specified document change. Choosing Undo a second time restores the last undo.
Syntax
Undo (Number: numeric)
Parameters
Number
numeric (optional) Allow for multi-level undos.
See Also
Redo, Undelete
UndoRedoDlg
Purpose
Display the Undo/Redo History dialog box, which allows you to cancel or restore recent changes to a document.
Syntax
UndoRedoDlg ()
UseRegQuotesWithNumbers
Purpose
Turn Use Regular Quotes with Numbers on or off.
Syntax
UseRegQuotesWithNumbers (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
DoubleSmartQuote, SingleSmartQuote
UserFunction
Purpose
Execute a third-party execution command.
Syntax
UserFunction (Action: string; {Data: any; })
Parameters
Action
string The action a third-party program performs. Form: <signature>:<action?. The four-character <signature> identifies a third-party application. The <action> specifies a third-party command.
Data
any (optional)
ViewDraft
Purpose
Display a document without substructures such as headers, footers, and footnotes.
Syntax
ViewDraft ()
See Also
ViewPage, ViewTwoPage
ViewOutline
Purpose
Display the Outline feature bar and insert the first-level heading.
Syntax
ViewOutline ()
ViewPage
Purpose
Display a document with substructures such as headers, footers, and footnotes.
Syntax
ViewPage ()
See Also
ViewDraft, ViewTwoPage
ViewToggle
Purpose
Toggle the view between HTML and Page.
Syntax
ViewToggle ()
ViewToolbarsDlg
Purpose
Display the Toolbars dialog box.
Syntax
ViewToolbarsDlg ()
See Also
ButtonBarShow, PowerBarShow, RulerBarShow, StatusBarShow
ViewTwoPage
Purpose
Display two document pages.
Syntax
ViewTwoPage ()
See Also
ViewDraft, ViewPage
VLineCreate
Purpose
Create a vertical line at the insertion point between the top and bottom margin.
Syntax
VLineCreate ()
VolumeNumber
Purpose
Specify the active volume number.
Syntax
VolumeNumber (Volume: numeric)
Parameters
Volume
numeric
See Also
?VolumeNumber
VolumeNumberDecrement
Purpose
Decrease the active volume number by one.
Syntax
VolumeNumberDecrement ()
VolumeNumberDisplay
Purpose
Insert the active volume number at the insertion point.
Syntax
VolumeNumberDisplay ()
VolumeNumberIncrement
Purpose
Increase the active volume number by one.
Syntax
VolumeNumberIncrement ()
VolumeNumberMethod
Purpose
Specify a numbering type to display volume numbers.
Syntax
VolumeNumberMethod (NumberingMethod: enumeration)
Parameters
NumberingMethod
enumeration
LowerLetters!
LowerRoman!
Numbers!
UpperLetters!
UpperRoman!
See Also
?VolumeNumberMethod
WatermarkA
Purpose
Create, edit, or turn off Watermark A on the specified pages.
Syntax
WatermarkA (Action: enumeration; Occurrence: enumeration; State: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
Create!
Edit!
Off!
Occurrence
enumeration (optional)
AllPages!
EvenPages!
NoPages!
OddPages!
State
enumeration (optional)
NoOverlay!
Overlay!
See Also
?WatermarkAOccur, WatermarkB
WatermarkB
Purpose
Create, edit, or turn off Watermark B on the specified pages.
Syntax
WatermarkB (Action: enumeration; Occurrence: enumeration; State: enumeration)
Parameters
Action
enumeration
Create!
Edit!
Off!
Occurrence
enumeration (optional)
AllPages!
EvenPages!
NoPages!
OddPages!
State
enumeration (optional)
NoOverlay!
Overlay!
See Also
?WatermarkBOccur, WatermarkA
WatermarkDlg
Purpose
Display the Watermark dialog box in order to create a watermark.
Syntax
WatermarkDlg ()
WatermarkNext
Purpose
Go to the next watermark.
Syntax
WatermarkNext ()
WatermarkPlacementDlg
Purpose
Display the Pages dialog box, in which you determine on which pages your watermark will appear.
Syntax
WatermarkPlacementDlg ()
WatermarkPrev
Purpose
Go to the previous watermark.
Syntax
WatermarkPrev ()
WatermarkShadingDlg
Purpose
Display the Watermark Shading dialog box.
Syntax
WatermarkShadingDlg ()
WatermarkShippingMacro
Purpose
Play the shipping macro WATERMRK.WCM to display the Watermark Options dialog box, where you can select Watermark A or B and graphics or text. If Graphic is selected, the Graphic Watermarks dialog box is displayed with a list of watermarks to preview or insert. If Text is selected, the Watermark Creation Macro dialog box is displayed, in which you enter watermark text to insert. WATERMARK.WCM must be installed.
Syntax
WatermarkShippingMacro ()
WebActiveLinkColor
Purpose
Set the active hypertext-link color of the active web document. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is in Web Editor mode.
Syntax
WebActiveLinkColor (Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric)
Parameters
Red
numeric Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric Value: 0-255.
See Also
WebActiveLinkColorRed, WebActiveLinkColorGreen, WebActiveLinkColorBlue
WebActiveLinkColorBlue
Purpose
Return the blue value of the active hypertext-link color for the active web document. If the active document is not a web document, the blue value of the default active hypertext-link color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebActiveLinkColorBlue ()
See Also
WebActiveLinkColor
WebActiveLinkColorGreen
Purpose
Return the green value of the active hypertext-link color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the green value of the default active hypertext-link color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebActiveLinkColorGreen ()
See Also
WebActiveLinkColor
WebActiveLinkColorRed
Purpose
Return the red value of the active hypertext-link color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the red value of the default active hypertext-link color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebActiveLinkColorRed ()
See Also
WebActiveLinkColor
WebBackgroundColor
Purpose
Set the background color of the active web document. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is in Web Editor mode.
Syntax
WebBackgroundColor (Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric)
Parameters
Red
numeric Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric Value: 0-255.
See Also
WebBackgroundColorRed, WebBackgroundColorGreen, WebBackgroundColorBlue
WebBackgroundColorBlue
Purpose
Return the blue value of the background color for the active web document. If the active document is not a web document, the blue value of the default background color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebBackgroundColorBlue ()
See Also
WebBackgroundColor
WebBackgroundColorGreen
Purpose
Return the green value of the background color for the active web document. If the active document is not a web document, the green value of the default background color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebBackgroundColorGreen ()
See Also
WebBackgroundColor
WebBackgroundColorRed
Purpose
Return the red value of the background color for the active web document. If the active document is not a web document, the red value of the default background color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebBackgroundColorRed ()
See Also
WebBackgroundColor
WebBackgroundImage
Purpose
Specify a background image for the active web document. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is in Web Editor mode.
Syntax
WebBackgroundImage (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string
See Also
?WebBackgroundImage
WebBaseURL
Purpose
Specify the base URL for the active web document. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is in Web Editor mode.
Syntax
WebBaseURL (URL: string)
Parameters
URL
string
See Also
?WebBaseURL, WebTitleDlg
WebBoxHTMLProperties
Purpose
Specify the HTML properties of the active box. Precede with BoxCreate or BoxEdit and end with BoxEnd.
Syntax
WebBoxHTMLProperties (Properties: string)
Parameters
Properties
string
See Also
WebBoxHTMLPropertiesDlg, ?WebBoxHTMLProperties
WebBoxHTMLPropertiesDlg
Purpose
Display the Box HTML Properties dialog box. Valid only when a graphics box is selected.
Syntax
WebBoxHTMLPropertiesDlg ()
See Also
WebBoxHTMLProperties, ?WebBoxHTMLProperties
WebColorDlg
Purpose
Display the HTML Document Properties (Text/Background color) dialog box.
Syntax
WebColorDlg ()
WebColumnDefineDlg
Purpose
Specify the number and size of columns.
Syntax
WebColumnDefineDlg ()
WebCustomHTMLToggle
Purpose
Turn Web Custom HTML on or off.
Syntax
WebCustomHTMLToggle ()
WebFormsFormPropertiesDlg
Purpose
Display the Properties dialog for a form.
Syntax
WebFormsFormPropertiesDlg ()
WebFormsHiddenDlg
Purpose
Display the Properties dialog for a hidden field.
Syntax
WebFormsHiddenDlg ()
WebFormsListPropertiesDlg
Purpose
Display the Properties dialog for a selection list.
Syntax
WebFormsListPropertiesDlg ()
WebFormsProperties
Purpose
Edit the properties of the form or form field.
Syntax
WebFormsProperties ()
WebFormsRadioPropertiesDlg
Purpose
Display the Properties dialog for a radio or check box button.
Syntax
WebFormsRadioPropertiesDlg ()
WebFormsTextAreaPropertiesDlg
Purpose
Display the Properties dialog for a multi-line text field.
Syntax
WebFormsTextAreaPropertiesDlg ()
WebFormsTextPropertiesDlg
Purpose
Display the Properties dialog for a text or password field.
Syntax
WebFormsTextPropertiesDlg ()
WebInsertCheckBox
Purpose
Insert a check box into the form.
Syntax
WebInsertCheckBox ()
WebInsertForm
Purpose
Create a new web form.
Syntax
WebInsertForm ()
WebInsertHiddenField
Purpose
Insert a hidden field into the form.
Syntax
WebInsertHiddenField ()
WebInsertPassword
Purpose
Insert a password field into the form.
Syntax
WebInsertPassword ()
WebInsertRadioButton
Purpose
Insert a radio button into the form.
Syntax
WebInsertRadioButton ()
WebInsertResetButton
Purpose
Insert a reset button into the form.
Syntax
WebInsertResetButton ()
WebInsertSelectList
Purpose
Insert a selection list into the form.
Syntax
WebInsertSelectList ()
WebInsertSubmitButton
Purpose
Insert a submit button into the form.
Syntax
WebInsertSubmitButton ()
WebInsertSubmitImage
Purpose
Insert a submit image into the form.
Syntax
WebInsertSubmitImage ()
WebInsertTextArea
Purpose
Insert a text area into the form.
Syntax
WebInsertTextArea ()
WebInsertTextLine
Purpose
Insert a text line into the form.
Syntax
WebInsertTextLine ()
WebJavaCreateApplet
Purpose
Create a Java applet.
Syntax
WebJavaCreateApplet ()
WebJavaModifyApplet
Purpose
Modify a Java applet.
Syntax
WebJavaModifyApplet ()
WebJavaRunApplets
Purpose
View the Java applets that are running.
Syntax
WebJavaRunApplets ()
WebLaunchWebBrowser
Purpose
Call the web browser and go to the specified location.
Syntax
WebLaunchWebBrowser (Location: string)
Parameters
Location
string (optional) The location (URL address) to go to. This is sometimes called an Internet address, web address, or Web site. If no address is specified, the Corel Corporation URL is used.
See Also
HelpOnlineSupportDlg, LaunchOnlineService
WebLinkColor
Purpose
Specify the hypertext-link color of the active web document. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is in Web Editor mode.
Syntax
WebLinkColor (Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric)
Parameters
Red
numeric Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric Value: 0-255.
See Also
WebLinkColorRed, WebLinkColorGreen, WebLinkColorBlue
WebLinkColorBlue
Purpose
Return the blue value of the hypertext-link color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the blue value of the default hypertext-link color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebLinkColorBlue ()
See Also
WebLinkColor
WebLinkColorGreen
Purpose
Return the green value of the hypertext-link color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the green value of the default hypertext-link color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebLinkColorGreen ()
See Also
WebLinkColor
WebLinkColorRed
Purpose
Return the red value of the hypertext-link color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the red value of the default hypertext-link color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebLinkColorRed ()
See Also
WebLinkColor
WebMetaTags
Purpose
Specify Meta tags for the active web document. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is in Web Editor mode.
Syntax
WebMetaTags (Meta: string)
Parameters
Meta
string
See Also
?WebMetaTags, WebTitleDlg
WebMonoToggle
Purpose
Turn Web Monospaced on or off.
Syntax
WebMonoToggle ()
WebNewDlg
Purpose
Display the Select New Web Document dialog box.
Syntax
WebNewDlg ()
See Also
TemplateDlg
WebPublish
Purpose
Save the current document in HTML format (.HTM).
Syntax
WebPublish (Filename: string)
Parameters
Filename
string The path and filename of the HTML document.
See Also
InternetPublisherDlg, WebPublishDlg
WebPublishDlg
Purpose
Display the Publish to Web dialog box.
Syntax
WebPublishDlg ()
See Also
InternetPublisherDlg, WebPublish
WebTextColor
Purpose
Set the regular-text color of the active web document. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is in Web Editor mode.
Syntax
WebTextColor (Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric)
Parameters
Red
numeric Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric Value: 0-255.
See Also
WebTextColorRed, WebTextColorGreen, WebTextColorBlue
WebTextColorBlue
Purpose
Return the blue value of the text color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the blue value of the default text color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebTextColorBlue ()
See Also
WebTextColor
WebTextColorGreen
Purpose
Return the green value of the text color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the green value of the default text color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebTextColorGreen ()
See Also
WebTextColor
WebTextColorRed
Purpose
Return the red value of the text color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the red value of the default text color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebTextColorRed ()
See Also
WebTextColor
WebTitle
Purpose
Specify the title for the active web document. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is in Web Editor mode.
Syntax
WebTitle (Title: any)
Parameters
Title
any
Auto!
See Also
?WebTitle
WebTitleDlg
Purpose
Display the Title dialog box for web documents. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is in Web Editor mode.
Syntax
WebTitleDlg ()
See Also
?WebTitle, WebTitle, WebBaseURL, WebMetaTags
WebViewAsHTML
Purpose
View the active document using HTML.
Syntax
WebViewAsHTML ()
WebViewInWebBrowser
Purpose
Convert the current document to HTML format and view it in a web browser. This command is valid only if you have a web browser installed.
Syntax
WebViewInWebBrowser ()
See Also
InternetPublisherDlg
WebVisitedLinkColor
Purpose
Specify the visited hypertext-link color of the active web document. This command is valid only when Corel WordPerfect is in Web Editor mode.
Syntax
WebVisitedLinkColor (Red: numeric; Green: numeric; Blue: numeric)
Parameters
Red
numeric Value: 0-255.
Green
numeric Value: 0-255.
Blue
numeric Value: 0-255.
WebVisitedLinkColorBlue
Purpose
Return the blue value of the visited hypertext-link color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the blue value of the default visited hypertext-link color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebVisitedLinkColorBlue ()
See Also
WebVisitedLinkColor
WebVisitedLinkColorGreen
Purpose
Return the green value of the visited hypertext-link color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the green value of the default visited hypertext-link color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebVisitedLinkColorGreen ()
See Also
WebVisitedLinkColor
WebVisitedLinkColorRed
Purpose
Return the red value of the visited hypertext-link color for the active web document. If the current document is not a web document, the red value of the default visited hypertext-link color for web documents is returned.
Syntax
numeric := WebVisitedLinkColorRed ()
See Also
WebVisitedLinkColor
WidowOrphan
Purpose
Turn Widow/Orphan on or off.
Syntax
WidowOrphan (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
See Also
?WidowOrphan, BlockProtect, ConditionalEndOfPage, KeepTextTogetherDlg
WindowCascade
Purpose
Overlap document windows to display the title bar of each window.
Syntax
WindowCascade ()
WindowTile
Purpose
Arrange all open document windows top to bottom without overlapping them.
Syntax
WindowTile ()
WindowTileVertical
Purpose
Arrange all open document windows side by side without overlapping them.
Syntax
WindowTileVertical ()
See Also
WindowTile
WordCountDlg
Purpose
Display document information, such as word and page count, and words per sentence.
Syntax
WordCountDlg ()
WordLetterspaceDlg
Purpose
Display the Word/Letter Spacing dialog box.
Syntax
WordLetterspaceDlg ()
WordLetterSpacing
Purpose
Specify the display spacing between words and letters. Normal: recommended by font manufacturer. Optimal: recommended by Corel WordPerfect.
Syntax
WordLetterSpacing (CharacterWidth: enumeration; SpaceWidth: enumeration)
Parameters
CharacterWidth
enumeration The spacing between words. Use a number to specify a percent of the Optimal! default.
Maximum!
Normal!
Optimal!
SpaceWidth
enumeration The spacing between letters. Use a number to specify a percent of the Optimal! default.
Maximum!
Normal!
Optimal!
See Also
?CharSpaceWidth
WordSpacingJustificationLimits
Purpose
Adjust the spacing between words when Full justification is on. When a word spacing limit is reached, character spacing begins.
Syntax
WordSpacingJustificationLimits (Compression: numeric; Expansion: numeric)
Parameters
Compression
numeric The minimum percent.
Expansion
numeric The maximum percent.
See Also
?SpaceExpansion
WP51CursorMovement
Purpose
Turn Corel WordPerfect 5.1 for DOS cursor movement on or off. When Corel WordPerfect 5.1 cursor movement is on, the insertion point moves through codes as if Reveal Codes were on, regardless of the state of Reveal Codes.
Syntax
WP51CursorMovement (State: enumeration)
Parameters
State
enumeration
Off!
On!
WPActivate
Purpose
Activate Corel WordPerfect. Use with DDE links to another application.
Syntax
WPActivate ()
WPCharactersDlg
Purpose
Display the WordPerfect Characters dialog box.
Syntax
WPCharactersDlg ()
WPDraw
Purpose
Open Corel WordPerfect Draw.
Syntax
WPDraw ()
See Also
GraphicCreateChart
WPGrammatik
Purpose
Open Grammatik. This product allows you to check grammar and spelling in a document.
Syntax
WPGrammatik ()
See Also
WPSpeller, WPThesaurus
WPSpeller
Purpose
Display the Spell Checker dialog box.
Syntax
WPSpeller ()
See Also
WPSpeller, WPThesaurus
WPThesaurus
Purpose
Display the Thesaurus dialog box. The Thesaurus allows you to get synonyms, antonymns, definitions, and usages examples for words.
Syntax
WPThesaurus ()
WritingToolsDisable
Purpose
Toggle grammar and spell checking on or off at the insertion point or for the selected text. This command inserts a [Writing Tools: Disabled] or [Writing Tools: Enabled] code at the insertion point, depending on the current state.
Syntax
WritingToolsDisable ()
See Also
?WritingToolsDisabledState
ZoomDlg
Purpose
Display the Zoom dialog box, which allows you to change the magnification of the active window.
Syntax
ZoomDlg ()
See Also
?Zoom, ZoomToFullPage, ZoomToMarginWidth, ZoomToPageWidth
ZoomToFullPage
Purpose
Display a full page on screen.
Syntax
ZoomToFullPage ()
See Also
ZoomDlg, ZoomToMarginWidth, ZoomToPageWidth
ZoomToMarginWidth
Purpose
Display a document at the current margin width.
Syntax
ZoomToMarginWidth ()
See Also
ZoomDlg, ZoomToFullPage, ZoomToPageWidth
ZoomToPageWidth
Purpose
Display everything contained between the left and right edges of the current page.
Syntax
ZoomToPageWidth ()
See Also
ZoomDlg, ZoomToFullPage, ZoomToMarginWidth